The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutPermit D97-0193 - SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE - EXTERIOR UPGRADECity of Tukwila �» Parcel No: 262304 -9075 Address: 360 CORPORATE DR N Suite No: Location: Category: ACOM Type: DEVPERM Zoning: Const Type: Gas /Elec.: Units: 001 Setbacks: North: Water: N/A Wetlands: Signature: .0 South: .0 Sewer: N/A Slopes.:: ...; DEVELOPMENT PERMIT Permit No: Status: Issued: Expires: Community Development / Public Works • 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite 100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 WARNING: IF CONSTRUCTION BEGINS BEFORE APPEAL PERIOD EXPIRES, APPLICANT IS PROCEEDING AT THEIR OWN RISK. (206) 431-3670 D97 -0193 ISSUED 07/08/1997 01/04/1998 Occupancy: OFFICE UBC: 1994 Fire Protection: SPRINKLERED East: .0 West: .0 Streams: Contractor License No .,:•,.UNIMACC066DM. OCCUPANT SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE' SQUARE 360 CORPORATE DR N, TUKWILA' WA 98188 OWNER SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE Phone:'(206)575 -8500 C /O'JSH INC, 1005 ANDOVER PARK E,'. TUKWILA ,WA 98188 CONTACT .RON GREENE Phone: 206 575 -2120 •600 UNIVERSITY ST #2820, SEATTLE WA 98101 CONTRACTOR: CONSTRUCTION COMPANY Phone: 206.628 -5076 •,1325 FOURTH AVENUE #610,'-SEATTLE, WA 98161 ********************:*****************'**************** * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *. * * * * * * * * * * * * ** Permit Description: COSMETIC UPGRADE.TO BUILDING EXTERIOR AND ;ENHANCE LOBBY ' . ************ * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** * * ** Construction Valuation': $ 85,000.00 PUBLIC WORKS PERMITS: *(Water Meter Permits Listed Separate),,.Eng. Appr: JJS Curb Cut /Access /Sidewalk /CSS: N ::'Fire' Loop,Hydrant: N No Size(in): .00 ...Flood . Control Zone: N ' Hauling: N Start'Time.:: . End Time.:'. Land Altering: N Cut,: Fill: Landscape Irrigation: N Moving Oversized Load: N Start Time: End Time: Sanitary Side Sewer: N No: Sewer Main Extension: N Private:. Public: Storm Drainage: N Street Use: N Water Main Extension: N Private: . •Public: ********************************•********************* * * * * * * ** * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** TOTAL DEVELOPMENT PERMIT FEES: $ 1,313.78 ****************•*•****************•******************** * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** * * * * ** 1 Permit Center Authorized Signature: Q 01 Datej I hereby certify that I have read and examined this permit and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provision of any other state or local laws regulating construction or the performance of work. I am authorized to sign for and obtain this developmenyrm1t. Date: 7/8/ This permit shall become null and void if the work is not commenced within 180 days from the date of issuance, or if the work is suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 days from the last inspection. Project Name/Tenant: E - -Cnc_QL - e A r C. •r �� - rctL ' E .. y Wv c' V lue of Construction: 4 9 g_ S ri0 :\d..\ - \O City State/Zip: 2G CC1��,Site Address: Z,� uy # ,_ kte .N� Cpl xiA qR k9)9. . J(I) �`1t� � 'k-_ � \l ∎lto Tax Parce Numbe Number 24 1 SOIS - 00 Property Owner: Lc, v.1 V l ti S . N E I g t - i e s \ cu' Qom; e_tsitA • s 1 LL__ Phone: () 51 S-2-V Street Address: City State /Zip: la nr, ∎» V.t e,.NA A- ,: ‘ar._t .11 P.'o Scxxt- it-t.e s. )(A, CI PI t cn 1 te tZcX;:) , Fax #: 51 - t OA R Contractor: Phone: Street Addre City State/Zip: Fax #: Architect: WI ZS r GN't-.? L, -t_ ��► + L r .-ra) Phone' ) Z -2- 3 — S 2.'A S Street Addres. City State/Zip: : 1 t t S S. SG, S 01....S (:2 11/2-4 . 4. -. . 5e,..,44-1 e. t 1,1E <IP, \ o VI Fax # :. ` cL) (pZ \— 2- 0 Lk Engineer: ' C�'.L hone (c ) 5(-13 - -o4 (oc Street Address: City State /Zip: ill i IQ- 5�►-�.. - >, �{-'_ ,qzc ��.L - L� 'A se, k0 t ax #:. _ Fax 3 -S (9 coptact Person: ( 01.2i. t•,se.e-uce . . Phone' 70C, 51 s -2.1 - LC Street Address: City State /Zip: ` C)1.1�,t ��ku .r•zZ4 - !L?.r SE' t•'E'�� LA14'�q"t3lt� -Fax Description of work to be done: C�3n I r ( upcyc'a -e tC) buy Ic /i r9 C�cte//Ur vi- -en/ ate , } , anz • Existing use: ❑ Retail ❑ Restaurant ❑ Multi- family Warehouse ❑Hospital CI Church ❑ Manufacturing ❑ MotelHotel a Office ❑ School /College /University ❑ Other Proposed use: ❑ Retail ❑ Restaurant ❑ Multi- family ❑ Warehouse ❑Hospital ❑ Church ❑ Manufacturing ❑ Motel /Hotel gi ❑ School /College /University ❑ Other Will there be a change of use? ❑ yes SI no If yes, extent of change: (Attach additional sheet if necessary) Will there be rack storage? ❑ yes El no Existing fire protection features: 1521 sprinklers ® automatic fire alarm ❑ none ❑ other (specify) Building Square Feet: Z 0 dCK existing Area of Construction: (sq. ft.) \AOC) -- tk, 127‘..D L Ey,4- , Will there be storage of flammable /combustible hazardous material in the building? ❑ yes ®. no Attach list of materials and storage location on separate 8 1/2 X 11 paper indicating quantities & Material Safety Data Sheets CITY OF TUI WILA Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206) 431 -3670 Commercial / Multi - Family Tenant Improvement / Alteration Permit Application Application and plans must be complete in order to be accepted for plan review. Applications will not be accepted through the mall or facsimile. ❑ Channelization /Striping ❑ Curb cut/Access /Sidewalk ❑ Fire Loop /Hydrant (main to vault) #: Size(s): ❑ Land Altering 0 Cut cubic yds. 0 Fill cubic yds. Cl Sanitary Side Sewer #: ❑ Sewer Main Extension ❑ Storm Drainage ❑ Street Use ❑ Water Main Extension 11 Water Meter /Exempt #: Size(s): 0 Deduct ❑ Water Meter /Permanent # Size(s): ❑ Water Meter Temp # Size(s): Est. quantity: ❑ Miscellaneous Value of Construction - In all cases, a value of construction amount should be entered by the applicant. This figure will be reviewed and is subject to possible revision by the Permit Center to comply with current fee schedules. Expiration of Plan Review - Applications for which no permit Is issued within 180 days following the date of application shall expire by limitation. The building official may extend the time for action by the applicant for a period not exceeding 180 days upon written request by the applicant as defined in Section 107.4 of thEiM ltittuilding Code (current edition). No application shall be extended more than once. LAA PLEASL SJGN BACK OF APPLICATION FORM cTI'ERMIT.DOC 1/29/97 APPLICANT REQUEST FOR PUBLIC WORKS .SITE/CIVIL .PLAN REVIEW OF THE FOLLOWING: (Additional reviews may be determined by the Public Works Department) ❑ Flood Control Zone ❑ Hauling ❑ Landscape Irrigation O Private 0 Public O Private 0 Public 0 Water Only gal Schedule' BUIUDIN OWNER OR AUT ORIZED AGENT: ' . Sign�tur n , 4 .. ,, c D ate: b a. Print nartlt , - • 4 tPhone: s-1 Z 2.0 Fax k: '' Addres$ _ kw, it I City /State /Zip x , 1,1 € L.L. q cl .13 ❑ ❑ Complete Legal Description ALL COMMERCIAUMULTI-FISLY TENANT IMPROVEMENT /AL 'ATION PERMIT APPLICATIONS MUTT BE SUBMITTED WITH THE FOL ' • WING: ➢ ,;A'C -L bRAWINdS TO BE STAMPED BY WASHINGTON STATE LICENSED ARCHITECT, 'S`T'RUCTURAL + EN(INEER OR CIVIL ENGINEER ➢ ALL DRAWINGS SHALL BE AT A LEGIBLE SCALE AND NEATLY DRAWN ➢ BUILDING SITE PLANS AND UTILITY PLANS ARE TO BE COMBINED N/A SUBMITTED ❑ ❑ Metro: Non - Residential Sewer Use Certification if there is a change in the amount of plumbing fixtures (Form H -13). Business Declaration required (Form H -10). Four (4) sets of working drawings (five(5) sets for structural work), which include : ❑ ❑ Site Plan (including existing fire hydrant location(s) 1. North arrow and scale 2. Property lines, dimensions, setbacks, names of adjacent roads, any proposed or existing easements 3. Parking Analysis of existing and proposed capacity; proposed stalls with dimensions 4. Location of driveways, parking, loading & service areas 5. Recycle collection location and area calculations (change of use only) 6. Location and screening of outdoor storage (change of use only) 7. Limits of clearing /grading with existing and proposed topography at 2' intervals extending 5' beyond property's boundaries 8. Identify location of sensitive area slopes 20% or greater, wetlands, watercourses and their buffers (change of use only) 9. Identify location and size of existing trees that are located in sensitive areas and buffer (TMC 18.45.040), of those, identify by size and species which are to be removed and saved 10. Landscape plan with irrigation and existing trees to be saved by size and species (exterior changes or change of use only) 11. Location and gross floor area of existing structure with dimensions and setback 12. Lowest finished floor elevation (if in flood control zone) 13. See Public Works Checklist for detailed civil /site plan information required for Public Works Review (Form H- 9). ❑ ❑ Floor plan: show location of tenant space with proposed use of each room labeled ❑ ❑ Overall building floor plan with adjacent tenant use; identify tenant space use and location of storage of any hazardous materials; dimensions of proposed tenant space. El El Vicinity Map showing location of site ❑ ❑ Rack Storage: If adding new racks or altering existing rack storage, provide a floor plan identifying rack layout and all exit doors. Show dimensions of aisles, include dimensions of height, length, and width of rack. Structural calculations are required for rack storage eight feet and over. ❑ ❑ Indicate proposed construction of tenant space or addition and walls being demolished ❑ ❑ Construction details ❑ ❑ Sprinkler details - details of sprinkler hangers, specifically penetrations in structure, i.e., roof; size of water supply to sprinkler vault with documentation from contractor stating supply line will meet or exceed sprinkler system design criteria as identified by the Fire Department. ❑ ❑ Washington State Non - Residential Energy Code Data shall be noted on the construction drawings. ❑ ❑ SEPA Checklist - if intensification of use (check with Planning Department for thresholds). ❑ ❑ Attach plans, reports or other documentation required to comply with Sensitive Area Ordinance or other land use or SEPA decisions. ❑ ❑ Food service establishments require two (2) sets of stamped approved plans by the Seattle -King County Department of Public Health prior to submitting for building permit application. The Department of Public Health is located at 201 Smith Tower, Seattle, WA or call (206) 296 -4787. (Form H -5) ❑ ❑ Copy of Washington State Department of Labor and Industries Valid Contractor's License. If no contractor has been selected at time of application a copy of this license will be required before the permit is issued OR submit Form H -4, "Affidavit in Lieu of Contractor Registration ". Building Owner /Authorized Agent If the applicant is other than the owner, registered architect/engineer, or contractor licensed by the State of Washington, a notarized letter from the property owner authorizing the agent to submit this permit application and obtain the permit will be required as part of this submittal I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO BE TRUE UNDER PENA OF PERJURY BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON, AND I AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT. CI'PcRMIT.DOC 1/29/97 Address: 360 CORPORATE DR N Suite Tenant: Type: DEVPERM Parcel #: 262304 -9075 performed,. CITY OF TUKWILA Permit No D97 -0193 Status: ISSUED Applied: O6t17/1997 Issued: 07/08/1997 • * • k k** k k***** k** k**** k**• k k k*•4* k*** k• k* k k* k* k*• k kk• k• k **•k•.4* * ** **•k Perm it Conditions: 1. Temporary erosion control measures shall be implemented as the first "order of business • to , prevent sedimentation off- site or into e,xisting,.st,orm �'drai,nage,>.fac•fi i,ties It shall be verified in • writi J ng to the City Uti,lites Inspector that the • fire _loop; system for the hufldiny contains a Sta par tment 'of Health approved detector double check va i ve ; .assemb l.y.: Th'i`s shall , be,' done "pr i or to the Final °I`n`s pectrQn • .No . changes, -,wi 1 l be made to th'e' p i ens unless approved by ,.the Archite <. o r . ,-Engi ; neer a•nd the, ,Tu,kwi 1a Building 'Di vi•s • E l ectr.l,ca'1 perm. is sha 1 1 be ob`ta.I.ned through: the.: Wash i ngtQn Stater :Division of _ abor;�,and :Industr:ies and all•. electrical work be inspecte.d;,_by that agency (248 -6630) 5 Al) psermits, in_pectio:n records and approved plans shall be, availabl'e 'at the job prior to start of any con' str ,These docurents'•are to,-be maintained and avail - : : ` abl••eluntil'''final i e'ctIonappro:val;is granted Al . structura'l concrete sha•i 1 ?be., s,pe :i,a inspected (UBC Seer; 306(a) 1) :_....... _ s'; +c ' , . Ali1„ structural 'wel,d'ingis:hal.1`\be done 'bv'ryW.A.B.O. cer welltiers, rand spec`ial- inspe.cted (UBC., `, S ^ ec .306(a)5) - W ig i' : , asc..' : _ . tt the owner, `' e t Erinspection' ,is 'regu,ired ither archltecta or `engine'er,s�ha`i`1 notAfy' the` Twi.�1a Building D i v"ssi or ;of ap po i n tment of the �i r�;sp i on`' i es `'pr the. f'•i j rs't,.. b "rii lding inspection. : of •al i .speclal insp'ec;tionreports shall be submitted to "'the: 13ui (ding Divis';i i'n a timely manner. Reports contain address, project name, permit number and 'typ of inspection being 9. The special inspector shall submit a final. signedr ; stating whether •the work requiring special inspection - was, to the best of the inspector's knowledge, in conformance with approved 'plans and specifications and the applicable workmanship provisions of the UBC. • 10. All construction be done in conformance with approved plans and requirements. of the Uniform Building Code (1994 Edition) as amended, Uniform Mechanical Code (1994 Edition), and Washington State Energy Code (1994 Edition). 11. Validity of Permit. The issuance of a permit or approval of plans, specifications, and computations shall not be con- strued to be a permit for, or an approval of, any violation of any of the provisions of the building code or of any other ordinance of the jurisdiction. No permit presuming to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of this code shall be valid. 12. Notify the City of Tukwila Building Division prior to placing any concrete. This procedure is in addition to any requirements for special inspection. ^ .: .. pe rn* Coo r mkt* Cc PLAN REVIEW / ROUTING SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER PROJECT NAME DEPARTMENT: �UILD G MSION FIRE PREVENTION P DMSION 10 14 62 - 1Q1 &IC WORKS STRUCTURAL PERMIT COORDINATOR ROC ca (aut 97 !JO- REVIEWERS INITIAL D97 -0193 DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (T,Th) DUE DATE 6/19/97 COMPLETE NOT COMPLETE El NOT APPLICABLE 0 COMMENTS TUES /THURS ROUTING: PLEASE ROUTE fl NO FURTHER REVIEW REQUIRED L__! ROUTED BY STAFF El (If routed by staff, make copy to master file & enter Sierra.) I I APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: (tea days) REVIEWERS INITIAL SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE — BUILDING #10 DATE APPROVED ( I APPROVED W/ CONDITIONS ❑ NOT APPROVED (attach comments) 0 DATE CORRECTION DETERMINATION: APPROVED I 1 APPROVED W/ CONDITIONS [11 NOT APPROVED (attach comments) 0 REVIEWERS INITIAL DATE C:ROUTE -F DATE 6/17/97 DUE DATE 7/03/97 DUE DATE (Certification of occupancy required. ) 7,A.V4∎1 m =:fvri Vint; TA ACTIVITY NUMBER D97 - 0193 DATE 6/17/97 PROJECT NAME PLAN REVIEW / ROUTING SLIP DEPARTMENT: BUILDING DIVISION 111 FIRE PREVENTION � --- J PLANNING DIVISION a PUBLIC WORKS STRUCTURAL El PERMIT COORDINATOR El I DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (T,Th) DUE DATE COMPLETE V6 NOT COMPLETE NOT APPLICABLE El COMMENTS TUES /THURS ROUTING: PLEASE ROUTE REVIEWERS INITIAL APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: (ten days) REVIEWERS INITIAL CORRECTION DETERMINATION: APPROVED [1 APPROVED W/ CONDITIONS REVIEWERS INITIAL SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE — BUILDING #10 DATE DATE — 1 DATE :wXh iti!rtNfitre:i,Aw.t-eun47, ; rgivr neAriimnilY.rAlkemtr71'A "at?,' nrier a rnrasoar.., ROUTED BY STAFF f1 (If routed by staff, make copy to master file & enter Sierra.) 6/19/97 NO FURTHER REVIEW REQUIRED E I DUE DATE 7/03/97 APPROVED n APPROVED W/ CONDITIONS. NOT APPROVED (attach comments) I DUE DATE NOT APPROVED (attach comments) 0 (Certification of occupancy required. ) C:ROUTE -F j.. ir: �:i X' . (},P:.•y� •x .rp Ut ,, „+: ",tia-' :•n CP•..Z. • „'i.:s"f 'c^:'E•:n'F' 'P'10, . 'i?C "'V' ti,'4tf�A'., ..xry��;,MV. • .?t, ^ :�'xT •'•. :; .J a ,z .tai: r. +. •t. �`w, ;x..�.. 5f?t�at. ew Sx.�; can -.fsP.^ilw�'xk.- F:. *.� .,>� „x' eta:. atrsA}) f�� .. ?.ifl..e.�.f;��t .... .k'"f�.,,. s. n..l d�?Etf.r. Y �� Yz ACTIVITY NUMBER D97 -0193 PROJECT NAME SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE — BUILDING 110 DEPARTMENT: BUILDING DIVISION fl FIRE PREVENTION II PLANNING DIVISION El PUBLIC WORKS U STRUCTURAL E] PERMIT COORDINATOR Q DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (T,Th) COMPLETE E NOT COMPLETE NOT APPLICABLE El COMMENTS • TUES /THURS ROUTING: PLEASE ROUTE n NO FURTHER REVIEW REQUIRED ROUTED BY STAFF El (If routed by staff, make copy to master file & enter Sierra.) JJJ �� REVIEWERS INITIAL YIP � 110 I I APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: (ten days) APPROVED n APPROVED W/ CONDITIONS E NOT APPROVED (attach comments) E REVIEWERS INITIAL PLAN REVIEW / ROUTING SLIP CORRECTION DETERMINATION: REVIEWERS INITIAL C:ROUTE -F DATE DATE DATE DATE 6/17/97 DUE DATE 6/19/97 DUE DATE 7/03/97 4 DUE DATE APPROVED 0 APPROVED W/ CONDITIONS NOT APPROVED (attach comments) Q (Certification of occupancy required. ) u�. e • PLAN REVIEW / ROUTING SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER D97 -0193 PROJECT NAME SOUTRCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE — BUILDING #10 DEPARTMENT: BUILDING DIVISION El FIRE PREVENTION PUBLIC WORKS STRUCTURAL Ei 4 DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (T,Th) COMPLETE n COMMENTS ' TUES /THURS ROUTING: PLEASE ROUTE fl NO FURTHER REVIEW REQUIRED ROUTED BY STAFF n (If routed by staff, make copy to master file & enter Sierra.) REVIEWERS INITIAL Nc�G� . DATE ' I l' / I APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: (ten days) APPROVED El REVIEWERS INITIAL CORRECTION DETERMINATION: APPROVED REVIEWERS INITIAL C:ROUTE -F N NOT COMPLETE E NOT APPLICABLE ❑ DATE DATE DUE DATE DATE 6/17/97 PLANNING DIVISION PERMIT COORDINATOR Q DUE DATE 6/19/97 DUE DATE 7/03/97 • APPROVED WI CONDITIONS E NOT APPROVED (attach comments) 0 APPROVED W/ CONDITIONS NOT APPROVED (attach comments) 0 (Certification of occupancy required. ) PLAN REVIEW / ROUTING SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER D97 -0193 PROJECT NAME SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE — BUILDING #10 DEPARTMENT: BUILDING DIVISION PUBLIC WORKS COMPLETE COMMENT REVIEWERS INITIAL REVIEWERS INITIAL C:ROUTE -F U t DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (T,Th) TUES /THURS ROUTING: PLEASE ROUTE ROUTED BY STAFF n APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: (ten days) DUE DATE 7/03/97 APPROVED n APPROVED W/ CONDITIONS �. NOT APPROVED (attach comments) REVIEWERS INITIAL 7 C-a---' DATE 4/?-- CORRECTION DETERMINATION: APPROVED ' n APPROVED W/ CONDITIONS 1' st: r: L: K/ 4wR tl^ott'M't}Y:.SL:.�'T:a1 •�tNfiXSX' YK'' FZ' x` YFt�Yn":. T. Mi+ ttoil4: t'. M1\ .�Rp!?NLR'.','ri�.ti�Trl'�rNC`.T, ;1RAS."'If"f�C� +, ?bWSt'H;tKY Yi.1i�1TdFIC DATE tall, make copy to master file & en t ,r Sierra.) b, DATE DATE 6/17/97 FIRE PREVENTION PLANNING DIVISION 0 STRUCTURAL [J PERMIT COORDINATOR ❑ DUEDATE 6/19/97 NOT COMPLETE n NOT APPLICABLE NO FURTHER REVIEW REQUIRED En DUE DATE NOT APPROVED (attach comments) 0 (Certification of occupancy required. ) Fireproofing Aggregates Shotcrete Concrete Masonry Asphalt Roofing P iling S t e e I S oils Wood December 27, 1999 File: . 99-405 Dave Larson City of Tukwila Building Department 6300 Southcenter Blvd. Tukwila, WA 98188 • Project: Southcenter Corporate Park Address: 565 Andover Park East Permit No.: D97-0242 D97-0243 D97-0244 D97-0245 • 097-0193 1. Structural steel erection-on site welding Sincerely, A.A.R. TESTING LABORATORY, INC. )64/v)0,4_ aAdeezt,_ Kimberle Anderson President cc: SGA Corporation-Jim Sylvester . , A.A.R. TESTING LABORATORY, INC. This is to advise you that special inspections are completed on the above referenced project. The following inspections were required and copies of those reports are attached. To the best of our knowledge all work inspected conformed to Tukwila Building Department approved plans, specifications, UBC and related codes and/or verbal or written instructions from the Engineer of Record. CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION AND MATERIAL TESTING NATIONALLY ACCEPTED LASORATORY Tel: (425) 881-5812 Fax (425) 881-5441 • 7126 180th Ave. NE • P.O. Box 2523 • Redmond, WA 98073 ■ ,.. •.•.. 12/21/99 11:08 i A. Utf 8b 00A4 ae a 4 em J J t.Y u2 -ifio5 1i:le f0a 20e( 'n 8221 y Pap S at e V ntnw VE RTEcs ti Omplstien ate: 0 1 4 - a secvr.rry SEA LA?J MIMr new= tea) THE SEALANT INSTALLED IN CONJUNCTION WITH AN IOR INSUL AND FINISH, SYSTEM (SIPS) INSTALLED ON THE STRUCTURE LOCATED AT THE ADDRESS INDICATED . BELOW CONFORMS: ( gr it ANDFACIORDI DAFT) IINa (WWI' MIXACTURER Mal INSI 1UA1'XQt PRALTI=3 AND snDrICIt (5) or ICED Vi, Z?iC. , RCM ) ao , 24.11k. ses of atreciage: a J - _.�• ._ '�`'ltSi t ��►' .tea Boni arealarra Sealant lesta ria:s • 11. L�isi�lor�d3�i�hst� . Y{> B. ° ki-t S c. iniulaticat 12121.daMISTX s rapiziments Pecdict =waft Nam: (s) _,. j 1 e) loam D. Zb a intonation astlsr+ed &owe i• attend in test ry tat ttii Sealant in talletiot =torss with the sealant 's inetali.at icn methods and procedures, and Vat Ws maralfacrunria evaluation matt- Sealant filer *maw Ana and 7leidx�a: signature of reepaneible officer: Typed Nan ant Title 5 3f� Officer: - � t ephoo ( F 3 cc: Origini: ft ildirg Daitertalait (Arm be sulsait tied with FII5 t�piu: fliS )darufaGts c contractor declaration.) Ern contnictos Sala t Hanatacturer yd uu.)i uua I" AGE 82 0002 ER•vas . c1L� S A l'on & RJ+ I -lAN6cgrg: • .; a...+ ., .JJ. .v VJ • COUGHLINPORTERL DEEN Project Record .,r V Date: July 28, 1997 To; NBBJ 111 S. Jackson Seattle, WA 98104 Fax 6212304 Attn:. Nick Hendrickson Project No: 97- 0025 -02 Pages: 2 By: Eric A. Dann Memorandum Eric Dann, P.E. Coughlin Porter Lundeen cc: Ron Greene Lowe Enterprises 575 -1198 717 PIT MT.: w c:. ni r 1.r. Dq1 .c \ 41 pay - dllo bq7- O1D D 0153 Southcenter Corporate Square Sent Via Fax —r The general notes state that masonry should have special inspection. Because the new masonry construction does not consist of primary strut-: -at elements and the design stresses are so Iow, Coughlin Porter Lundeen does .not require that the masonry have special inspection. It is acceptable that the allowable stresses be half of that of maionri with special inspection. If you have any questions or comments, please calll me. nn1n1 w _... .• .• . • .r TOTAL P.01 Project: i ..? 4 4.k 4 (..."#1 , c47 Type of Inspec • . A ress: Date called: Special instructions: / Date wanted: g. Requetter: Phone: INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 9818 Approved per applicable codes. 0 Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: .„. sm.44.4.1444esernotrabrxassuriS4 Ei $47.00 REINSPECTI • N FEE REQUIRED, Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. PERMIT NO. -3670 Receipt No: Date: rode t:. Type of Inspe tion: ,,,e_, Address: /�_ 0t0 0,i)fPny OA Date called: it-1-0.-4 Special instructio s: a _ W A M Date wanted: ii--0 V. Requester: Phone: 2010 — L3 P r 9 >/> 4 I , • # s'f. e3 i;p INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 Approved per applicable codes. 1 ol'V PERMIT NO. Ej Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: / u l /e/641, - 7 kjewfr Yu h /, A��9r; /SP S - 07i7fit Date / 2,- , «—lq $47.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. (206)431 -3670 Receipt No: Date: COMMENTS: Type of inspec�n:- i A.,, �v Address: 31G.t.7 v r2c, cot? Date called: (Z - 1 -`j Special instructions: f( V\ ID<" (.E"5" 1�ei'r -- CJ -..1' j"� Requester: L h\-- h CE i s c. rr�L.h 6.._ f R-- r... 'U (L— k/J -6146 2 ('rte u „o c-- S y h11 cF A c•' cis S F ro rt_ tCa.o ,s— .. CS fRiv, v INSP- . ■A-tyk Project: LZa,C , . ( Lvgn.L.. Type of inspec�n:- i A.,, �v Address: 31G.t.7 v r2c, cot? Date called: (Z - 1 -`j Special instructions: Date wanted: 1 a.m —) � p.m. Requester: Ph eN GLCc.Jci-k. v - 5 o-)1`)1 . Proje t �Dria 4 EI TFE� C P. SQUA Re- Type of inspectio kM I fa 61 ds re Date called: p Special instructions:' t Date wanted:, Lnci.. 6' Requester:bQt 41)1S p� e o.: r ( ( ��. w ig INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 Approved per applicable codes. COMMENTS: Inspector: F I INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit I I G S { i.► CL v. n, (206) 431 -3670 Corrections required prior to approval. Date: T1 $42.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. [Receipt No.: Date: FINALAPP•FRM Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Halon: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: City of . Tukwila Fire Department Retain current inspection schedule Needs shift inspection Approved without correction notice Approved with correction notice issued Authorized Signature ivji..: 3 '4'777' TURWILA.FIRE.DEPARTMENT FINAL APPROVAL FORM John W Rants, Mayor Thomas P. Keefe, Fire Chief Permit No. "' \ 1', Project Name StAkN ,kteC C' nCoa \e. S c■C Address 3O Co c 9 Cc 7 ) c Suite # I Z' 5 \ c \ 1 Date T.F.D. Form F.P. 85 Headquarters Station: 444 Andover Park East • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: (206) 575.4404 • Fax (206) 575-4439 trnIst *'* *E. * *k. * * *. * *k * *.y4* * * * * * * *h' ** ** * *** ***k***A * ** *lk,4 ** ** * * *- * * *k** *. ,] TYQF' TUKWILA,: WA: DT- - � F, � TRANSMIT *44:4 k *k t /f ***** k•** k�l•kk * * * *yc�t�.k,t *.fslkk * * *+k • -TRANSMIT Number: R97O0610 Amount: 738.00 07/08/37 14:16 ay.went: :Methods CHECK Notation: RICHARD ANDERSON . Ini.t: SLU Account Code 000/322.100 000/386.904 Permit Na: D97-0193 Type: DEVPERM DEVELOPMENT PERMIT Parcel Na: 262304 -9075 Site Address: 360 CORPORATE DR N Total Fees: 1.313..78 his Payment 738.00 Total ALL Pmts: 1.313.78 Balance: .00 *lc * *A * **A**, * * *ik ** *, ** Ih* t.*****, tn * * * * * * * * ** * * *A* **A * * *A* *A** * * ** Description BUILDING - NONRES STATE. BUILDING SURCHARGE Amount 793.50 4.50. 1260 07/08 1 717 TOTAL .1596.00 ** * *** col. *•k * * *•A*** * **•*** *• * ** A * * *� *1* * k*i ** * */• *** * * Cl rY OF ['UKWILA WA.,.. 1'-' TRANSMIT * *k• * * **A* **4*4. * * * *•k ** ** ****************.A r4**fie * *4• * *ii * * ** R,ANSMXT Number: R9700601 Amount» 515.78 0611.7/97 14:39 a 'Method: CHECK Notation: LOWE NW In i t: Permit .No: D97-0193 Type:. DEVPERM DEVELOPMENT PERMIT Parcel No 262304-9075 Site.; Address: 360 CORPORATE DR N Total Fees: 1n313.78 Payment 515.78 Total ALL Pmts: 515.78 Balance: 798.00 4;******* t ************** • **** * ** ** * *•* * *1. * * * * ** * * * * **A * * * ** Account Code Description Amount 000/345.830 ; PLAN CHECK NONRES 515.70 1433 06/18 1705 TOTAL 515.78 12/07/1999 12:04 2065751198 .December 7, 1999 Ms. Brenda Holt, Permit Coordinator City of Tukwila 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite 100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Dear Ms. Holt, As per our conversation on December 6, 1999 I wish to respectfully request an extension to our deadline in order to conduct the research necessary to comply with your requests in your letters of November 29, 1999. The letters we spoke of pertained to some outstanding inspections of buildings at our Southcenter Corporate Square facility. Specifically addressed was the status of permit numbers D97 -0107, D97-01Q8, D97 -0109 and D97- 0110. These permits were issued for cosmetic upgrades to addresses 545, 555, 565 and 575 Andover Park West. Additionally, we realized that similar conditions apply to 360 and 370 Andover Park West (permit numbers D97 -0193 and D97- 0192). During our telephone conversation you indicated that you would be willing to extend our time line to January 10, 2000. This will allow us the time to make contact with contractors who were involved with the project. We thank you very much for your assistance with this matter and wish to comply with Department of Community Development requirements in a timely manner. Sincerely, Larry Meyer Facilities Manager CC: Mark Barbieri Ron Greene LOWE ENTERPRISES NW Lowe Enterprises Northwest, Inc. One Union Square 600 University Street, Suite 2820 Seattle, Washington 98101 Telephone: (206) 623 -0200 FAX (206) 623-0600 1 A Lowe Enterprises Company PAGE .02/02 cm( OF RECEIVED ny1(WILA D EC - 7 1999 PERMIT CENTER December 6, 1999 Ron Greene 600 University Street, #2820 Seattle, WA 98101 RE: Permit Status D97 -0193 360 Corporate Drive North Dear Mr. Greene: In reviewing our current permit files, it appears that your permit for a cosmetic upgrade to building exterior and enhance lobby entrance issued on July 8, 1997 has not received a final inspection as of the date of this letter by the City of Tukwila Building Division. Per the Uniform Building Code and/or Uniform Mechanical Code, every permit issued by the building official under the provision of this code shall expire by limitation and become null and void if the building or work authorized by such permit is not commenced within 180 days from the date of such permit, or if the building or work authorized by such permit is suspended or abandoned at any time after the work is commenced for a period of 180 days. Based on the above, if a final inspection is not called for within ten (10) business days from the date of this letter, the Permit Center will close your file and the work completed to date will be considered non - complying and not in conformance with the Uniform Building Code and/or Mechanical Code. Please contact the Permit Center at (206)431 -3670 if you wish to schedule a final inspection. Thank you for your cooperation in this matter. Sincerely, Brenda Holt Permit Coordinator City of Tukwila Department of Community Development /444a Xc: Permit File No. D97 -0193 Duane Griffin, Building Official 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • (206) 4313670 • Fay (206) 4313665 post-it Fax Note 7671 Date i .3 . '7 i / To /L. .6ay From Co/Dept. airy di e r Co. im mie Phone P Phonolt c 50 6. Fax # qS/ Cr€05.. Fall 0 0 5/ of3 ." • JUN 03 '97 03:34PM UNICO PIKIPP:RTIES P 171 • afteg2=2,====22:2. • DEPARTMENT OF LABOR AND INDUSTRIES 51-11S CERTIFIES TI-IoNT„ThIE,POISON NAMED HEREON IS REGISTERED AS PROVIDED EiY LAW AS A •• ' ....trrg .'•• • 1ni,:: P•11 AtZ • r : • ?•••T . TX • •. "4 • ., • '• • • ; : t • • '• • . .• . • • "■• .• . • .• • • • • • • • SPECIFICATIONS FOR: Proposed Facilities Improvements and Remodel of: Southcenter Corporate Square octi-otem Tukwila, Washington Owner: Lowe Enterprises. Northwest, Inc. 600 University Street, Suite 2820 Seattle, WA 98101 Prepared by: NUJ Architects 111 S. Jackson St. Seattle, WA 98104 Coughlin, Porter, Lundeen Structural Engineers 217 Pine Street, Suite 520 Seattle, WA 98101 Sperling Electrical Engineers 720 Olive Way, Suite 1100 Seattle, WA 98101 Job No. 24646.00 March 31, 1997 rv) sv■.i el\....k.WiAG ON \SO _RECEIVED TY OF TUKWILA JUN 1 7 1997 PERMIT CENTER Division 06100 Section Number Title ::•PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS. • Division 2 - Sitework Selective Demolition Asphalt Concrete Paving 02070 02513 Division 03300 03450 Division 04230 • Division 05120 05500 05721 Division 07180 07240 07250 07275 07460 07525 07600 07820 07900 • Division 08415 08700 08800 Division 09260 09311 09680 09900 Division Not Used Division Not Used Division Not Used Division Not Used 24646.00 • ,,•.,„.„;_;;;;; • SOUTHCENTERCORPORATE TUKWILA', WASHINGTON SECTION 00010:. TABLE'OF CONTENTS' 3 - Concrete Cast-In-Place Concrete Architectural Precast Concrete 4 - Masonry Reinforced Unit Masonry - Metals Structural Steel Metal Fabrications Building Address Numerals 6 - Wood and Plastics Rough Carpentry 7 - Thermal and Moisture Protection Water Repellents Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems Sprayed-On Fireproofing Firestopping Siding Built-Up Roofing Repairs Flashing and Sheet Metal Translucent Panel Skylights Joint Sealers 8 - Doors and Windows Aluminum Entrances and Storefront Builders' Hardware Glass and Glazing 9 - Finishes Gypsum Board Systems Ceramic Mosaic Tile Carpet Painting 10 - Specialties 11 - Equipment 12 - Furnishings 13 - Special Construction 00010 - 1 • . • • • SOtJTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE H TUKWILA SECTION '', 00010 TABLE OF CONTENTS Division 15 Mechanical 'Division 16 - .Electrical 16010 General.. Provisions 16030 Testing 16100 Basic Materials and Methods 16110 Raceways 16120 Conductors and Terminations 16500 Lighting 16930 Lighting Control Equipment Project Closeout END OF SECTION 24646.00 00010 - 2 [. i i PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. The work includes selective demolition within the existing buildings. 2. The general extent of selective demolition work is indicated on the drawings where new construction interfaces with existing building. 3. Elsewhere within the existing building, the drawings do not necessarily indicate items which are required to be removed; however, drawings of these areas do show new rooms and new area layouts, new finishes, etc.; based on new construction shown within existing building, Contractor shall determine the extent of selective demolition to accommodate the new work. 4. The Contractor is responsible for determining scope and extent of demolition in order to allow for remodeling as shown on the Drawings. Specific demolition notes are indicated on the Drawings which are in addition to the General Contractors required scope to accommodate the new work. 5. Contractor is warned that there may be unknown alterations and unforeseen or unknown conditions above existing ceilings, behind existing wall furring, below concrete floor slabs, and within existing walls, and partitions. 6. Refer to Electrical drawings and specifications for additional requirements. 7. Demolition work includes protection of existing construction to remain, as well as removal and disposal of demolished materials. 8. Demolition work includes saw cutting exterior concrete. Use double cutting technique to prevent spalling. B. Salvage: Owner will mark and retain salvageable items as determined with the Contractor. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Comply with applicable requirements of rules, regulations, laws, ordinances of governing authorities. B. Cutting and Patching: Do not cut and patch work exposed on the building exterior or in it's occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the Architect's opinion, result in lessening the building aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch work in a manner that would result in substantial visual evidence of cut and patch work. Saw cut exterior concrete so that intersecting cuts meet precisely without cut extending beyond corner. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Occupancy: Owner may be occupying areas of the building immediately adjacent to areas of selective demolition. Coordinate with Owner. Conduct demolition work in a manner that will minimize need for disruption of Owner's normal operations. B. Existing Building Exits: Contractor's materials and activities shall not block any exit or impair floor to floor separation while the building is occupied. 24646.00 02070 - 1 F. Damages: Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition work at no cost to Owner. 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02070 - 2 C. Partial Removal: Items of salvaged value to Contractor may be removed from structure as work progresses. Salvaged items must be transported from site as they are removed. Storage of removed items on site will not be permitted. D. Fire Protection: All practical measures shall be taken to ensure fire protection during all phases of the work. This shall include expediting construction of fire division walls, temporary cross hallway fire stop at the division walls, and securing the building from unauthorized entry. No flammable liquids, welding /cutting equipment, or compressed gases shall be used, except under specific Fire Department Permit and approval from the Owner. E. Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other forms of protection as required to protect Owner's personnel and general public from injury due to selective demolition. 1. Provide protective measures as required to ensure free and safe passage of Owner's personnel and general public to and from occupied portions of the building. 2. Erect temporary covered passageways as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of structure or element to be demolished, and adjacent facilities or work to remain. 4. Protect from damage existing finish work that is to remain in place and becomes exposed during demolition operations. 5. Protect floors with suitable coverings when necessary. 6. Construct temporary dust proof partitions to separate areas where noisy or extensive dirt or dust operations are performed. Equip partitions with dust proof doors and security locks, if required. 7. Provide temporary weather protection during interval between demolition and removal of existing construction on exterior surfaces, and installation of new construction to ensure that no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or interior areas of existing buildings. 8. Remove protections at completion of work and restore effected finishes. G. Traffic: Conduct selective demolition operations and debris removal in a manner to ensure minimum interference with streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close, block or otherwise obstruct streets, walks or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. H. Utility Services: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain, keep in service, and protect against damage during demolition operations. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except when authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction and the Owner. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to governing authorities. • �.' xTNtiL :�iV_tief»:a5faa... .. B. Erect and maintain dust -proof partitions and closures as necessary to prevent spread of dust or fumes to occupied portions of the building. 1. Where selective demolition occurs immediately adjacent to occupied portions of the building, construct dust -proof partitions. 2. Provide weather -proof closures for exterior openings resulting from demolition work. 3.3 REMOVAL OF EXISTING ROOFING MATERIALS A. Remove existing roofing materials as indicated down to substrate. g 9 at . Schedule work in such a manner so as to maintain the waterproof integrity of the building at all times. If required, provide temporary roofing in order to maintain the waterproof integrity of the building. B. Remove asphalt which remains on the existing substrate. The extent of removal shall be such to enable maximum penetration of asphalt primer and complete adhesion of the new roofing system. C. Dispose of materials collected in the removal operations. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. Perform selective demolition work in a systematic manner. Use such methods as required to complete work indicated or required. B. Contractor shall first remove gypsum wallboard from existing walls to be removed, ceiling tiles, gypsum wallboard from existing ceilings to be removed to allow inspection of existing plumbing, HVAC ducts and other mechanical and electrical items. 1. After mechanical and electrical items have been uncovered, Contractor shall notify the Owner if there are any questions or if it is unclear as to the future status of these items (ie. remove, cap or reroute). 24646.00 02070 - 3 kT` SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE 1SQUARE • TUKWILA, %WASHINGTON. SECTION 02070. . • SELECTIVE DEMOLITION Where partitions are designated or required to be removed, remove all' doors, frames, relites, equipment and associated mechanical and electrical items. Patch floors, walls, columns, and ceilings to . remain where they intersect with walls to be removed. Patch, repair, or infill existing suspended ceiling grids which are designated or required to be removed. D. Remove wall base from walls and columns wherever walls intersect areas scheduled to receive new carpet. E. If unanticipated mechanical, electrical or structural elements which conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure both nature and extent of the conflict. Submit report to Owner in written, accurate detail. Pending receipt of directive from Owner, rearrange selective demolition schedule as necessary to continue overall job progress without delay. 3.5 REMOVALS A. Remove debris, rubbish and other materials resulting from demolition . operations from building on a daily basis. Transport and legally I i i I i i PART 1 - GENERAL l:l SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Asphalt concrete paving /patching. 2. Traffic markings. 3. Extruded curbs. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Asphalt Mix: Submit proposed job -mix formula for the bituminous mixture, or certificate showing compliance with specifications. B. Certificates: Furnish material certificates for asphalt signed by the materials producer certifying compliance with specified requirements. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Work is subject to the following qualifications. 1. Producer /Installer: Provide materials produced by bulk asphalt concrete producer regularly engaged in the production of hot -mix, hot -laid asphalt concrete. Installer must be experienced in the installation of asphaltic concrete paving with adequate plant, equipment, and personnel for the completion of the work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Base Materials for Asphalt Concrete Paving: Provide aggregate base course materials in accordance with WSDOT standard specifications and as follows. 1. Asphalt: In accordance with WSDOT Standard Specification, Section 5 -04, Class "B" mix. Asphalt shall be viscosity grade AR -4000. B. Hot Tack: AR4000 or AR8000 Tack. SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 02513 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING C. Tack Coat: CSS -1 in accordance with WSDOT Standard Specification, Paragraph 9- 02.1(6). Apply to all vertical surfaces to which "ACP" abuts. D. Extruded Cement Concrete Curbs: In accordance with WSDOT Standard Specification, Section 8 -04.3 (1)A. E. Other Materials: Provide all accessory and incidental materials, equipment, tools, and methods required for completion of work. F. Pavement Striping: Provide zone and traffic markings in accordance with Pittsburgh Paint Specification #14d, "Traffic and Zone Marking Paint 11 Line ". Apply in 2 coats at 5.0 MWF per coat. Color to match existing striping. 24646.00 02513 - 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 3.2 PAVING INSTALLATION 3.3 PAVEMENT PATCHING 3.5 TRAFFIC MARKINGS 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 02513 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING A. General: Remove all existing fill, debris, vegetation, and other perishable materials from areas to be paved. Bring areas requiring fills to rough grade elevations. Install wood headers and benders to true lines as indicated and securely staked to prevent movement or displacement during paving operations. Remove upon completion. B. Aggregate Base Course: Place in accordance with the requirements of WSDOT Standard Specification Section 4 -04 and to the thickness shown or to match existing depth, whichever is greater. Materials shall be graded and compacted in 4 -inch maximum layers to at least 98 percent of maximum density in accordance with ASTM D1557, Method D. A. Tack Coat: All contact surfaces, curbs and cold pavement joints shall be painted with asphalt emulsion before the surfacing is laid. All longitudinal and transverse joints shall be fully compressed by the spreading machine and be free from surface irregularities. B. Asphalt Concrete Paving: Provide asphalt concrete, Class B, consisting of mineral aggregate, uniformly mixed with bituminous material in a central plant. Provide all labor, equipment and materials required to complete the work. All asphalt concrete pavement work shall conform to the requirements of WSDOT Standard Specification, Paragraph 5 -04.3. Use minimum of 3- to 5 -ton roller for asphalt patches. C. Surface Smoothness: The completed surface shall not vary more than 1/8" from the lower edge of a 10 -foot straightedge on the surface. Depressions exceeding 1/4" shall be corrected. A. Patching Bituminous Pavement: Replace the existing pavement with Class "B" asphalt concrete pavement and compacted aggregate base course to the same thickness as the existing "ACP" and base, except the minimum replacement pavement section shall be 2 inches of "ACP" on 6 inches of compacted aggregate base. 3.4 EXTRUDED CEMENT CONCRETE CURB INSTALLATION A. Extruded curbs: Provide extruded concrete curbs in sizes and configurations shown; install per drawings. A. Traffic Markings: The pavement striping and stall markings shall be in accordance with the drawings. Apply paint when the surface to receive paint is clean and dry. The lines shall be laid out accurate and uniform and neat and sharp. All contaminants within the area to receive paint shall be removed. Paint shall be applied in one or more coats in strict conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations, including coverage and drying time between coats. Any visual "show through" of the asphalt surface painted will not be allowed. END OF SECTION 02513 - 2 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Formwork for cast -in -place concrete, with shoring, bracing, and anchorage. 2. Formwork accessories. 3. Form stripping. 4. Reinforcing steel for cast -in -place concrete. 5. Cast -in -place concrete, including concrete for the following: a. Foundations, footings. b. Slabs on grade. c. Foundation walls. 6. Integral colored concrete. 7. Concrete curing. 8. Concrete sealing. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Unexposed Finish: A general -use finish, with no appearance criteria, applicable to all formed concrete concealed from view after completion of construction. B. Exposed Finish: A general -use finish applicable to all formed concrete exposed to view and including surfaces which may receive a paint coating (if any) . 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Quality Control Submittals: Submit to the Owner the following information related to quality assurance requirements specified: 1. Design data: Submit proposed mix designs and test data before concrete operations begin. Identify for each mix submitted the method by which proportions have been selected. a. For mix designs based on field experience, include individual strength test results, standard deviation, and required average compressive strength f'c calculations. b. For mix designs based on trial mixtures, include trial mix proportions, test results, and graphical analysis and show required average compressive strength f'c. c. Indicate quantity of each ingredient per cubic yard of concrete. d. Indicate type and quantity of admixtures proposed or required. 2. Certifications: Provide certification from an independent testing agency that mechanical connectors for reinforcing steel comply with specified requirements. 3. Submit batch tickets complying with ASTM C 685 or delivery tickets complying with ASTM C 94, as applicable, for each load of concrete used in the work. 4. Cold weather concreting: Submit description of planned protective measures. 5. Hot weather concreting: Submit description of planned protective measures. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the following documents, except where requirements of the contract documents or of governing codes and governing authorities are more stringent: 1. ACI 301. 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 1 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 2. ACI 318. 3. CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. B. Source of Materials: Obtain materials of each type from same source for the entire project. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver reinforcement to project site bundled and tagged with metal tags indicating bar size, lengths, and other data corresponding to information shown on placement drawings. 1. Store concrete reinforcement materials at the site to prevent damage and accumulation of dirt or rust. B. Store cementitious materials in a dry, weathertight location. Maintain accurate records of shipment and use. C. Store aggregates to permit free drainage and to avoid contamination with deleterious matter or other aggregates. When stockpiled on ground, discard bottom 6 inches of pile. D. Handle aggregates to avoid segregation. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold- Weather Concreting: Comply fully with the recommendations of ACI 306. 1. Well in advance of proposed concreting operations, advise the Owner of planned protective measures including but not limited to heating of materials, heated enclosures, and insulating blankets. B. Hot - Weather Concreting: Comply fully with the recommendations of ACI 305R. 1. Well in advance of proposed concreting operations, advise the Owner of planned protective measures including but not limited to cooling of materials before or during mixing, placement during evening to dawn hours, fogging during finishing and curing, shading, and windbreaks. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMWORK A. Facing Materials: 1. Unexposed finish concrete: Any standard form materials that produce structurally sound concrete. 2. Exposed finish concrete: Materials selected to offer optimum smooth, stain -free final appearance and minimum number of joints. Provide materials with sufficient strength to resist hydrostatic head without bow or deflection in excess of allowable tolerances, and as follows: a. Overlaid plywood: PS -1 "B -B High Density Concrete Form Overlay," Class I. 24646.00 03300 - 2 •,..a . roc• M„• tvv. ic5�nk�w,[ �! Pe��ms�a;�rr -, »_ ... SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE B. Formwork Accessories: 1. Form coating: Form release agent that will not adversely affect concrete surfaces or prevent subsequent application of concrete coatings. 2. Metal ties: Commercially manufactured types; cone snap ties, taper removable bolt, or other type which will leave no metal closer than 1 -1/2 inches from surface of concrete when forms are removed, leaving not more than a 1- inch - diameter hole in concrete surface. 3. Fillets: Wood or plastic fillets for chamfered corners, in maximum lengths possible. 2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: Provide deformed bars complying with the following, except where otherwise indicated: 1. ASTM A 615, Grade 40. B. Provide mechanical connections for reinforcement splices of the type indicated and capable of developing at least 125 percent of the specified yield strength of the bar when tested in tension and compression. • 1. Normal weight concrete: ASTM C 33. a. Class 5M. 2. Maximum size of coarse aggregates, whichever is least: a. One -fifth narrowest dimension between sides of forms. b. One -third of depth of slabs. c. Three - fourths of minimum clear distance between reinforcing bars or between bars and side of form. d. Columns and piers: Two - thirds of minimum clear distance between bars. D. Admixtures - General: Admixtures which result in more than 0.1 percent of soluble chloride ions by weight of cement are prohibited. 24646.00 03300 - 3 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE .... cw,. m. � !a:r.unsxYra`�'t7:�'.4'� `. b: t�XR 'Yd'S�tttlxh�*a•.w,........... is E. Air - Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260 and certified by manufacturer for compatibility with other mix components. 1. Products: The following products, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. "Air Mix "; The Euclid Chemical Company. b. "Sika -Aer "; Sika Corporation. c. "Micro- Air "; Master Builders, Inc. d. "Darex AEA "; W. R. Grace & Co. e. "Burke 2001" or "Burke 2002 "; The Burke Company. F. Water - Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. 1. Products: The following products, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. "WRDA Hycol "; W. R. Grace & Co. b. "Eucon WR -75 "; The Euclid Chemical Company. c. "Pozzolith Normal "; Master Builders, Inc. d. "Plastocrete 161 "; Sika Corporation. e. "Prokrete N "; Master Builders, Inc. (former Conchem product). G. Water- Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. 1. Products: The following products, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. "Pozzolith Retarder "; Master Builders, Inc. b. "Eucon Retarder 75 "; The Euclid Chemical Company. c. "Daratard -17 "; W. R. Grace & Co. d. "Plastiment "; Sika Corporation. e. "Protard "; Master Builders, Inc. (former Conchem product). H. Water - Reducing and Accelerating Admixtures: ASTM C 494, Type E. I. High -Range Water - Reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer): ASTM C 494, Type F or G. 1. Products: The following products, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. "WRDA 19" or "Daracem- 100 "; W. R. Grace & Co. b. "PSP Superplasticizer"; Master Builders, Inc. (former Conchem product). c. "Sikament 300 "; Sika Corporation. d. "Eucon 37 "; The Euclid Chemical Company. e. "Rheobuild "; Master Builders, Inc. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Nonshrink Grout: ASTM C 1107. 1. Type: Provide metallic type only. 2. Products: The following products, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Metallic type: (1) "Vibro -Foil Neutral "; A. C. Horn, Inc. (2) "Metallic Spec. Grout "; The Burke Company. (3) "Embeco 885 "; Master Builders, Inc. (4) "Hi -Mod Grout "; The Euclid Chemical Company. (5) "Ferro- Grout "; L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. (6) "Supreme Plus "; Cormix Construction Chemicals. b. Nonmetallic type: (1) "Masterflow 928 "; Master Builders, Inc. (2) "Sonogrout 14k "; Sonneborn Building Products 24646.00 03300 - 4 24646.00 (3) (4) (5) SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE Division /ChemRex, Inc. "Euco N -S Grout "; The Euclid Chemical Company. "Crystex "; L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. "588 Grout "; W. R. Meadows, Inc. B. Color Pigments: Frank D. Davis, L. M. Scoffield, or approved synthetic mineral oxide, sunlight and alkali -fast, conforming to ASTM C979, and certified to be resistant to lime and other alkalies and be compatible with other admixtures specified. 1. Colors: a. "CONC -1 ": Davis "Light Gray ". b. "CONC -2 ": Davis "Taupe ". C. Burlap: AASHTO M 182, Class 2 jute or kenaf cloth. D. Moisture- Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, and as follows: 1. Curing paper. 2. Polyethylene film. 3. White burlap - polyethylene sheeting. E. Bonding Compound: Non - redispersable acrylic bonding admixture, ASTM C 1059, Type II. F. Epoxy Bonding Systems: ASTM C 881; type, grade, and class as required for project conditions. G. Concrete Sealer: Prosoco "Enviroseal 20 ", or approved. 2.5 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN F. 5. High -range water - reducing admixture (superplasticizer): Add as required for placement and workability. 03300 - 5 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 2.6 CONTROL OF MIX IN THE FIELD 6. Do not use admixtures not specified or approved. F. Mix Adjustments: Provided that no additional expense to Owner is involved, Contractor may submit for Owner's approval requests for adjustment to approved concrete mixes when circumstances such as changed project conditions, weather, or unfavorable test results occur. Include laboratory test data substantiating specified properties with mix adjustment requests. A. Slump: A tolerance of up to 1 inch above approved design mix slump will be permitted for 1 batch in 5 consecutive batches tested. Concrete of lower slump than that specified may be used, provided proper placing and consolidation is obtained. B. Total Air Content: A tolerance of plus or minus 1 -1/2 percent of approved design mix air content will be allowed for field measurements. C. Do not use batches that exceed tolerances. 2.7 CONCRETE MIXING A. On -Site Equipment: Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum type batch machine mixer, in compliance with ASTM C 685. Mix each batch minimum of 1 -1/2 minutes and maximum of 5 minutes before discharging concrete. Clean thoroughly at end of day and before changing concrete type. B. Transit Mixers: Mix concrete materials in transit mixers, complying with requirements of ASTM C 94. 1.. At ambient temperatures of 85 to 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 75 minutes. 2. At ambient temperatures above 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONCRETE FORM PREPARATION A. General: Comply with requirements of ACI 301 for formwork, and as herein specified. The Contractor is responsible for design, engineering, and construction of formwork, and for its timely removal. B. Earth Forms: Earth forms are not permitted. C. Design: Design and fabricate forms for easy removal, without impact, shock, or damage to concrete surfaces or other portions of the work. Design to support all applied loads until concrete is adequately cured, within allowable tolerances and deflection limits. D. Construction: Construct and brace formwork to accurately achieve end results required by contract documents, with all elements properly located and free of distortion. Provide for necessary openings, inserts, anchorages, and other features shown or otherwise required. 1. Joints: Minimize form joints and make watertight to prevent leakage of concrete. a. Align joints symmetrically at exposed conditions. 2. Chamfers: Provide chamfered edges and corners at exposed locations, unless specifically indicated otherwise on the drawings. 3. Permanent openings: Provide openings to accommodate work of other trades, sized and located accurately. Securely support items built 24646.00 03300 - 6 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE into forms; provide additional bracing at openings and discontinuities in formwork. 4. Temporary openings: Provide temporary openings for cleaning and inspection in most inconspicuous locations at base of forms, closed with tight- fitting panels designed to minimize appearance of joints in finished concrete work. E. Tolerances for Formed Surfaces: Comply with minimum tolerances established in ACI 117, unless more stringent requirements are indicated on the drawings. F. Release Agent: Provide either form materials with factory- applied nonabsorptive liner or field - applied form coating. If field - applied coating is employed, thoroughly clean and recondition formwork and reapply coating before each use. Rust on form surfaces is unacceptable. 3.2 CONNECTION TO EXISTING CONCRETE A. Preparation: At locations where new concrete is to join existing concrete, prepare existing surface by cleaning with wire brush and applying bonding compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Doweled Connections: At locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels with premanufactured cardboard sleeves. 3.3 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with requirements of ACI 301 and as herein specified. B. Preparation: Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, soil, and other materials which adversely affect bond with concrete. C. Placement: Place reinforcement to achieve not less than minimum concrete coverages required for protection. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Provide Class C tension lap splices complying with ACI 318 unless otherwise indicated. Do not field -bend partially embedded bars unless otherwise indicated or approved. 1. Use approved bar supports and tie wire, as required. Set wire ties to avoid contact with or penetration of exposed concrete surfaces. Tack welding of reinforcing is not permitted. 2. Wire fabric: Install in maximum lengths possible, lapping adjoining pieces not less than one full mesh. Offset end laps to prevent continuous laps in either direction, and splice laps with tie wire. D. Welding: Welding of reinforcement is not permitted. 3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints as indicated on drawings. If construction joints are not indicated, locate in manner which will not impair strength and will have least impact on appearance, as acceptable to the Owner. 1. Keyways: Provide keyways not less than 1 -1/2 inches deep. 2. Reinforcement: Continue reinforcement across and perpendicular to construction joints, unless details specifically indicate otherwise. B. Control Joints: Construct contraction joints in slabs poured on grade to form panels of sizes indicated on drawings, but not more than 15 feet apart in either direction. 1. Use tooled joints with 1/4 -inch round at all exterior slabs. 24646.00 03300 - 7 3.5 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE A. General: Set anchorage devices and other items required for other work connected to or supported by cast -in -place concrete, using templates, setting drawings, and instructions from suppliers of items to be embedded. 1. Edge Forms and Screeds: Set edge forms and intermediate screeds as necessary to achieve final elevations indicated for finished slab surfaces. 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Preparation: Provide materials necessary to ensure adequate protection of concrete during inclement weather before beginning installation of concrete. B. Inspection: Before beginning concrete placement, inspect formwork, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded, verifying that all such work has been completed. 1. Wood forms: Moisten immediately before placing concrete in locations where form coatings are not used. C. Placement - General: Comply with requirements of ACI 304 and as follows: 1. Schedule continuous placement of concrete to prevent the formation of cold joints. 2. Provide construction joints if concrete for a particular element or component cannot be placed in a continuous operation. 3. Deposit concrete as close as possible to its final location, to avoid segregation. D. Placement in Forms: Limit horizontal layers to depths which can be properly consolidated, but in no event greater than 24 inches. 1. Consolidate concrete by means of mechanical vibrators, inserted vertically in freshly placed concrete in a systematic pattern at close intervals. Penetrate previously placed concrete to ensure that separate concrete layers are knitted together. 2. Vibrate concrete sufficiently to achieve consistent consolidation without segregation of coarse aggregates. 3. Do not use vibrators to move concrete laterally. E. Slab Placement: Schedule continuous placement and consolidation of concrete within planned construction joints. 1. Thoroughly consolidate concrete without displacing reinforcement or embedded items, using internal vibrators, vibrating screeds, roller pipe screeds, or other means acceptable to Owner. 2. Strike off and level concrete slab surfaces, using highway straightedges, darbies, or bull floats before bleed water can collect on surface. Do not work concrete further until finishing operations are commenced. F. Cold Weather Placement: Comply with recommendations of ACI 306 when air temperatures are expected to drop below 40 degrees F either during concrete placement operations or before concrete has cured. 1. Do not use frozen or ice -laden materials. 2. Do not place concrete on frozen substrates. G. Hot Weather Placement: Comply with recommendations of ACI 305R when ambient temperature before, during, or after concrete placement is expected to exceed 90 degrees F or when combinations of high air temperature, low relative humidity, and wind speed are such that the rate of evaporation from freshly poured concrete would otherwise exceed 0.2 -- _________...„„"".,,„",_„, 24646.00 03300 - 8 3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Repairs, General: Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork. 1. Remove honeycombed areas and other defective concrete down to sound concrete, cutting perpendicular to surface or slightly undercutting. Dampen patch location and area immediately surrounding it prior to applying bonding compound or patching mortar. 2. Before bonding compound has dried, apply patching mixture matching original concrete in materials and mix except for omission of coarse aggregate, and using a blend of white and normal portland cement as necessary to achieve color match. Consolidate thoroughly and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. B. Unexposed Form Finish: Repair tie holes and patch defective areas. Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas exceeding 1/4 inch height. • C. Exposed Form Finish: Repair and patch defective areas, with fins or other projections completely removed and smoothed. 1. Smooth rubbed finish: Apply to surfaces indicated no later than 24 hours after form removal. a. Wet concrete surfaces to be finished and rub with Carborundum brick or other abrasive until uniform color and texture are achieved. b. Do not apply separate grout mixture. 2. Contiguous unformed surfaces: Strike smooth and float to a similar texture tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and other unformed surfaces adjacent to or contiguous with formed surfaces. Continue final finish of formed surfaces across unformed surfaces, unless otherwise specifically indicated. 3.8 FINISHING SLABS A. Finishing Operations - General: 1. Do not directly apply water to slab surface or dust with cement. 2. Use hand or powered equipment only as recommended in ACI 302.1R. 3. Screeding: Strikeoff to required grade and within surface tolerances indicated. Verify conformance to surface tolerances. Correct deficiencies while concrete is still plastic. 4. Bull Floating: Immediately following screeding, bull float or darby before bleed water appears to eliminate ridges, fill in voids, and embed coarse aggregate. Recheck and correct surface tolerances. 5. Do not perform subsequent finishing until excess moisture or bleed water has disappeared and concrete will support either foot pressure with less than 1/4 -inch indentation or weight of power floats without damaging flatness. 6. Final floating: Float to embed coarse aggregate, to eliminate ridges, to compact concrete, to consolidate mortar at surface, and to achieve uniform, sandy texture. Recheck and correct surface tolerances. 7. Troweling: Trowel immediately following final floating. Apply first troweling with power trowel except in confined areas, and apply subsequent trowelings with hand trowels. Wait between 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE pounds per square foot per 1. Do not add water to conditions. 2. Provide mixing water adequate protection evaporation. 3. Use fog nozzle to cool formwork prior to placing concrete. hour. approved concrete mixes under hot weather at lowest feasible temperature, and provide of poured concrete to reduce rate of 03300 - 9 and reinforcing steel immediately 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE trowelings to allow concrete to harden. Do not overtrowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over it. Consolidate concrete surface by final troweling operation. Completed surface shall be free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and within surface tolerance specified. B. Coordinate appearance and texture of required final finishes with the Owner before application. C. Broomed Float Finish: After floating and when water sheen has practically disappeared, apply uniform transverse corrugations approximately 1/16 inch deep, without tearing surface. D. Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: Follow trowel finishing operation immediately with fine brooming to achieve slightly scarified surface. E. Colored Finish: 1. Apply at rate recommended by manufacturer for intended service and color. 2. Apply trowel finish to complete installation. 3. Apply curing compound recommended by color pigment manufacturer immediately after final finishing. Do not use moisture cover or moisture curing methods. F. Slab Surface Tolerances: 1. Achieve flat, level planes except where grades are indicated. Slope uniformly to drains and to adjacent areas. Provide positive drainage to drainage areas. 2. Floated finishes: Depressions between high spots shall not exceed 5/16 inch under a 10 -foot straightedge. 3. Troweled finishes: Achieve level surface plane so that depressions between high spots do not exceed the following dimension, using a 10 -foot straightedge: a. 1/8 inch. G. Slab Finish Schedule: Apply finishes in the following typical locations and as otherwise shown on the drawings: 1. Broomed float: a. Sidewalks. b. Exterior slabs not otherwise scheduled. 2. Trowel and fine broom: a. Exposed interior floors not otherwise scheduled. 3. Colored finish: In locations shown on the drawings. H. Repair of Slab Surfaces: Test slab surfaces for smoothness and to verify surface plane to tolerance specified. Repair defects as follows: 1. High areas: Correct by grinding after concrete has cured for not less than 14 days. 2. Low areas: Immediately after completion of surface finishing operations, cut out low areas and replace with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend with adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when approved by the Owner. 3. Crazed or cracked areas: Cut out defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 inch in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts. Dampen exposed concrete and apply bonding compound. Mix, place, compact, and finish patching concrete to match adjacent concrete. 4. Isolated cracks and holes: Groove top of cracks and cut out holes not over 1 inch in diameter. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound; place dry pack or proprietary repair compound acceptable to Owner while bonding compound is still active: 03300 - 10 • • 3.9 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION 3.10 REMOVAL OF FORMS AND SUPPORTS 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE a. Dry -pack mix: One part portland cement to 2 -1/2 parts fine aggregate and enough water as required for handling and placing. b. Install patching mixture and consolidate thoroughly, striking off level with and matching surrounding surface. Do not allow patched areas to dry out prematurely. I. Concrete Sealing: Apply sealer in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. A. General: 1. Prevent premature drying of freshly placed concrete, and protect from excessively cold or hot temperatures until concrete has cured. 2. Provide curing of concrete by one of the methods listed and as appropriate to service conditions and type of applied finish in each case. B. Curing Period: 1. Not less than 7 days for standard cements and mixes. 2. Not less than 4 days for high early strength concrete using Type III cement. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. 1. Keep wooden or metal forms moist when exposed to heat of the sun. 2. If forms are removed prior to completion of curing process, continue , curing by one of the applicable methods specified. D. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms: 1. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared, but before surface is dry. 2. Keep continuously moist for not less than 3 days by uninterrupted use of any of the following: a. Water ponding. b. Water - saturated sand. c. Water -fog spray. d. Saturated burlap: Provide 4 -inch minimum overlap at joints. 3. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has dried. a. Moisture - retaining cover: Lap not less than 3 inches at edges and ends, and seal with waterproof tape or adhesive. Repair holes or tears during curing period with same tape or adhesive. Maintain covering in intimate contact with concrete surface. Secure to avoid displacement. (1) Extend covering past slab edges at least twice the thickness of slab. (2) Do not use plastic sheeting on surfaces which will be exposed to view when in service. 4. Continue final curing to end of curing period. E. Avoid rapid drying at end of curing period. F. During and following curing period, protect concrete from temperature changes of adjacent air in excess of 5 degrees F per hour and 50 degrees F per 24 hours. Progressively adjust protective measures to provide uniform temperature changes over entire concrete surface. A. Non - Load - Bearing Formwork: Provided that concrete has hardened 03300 - 11 sufficiently that it will not be damaged, forms not actually supporting weight of concrete or weight of soffit forms may be removed after concrete has cured at not less than 50 degrees F for 24 hours. Maintain curing and protection operations after form removal. 3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS 3.12 CONCRETE REPAIRS SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE A. Fill -in: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades after such work is in place. Place such fill -in concrete to blend with existing construction, using same mix and curing methods. A. Perform cosmetic repairs of concrete surfaces as specified under concrete application. B. Perform structural repairs with prior approval of the Owner for method and procedure, using epoxy bonding systems. The Owner's approval is required for repair methods using materials other than those specified. 3.13 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Composite Sampling, and Making and Curing of Specimens: ASTM C 172 and ASTM C 31. 1. Take samples at point of discharge. 2. For pumped concrete, perform sampling and testing at the frequencies specified herein at point of delivery to pump, and perform additional sampling and testing at the same frequency at discharge from line. Results obtained at discharge from line shall be used for acceptance of concrete. B. Slump: ASTM C 143. One test per batch. 1. Modify sampling to comply with ASTM C 94. C. Air Content of Normal Weight Concrete: ASTM C 173 or ASTM C 231. One test per strength test performed on air - entrained concrete. D. Concrete Temperature: 1. Test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F or below. 2. Test hourly when air temperature is 90 degrees F or above. 3. Test each time a set of strength test specimens is made. E. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39. 1. Compression test specimens: Mold and cure one set of 4 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test required. 2. Testing for acceptance of potential strength of as- delivered concrete: a. Obtain samples on a statistically sound, random basis. b. Minimum frequency: (1) One set per 100 cubic yards or fraction thereof for each day's pour of each concrete class. (2) One set per 3500 square feet of slab or wall area or fraction thereof for each day's pour of each concrete class. (3) When less than 5 cubic yards is placed in one day, the Owner may, at Owner's option, waive laboratory testing of specimens if adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided. (Molding and curing of these specimens is not waived.) (4) When the above testing frequency would provide fewer than 5 strength tests for a given class of concrete 24646.00 03300 - 12 during the project, conduct testing from not less than 5 randomly selected batches, or from each batch if fewer than 5. Test one specimen per set at 7 days for information unless an earlier age is required. Test 2 specimens per set for acceptance of strength potential; test at 28 days unless other age is specified. The test result shall be the average of the two specimens. If one specimen shows evidence of improper sampling, molding, or testing, the test result shall be the result of the remaining specimen; if both show such evidence, discard the test result and inform the Owner. e. Retain one specimen from each set for later testing, if required. f. Strength potential of as- delivered concrete will be considered acceptable if all of the following criteria are met: (1) No individual test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. (2) Not more than 10 percent of individual test results fall below specified compressive strength f'(c). (3) Average of any 3 consecutive strength test results equals or exceeds specified compressive strength f'(c). g. Evaluate construction and curing procedures and implement corrective action when strength results for field -cured specimens are less than 85 percent of test values for companion laboratory -cured specimens. Test Results: Testing agency shall report test results in writing to Owner and Contractor within 24 hours of test. 1. Test reports shall contain the following data: a. Project name, number, and other identification. b. Name of concrete testing agency. c. Date and time of sampling. d. Concrete type and class. e. Location of concrete batch in the completed work. f. All information required by respective ASTM test methods. 2. Nondestructive testing devices such as impact hammer or sonoscope may be used at Owner's option for assistance in determining probable concrete strength at various locations or for selecting areas to be cored, but such tests shall not be the sole basis for acceptance or rejection. 3. The testing agency shall make additional tests of in -place concrete as directed by the Owner when test results indicate that specified strength and other concrete characteristics have not been attained. a. Testing agency may conduct tests of cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or tests as directed. b. Cost of additional testing shall be borne by the Contractor when unacceptable concrete has been verified. c . d. SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE END OF SECTION 24646.00 03300 - 13 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Precast concrete caps. 2. Connection devices. 3. Grout packing. B. Products furnished but not installed under this section: 1. Anchors for connecting precast concrete elements to structural framing. C. Related Sections: 1. Cast -in -place concrete: Elsewhere in Division 2. Joint sealers: Division 7. 3. Precast Concrete Painting: Section 09900. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Include complete information essential to proper fabrication and installation of precast units. Show dimensions, fabrication tolerances, and reinforcement sizes and locations, including locations and types of lifting devices required. 1. Show location of precast units and identification of each, corresponding to planned sequence of installation. 2. Designate welded connections by means of standard AWS symbols. 3. Provide locations and details of anchorages for installation in other work; furnish templates if required for accuracy. 4. Provide design calculations prepared by a professional structural engineer registered in the State of Washington. B. Samples: Precast concrete panels not less than 12 inches square, illustrating finish color, quality, and texture. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following, except where exceeded by other requirements of the contract documents or of governing authorities: 1 1. ACI 301. 2. ACI 318. 3. ANSI /AWS D1.4. 4. CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. 1 5. PCI MNL -116. 6. PCI MNL -117. B. Fabricator Qualifications: 1. Not less than 5 years of successful experience in fabrication of units similar to those required for this project, and sufficient capacity to produce required units without causing construction delay. 2. Producer member of the Prestressed Concrete Institute (PCI). C. Fabrication Requirements: 1. Design units to support loads indicated and as required by applicable code requirements. 2. Site - produced units are acceptable if procedures and conditions for quality control are maintained equivalent to plant production. 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 03450 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE 03450 - 1 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 03450 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE D. Erector Qualifications: Firm with not less than 5 years of experience in the successful erection of precast units comparable to those specified. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver precast concrete units to ensure continuity of installation. Store to prevent damage such as cracking, distortion, or staining, and to maintain visibility of markings. Handle and support units using only designated lift points and lifting devices. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMWORK A. General: Construct forms accurately to size, mortar - tight, and of sufficient strength to withstand all fabrication operations without distortion of precast units. B. Tolerances: Maintain formwork to provide finished units within fabrication tolerances specified in PCI MNL -116. C. Facing Materials, General: Provide form facings of metal, plastic, or other nonreactive material that will produce required concrete finish. 2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed except where plain bars are indicated. B. Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, plain cold - drawn. C. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, plain cold -drawn steel. D. Reinforcing Accessories: 1. Tie wire: Black annealed type, 16 -1/2 gage or heavier. 2. Supports: Bar supports conforming to specification of CRSI's Manual of Standard Practice. a. Class 1 (plastic protected) at all formed surfaces which will be exposed to weather. b. Class 1 (plastic protected) or Class 2 (stainless steel protected) at all formed surfaces which will be exposed to view but not to weather. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, and as follows: 1. Type I or Type III, except where other type is specifically permitted or required by the contract documents. B. Aggregates: 1. Normal weight: ASTM C 33. C. Water: Potable. D. Admixtures - General: Admixtures which result in more than 0.1 percent of soluble chloride ions by weight of cement are prohibited. E. Air - Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures specified. 24646.00 03450 - 2 • 2.6 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN 2.7 FABRICATION 24646.00 03450 - 3 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 03450 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade C. D. Miscellaneous Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A bolts. E. Accessories: Hangers, clips, and other items required for installation of precast units and support of related construction. 2.5 GROUT MATERIALS C. Mix: Design mix to achieve properties of concrete as follows: 1. Compressive strength: 4000 psi minimum at 28 days. D. Mix Adjustments: Provided that no additional expense to Owner is involved, Contractor may submit for Owner's approval requests for adjustment to approved concrete mixes when circumstances such as changed project conditions, weather, or unfavorable test results occur. Include laboratory test data substantiating performance characteristics with mix adjustment requests. E. Admixtures: 1. Air - entraining admixture: Use in accordance with ACI 301 for maximum size of coarse aggregate. 2. Water - reducing admixtures: Use in strict compliance with manufacturer's directions and in amounts suitable for weather conditions prevailing at time of placement. F. Water - Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. 2.4 CONNECTION MATERIALS A. Steel Welding Plates: ASTM A 283; Grade C, structural quality. B. Steel Finish: Hot -dip galvanize after fabrication components that will be exposed to weather, in accordance with ASTM A 153. Components that are cast into precast units and exposed to view but not to weather may be cadmium coated, electro- galvanized, or hot -dip galvanized. Other steel components may be coated with fabricator's standard rust inhibitor paint. A. Cement Grout: One part portland cement (ASTM C 150, Type I) to 3 parts clean, natural sand (ASTM C 404), mixed with minimum amount of water for hydration and placement. A. General: Prepare design mix of concrete on the basis of either field experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301. B. Review: Do not begin concrete production until proposed mix has been reviewed by the Owner. A. General: Fabricate architectural precast concrete units in compliance with PCI MNL -117. Adequately reinforce units to resist stresses due to transporting and handling. B. Site Casting: Use ready -mixed concrete complying with ASTM C 94 for units produced at the project location. 1. Do not add water to concrete with insufficient slump. 2. At ambient temperatures of 85 to 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 75 minutes. SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 03450 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE 3. At ambient temperatures above 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. C. Built -in Anchorages: Locate accurately and secure to formwork. Position to avoid interference with main reinforcement or placement of concrete; do not relocate without the Owner's approval. D. Openings: Cast openings with minimum dimension of 10 inches or larger. Smaller openings may be field cut as required, with the Owner's prior approval. E. Release Agent: Provide either form materials with permanent factory- applied nonabsorptive liner or form coating. If form coating is used, thoroughly clean and recondition formwork and reapply coating before each use. Rust on form surfaces is unacceptable. F. Reinforcement: Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, soil, and other materials which adversely affect bond with concrete. Place reinforcement to achieve not less than minimum concrete coverages required for protection, and accurately position, secure, and support against displacement. Set wire ties completely embedded in concrete without contact with or penetration of exposed concrete surfaces. G. Concrete: Place continuously for each unit, complying with requirements of ACI 304. Consolidate concrete by vibration while avoiding damage to or dislocation of reinforcement, anchorages, and built -in accessories. H. Identification: Mark units to identify pickup points and final orientation, corresponding to final shop drawings. Imprint fabrication date on each unit in concealed location. I. Architectural Finish: Fabricate exposed faces of architectural precast concrete units to achieve finish as follows: 1. Smooth, off - the -form finish, free of pockets, sand streaks, and other surface blemishes. 2. Match Owner's control samples. J. Provide as -cast or float finish for surfaces which will be concealed. 2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Non - Conforming Work: Replace precast concrete units which do not conform to specified requirements, as directed by the Owner, and pay for corrections to other work necessitated by such replacement. 1. Dimensions: Precast concrete units smaller than allowed by specified tolerances will be rejected. Units larger than specified tolerances will be rejected if they interfere with other construction or if, in the opinion of the Owner, the appearance of the work is adversely affected. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with erection recommendations of PCI MNL -127. Provide temporary shoring, bracing, and connections as required to maintain stability of structure and precast units during construction, arranged to avoid interference with subsequent precast unit installation. 24646.00 03450 - 4 12 1 Anchor Bolts: Clean bearing and contact surfaces before assembly. Set precast units accurately, using wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. After tightening anchor bolts and ensuring that members are plumb, grout solidly between plates and bearing surfaces. C. Bolting: At bolted connections, use lock washers or other acceptable means to prevent loosening of nut. D Erection Tolerances: Do not exceed tolerance limits specified in PCI MNL-127. E. Grouting Joints: Grout open joints after precast units have been placed, properly aligned, and permanently secured in position. Use formwork if required to avoid leaks and maintain grout in proper position until it has cured. Strike off unformed grout surfaces flush with adjacent surfaces. Do not allow grout to dry prematurely. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: Conduct inspections, perform testing, and make repairs or • replace unsatisfactory precast units as required. The Owner may reject architectural precast panels for any of the following reasons: 1. Specified tolerances exceeded. 2. Damage to panels. • 3. Surface finish deficiencies in exposed faces. 4. Other defects as listed in PCI tfiL-117. 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean exposed faces of precast units after all joint treatment has been completed, following recommendations of precast fabricator. Provide protection to adjacent surfaces which could be damaged by cleaning materials or methods. 24646.00 OWN4O.46 • . SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON ' SECTION 03450 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE END OF SECTION 03450 - 5 • • • - • , , • „. • • PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 1.2 SUBMITTALS SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 04230 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Mortar and grout. 3. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Precast concrete trim: Division 3. 2. Joint sealers: Division 7. A. Product Data: Submit published data from manufacturers of products and accessories specified, indicating compliance with requirements. B. Verification Samples: Submit mock -up panels comprised of the following actual materials; include no fewer than four masonry unit samples displaying extremes of color and texture variation to be anticipated in the completed construction: 1. Decorative concrete masonry units. 2. Include mortar and grout samples as part of submittal. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Control: Obtain exposed masonry units from one manufacturer, with texture and color uniform or of a uniform blend acceptable to the Owner. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means which will prevent mechanical damage and deterioration due to moisture, temperature changes, and contamination by other materials. 1. Provide protection which will limit moisture absorption of concrete masonry units to the maximum percentage specified for Type I units at a relative humidity which is normal for the project site. B. Protect cementitious materials from precipitation and absorption of ground moisture. C. Store masonry accessories to prevent corrosion, dirt accumulation, and other deterioration. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Construction Protection: Cover tops of incomplete masonry elements with waterproof sheet material at end of each work day and when masonry work is not under way. 1. Secure weather protection in place with weights or by use of temporary fasteners. 2. Immediately remove mortar, soil, and other such materials from exposed masonry faces to prevent staining. 3. Prevent splashing and soiling of masonry near ground level by spreading sheet material to cover soil or masonry faces. 4. Protect horizontal masonry elements from mortar droppings. 24646.00 04230 - 1 B. Loading Protection: Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours, or concentrated loads for at least 3 days, after completion of masonry elements. C. Cold Weather Protection: Do not lay masonry units when outside air temperature is below 40 degrees F. 1. Grouted construction: On any day when minimum anticipated nighttime temperature is 32 degrees F or less, in addition to complying with general procedures above, heat grout materials to 90 degrees F to produce in -place grout temperature of not less than 70 degrees F at end of work day. Retain protective blankets or enclosures for not less than 48 hours. a. Period of protection may be reduced to 24 hours when Type III portland cement is used for grout. 2. Water: Do not heat water for mortar or grout to more than 160 degrees F. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Concrete Block: and as follows: 1. Special shapes: Provide special block types where required for corners, control joints, headers, lintels, and other special conditions, whether or not specifically indicated on the drawings as special. a. Outside corners: indicated. 2. Hollow load - bearing units: ASTM C 90, and as follows: a. Type I: Moisture - controlled units. b. Medium weight. c. Exposed faces: Special color and texture, as follows: (1) Wilamette Grey Stone "Goldenrod ", P7489, 2 (a) Finish: Special aggregate, ground finish. 2.2 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 04230 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. D. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C 404. E. Water: Potable. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE 24646.00 Comply with referenced standards for types required, Bullnose units except where otherwise A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 1. Type III may be substituted during cold- weather construction. 2. Provide portland cement of color required to produce approved mortar sample. C. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. Colored mortar aggregates: Ground stone, in colors required to match exposed faces. F. Accelerating Admixture: Nonchloride type for cold weather mortar mixes, in proportion recommended by manufacturer. A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 40, deformed, except as specifically indicated otherwise. 04230 - 2 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 04230 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 1. Bending: Reinforcing bars which are shown to be bent or hooked. 2. Galvanized reinforcing bars: ASTM A 767, Class I, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and bending. a. When bars are cut after galvanizing, coat the sheared ends with a zinc -rich coating. B. Joint Reinforcement and Anchorage Materials: Comply with the following general requirements for materials required in joint reinforcement and anchorage devices: 1. Steel wire: ASTM A 82. a. Hot -dip galvanizing (after fabrication): ASTM A 153, Class B -2. (1) Use: Exterior locations or in contact with earth. 2. Zinc - coated steel sheet: ASTM A 525 carbon steel, with G90 zinc coating. a. Use: Dovetail slots and similar applications. 3. Hot -dip galvanized steel sheet: ASTM A 635 or ASTM A 366; galvanizing in compliance with ASTM A 153, Class B. a. Use: Anchors and miscellaneous sheet metal in masonry accessories at exterior exposures. C. Joint Reinforcement: Welded -wire units prefabricated into straight lengths of not less than 10 feet, with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods. 1. Width: Approximately two inches less than nominal wall width, providing not less than 5/8 inch mortar coverage on exterior exposures and 1/2 inch elsewhere. 2. Wire sizes: a. Side rod-diameter: 0.1483 inch. b. Cross rod diameter: 0.1483 inch. 3. Configuration: a. Applications of single unit width: Ladder design, cross rods at not more than 16 inches on center. b. Corners: Prefabricated L- and T- shaped units. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Bond Breaker Strips: ASTM D 226, Type I; No. 15 asphalt felt. B. Sealant and Backer Rod: As specified in Division 7. 2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures unless indicated as acceptable in the contract documents. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout mixture. B. Mixing: Use mechanical batch mixer and comply with referenced ASTM standards. C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. 1. Limit cementitious materials to lime and portland cement. 2. Reinforced masonry: Type S. 3. Applications as follows: Type N. a. Locations for which another mortar type has not been specifically indicated. D. Mortar Colored with Aggregates: Produce required mortar color by use of colored aggregates in combination with selected cementitious materials. 1. Mix to match grout. 04230 - 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 04230 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY E. Grout: ASTM C 476; provide consistency required at time of placement to fill completely all spaces indicated to be grouted. 1. Use fine grout in spaces less than 2 'inches in least horizontal dimension. 2. Use coarse grout in spaces 2 inches or more in least horizontal dimension. 3. Grout Color: Davis "51127" at 2 lbs per 94 lbs gray cement. A. Concrete Masonry Units: Do not wet concrete masonry units prior to laying. B. Reinforcement and Anchorage: Before placing metal masonry accessories, remove loose rust, dirt, and other coatings. C. Masonry Thickness: Build masonry elements to full thickness shown. D. Chases and Recesses: Build masonry to accommodate the work of other trades, including chases and recesses as shown or required. Provide not less than 8 inches of masonry between jambs of openings and chases and recesses. E. Openings for Equipment and Services: Leave openings in masonry as required for subsequent installation of equipment and services. Make openings in designated locations and in exact size required, if known; otherwise, leave rough openings in approximate size required and complete masonry work after installation of equipment, matching adjoining masonry. 3.2 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb: Do not exceed the following construction tolerances in vertical elements, including surfaces of walls, columns, and arrises: 1. 1/8 inch in 10 feet. B. Variation from Level: Do not exceed the following construction tolerances for bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous horizontal elements: 1. 1/8 inch in 10 feet maximum. C. Variation from Plan Lines: Do not exceed the following horizontal construction tolerances for related portions of columns, walls, and partitions: 1. 1/8 inch in 20 feet maximum. D. Variation in Cross Section: Do not exceed the following construction tolerances for thickness of walls and other masonry elements: 1. Minus 1/8 inch. 2. Plus 1/8 inch. E. Variation in Mortar Joint Thickness: Do not exceed the following construction tolerances for thickness of mortar joints: 1. Bed joints: Plus or minus 1/8 inch. 2. Head joints: Minus 1/4 inch, plus 3/8 inch. 24646.00 04230 - 4 3.3 MASONRY CONSTRUCTION - GENERAL 3.4 LAYING MASONRY UNITS SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 04230 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY A. Layout: Lay out masonry for accurate pattern bond, for uniform joint widths, and for accurate location of specific features before beginning actual construction. Avoid use of masonry units of less than 1/2 size. Do not use units with less than nominal 4 inch horizontal face dimensions at corners and jambs. B. Pattern Bond: Lay exposed masonry in running bond except where other bonds are indicated at special features. 1. Lay concealed masonry in running bond, or lap units at least 2 inches. 2. Interlock wythes at corners and offsets in each course with masonry bond. C. Stopping Work: Lay masonry in proper sequence to avoid toothing. Rack walls back in each course at end of each work day. Before resuming, clean exposed surfaces and remove loose masonry units and mortar. D. Built -in Work: As work progresses, build in items indicated for installation in masonry, filling around built -in items solidly with masonry. 1. Fill joints between masonry and metal frames solidly with mortar, unless specific conditions are otherwise detailed. 2. At locations where built -in items are to be connected to hollow unit masonry, solidly grout cores to provide adequate anchorage. 3. Unless other conditions are specifically detailed, solidly grout cores for at least 24 inches below bearing plates, lintels, and similar features and conditions. A. Hollow Masonry Units: Install so that face mortared, horizontally and vertically. Bed starting course. 1. Bed webs solidly in mortar at cores to shells are solidly webs solidly in mortar at be grouted. B. Joints: Make mortar joints visually and dimensionally consistent. 1. Except as otherwise indicated, maintain mortar joint widths of 1/2 inch. C. Concealed Joints: Cut flush, unless otherwise detailed. D. Exposed Joints: Using concave jointer slightly larger than joint width, tool exposed joints before mortar has assumed final set. E. Resetting: Do not pound, tap, or otherwise attempt to adjust masonry units after initial set has occurred. Remove units which require adjusting, clean thoroughly, and reset in fresh mortar. 3.5 JOINT REINFORCEMENT, SINGLE -WYTHE WALLS A. General: Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcement for all masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 6 inches. B. Vertical Spacing: Not more than 16 inches on center. C. Continuity: Use prefabricated L- shaped and T- shaped sections at corners and intersections. Do not span movement joints with reinforcement. 24646.00 04230 - 5 3.6 ANCHORING MASONRY SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 04230 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY A. Structural Framing Anchorage: Anchor masonry to structural framework at points of adjacency, and as follows: 1. Maintain open space of 1 inch or more between face of framing member and masonry elements. 2. Fasten anchors to structure and embed in mortar joints as masonry is laid. 3. Space anchors at maximum of 36 inches on center horizontally and 24 inches on center vertically. 3.7 INSTALLING REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY A. Preparation: Clean reinforcement bars of loose rust; do not use bars which have rusted excessively or which have bends or kinks not shown on drawings. B. Placing Reinforcement: Secure reinforcement accurately at locations indicated and to avoid displacement; minimum spacing between bars or to masonry surfaces shall be bar diameter or 1/4 inch for fine grout and 1/2 inch for coarse grout, whichever is greater. C. Splicing: Provide lapped splices of minimum size indicated or permitted by governing code at locations shown; other methods or locations must be approved by the Owner. D. Mortar Joints: Where reinforcement other than prefabricated joint reinforcement is required in mortar joints, adjust joint thickness to provide not less than 1/4 inch of mortar between reinforcement and masonry surfaces. E. Reinforced Hollow Unit Masonry: Maintain vertical continuity of core or cell cavities to be grouted. Keep cavities clear of mortar, including bed area of first course, to provide minimum clear dimension indicated, to provide minimum clearance and grout coverage for vertical reinforcement bars, and to provide direct grout contact with supporting surfaces. 1. At bond beams or other horizontally reinforced masonry, provide special masonry units or saw units to accommodate reinforcement. 2. Contractor option: Fill all cores with grout in lieu of closing core spaces below bond beams and providing mortar bedding of masonry cross webs. 3.8 GROUTING A. Grouting Standard: Grout reinforced masonry in accordance with requirements of ACI 530.1 /ASCE 6 /TMS 602. 1. Do not pour grout until mortar has cured sufficiently to withstand grout pressure. 3.9 REPAIRING MASONRY A. Replacement: Carefully remove areas of damaged masonry and replace with matching, undamaged units using mortar which matches original work. B. Pointing: As joints are being tooled, remove mortar with visible holes or mortar which cannot be compacted properly because of hidden voids, and replace with fresh mortar, filling each joint completely and tooling to match adjacent work. 24646.00 04230 - 6 END OF SECTION --------...— SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 04230 ' • REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY .10 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean masonry after mortar is thoroughly set and cured. 1. Scrape off adhered mortar particles by hand, using non-metallic tools. 2 ; Comply with directions of concrete unit masonry manufacturer and NCMA Tek Bulletin No 45 for cleaning CMU. Protection: Institute protective measures as required to ensure that unit masonry work will be clean and undamaged at substantial completion. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL A. Section Includes: 1. Fabrication and erection of structural steel framing members, as defined in AISC Code and as indicated on the drawings. 2. Fabrication and erection of architecturally exposed structural steel (AESS) . 3. Welding. 4. Shop painting. B. Products Furnished but Not Installed under This Section: 1. Steel anchorages cast in concrete. 2. Steel anchorages embedded in masonry. C. Related Sections: 1. Miscellaneous metal fabrications: Elsewhere in Division 5. 2. Touch -up shop primer: Division 9. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Items as listed in of AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and excluding steel, iron, or other metal items not listed, even if attached to the structural framing. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: Unless otherwise specifically approved in writing, furnish exact sections, weights, and kinds of material specified, using details and dimensions shown. 1. Not all connections are detailed; similar details apply to similar conditions, unless otherwise indicated. Contact the Owner promptly to verify design of members or connections in any situation where design requirements are unclear. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Producer's or manufacturer's information for products as follows, including sufficient data to show compliance with specified requirements: 1. Specifications for primer paint, including manufacturer's data on chemical composition, adhesion of spray fireproofing, and dry film thickness per applied coat. 2. Specifications for nonshrink grout. B. Shop Drawings: Complete drawings for structural steel, including information on location, type, and size of all connections, distinguishing between those made in the shop and those made in the field. 1. Indicate weld lengths and sizes, using standard American Welding Society (AWS) welding symbols. 2. Include setting drawings and templates for anchorages to be installed by others. 3. Prepare shop drawings under the seal of a professional structural engineer registered in the State of Washington. C. Welder Qualifications: Evidence that welders employed in the work are currently certified under American Welding Society (AWS) qualification procedures. 24646.00 05120 - 1 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL MATERIALS 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL A. Welding Procedures: Establish that joint welding procedures are prequalified or test in accordance with American Welding Society (AWS) qualification procedures. B. Welder Qualifications: Welders must be currently certified under American Welding Society (AWS) qualification procedures. C. Regulatory Requirements: Unless other requirements of governing authorities or particular requirements of this specification are more stringent, comply with provisions of the following: 1. AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 2. AISC "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings -- Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design," with Commentary and Supplements. 3. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." D. Testing and Inspection Agency: The Owner will engage an independent testing and inspection agency to perform testing, inspect and evaluate connections, and prepare test reports. 1. Correct deficiencies in the structural steel work identified by the testing and inspection agency at no additional expense to the Owner. Subsequent tests to confirm the adequacy of corrected work will be at the Contractor's expense. A. Shipping: Deliver steel in timely fashion, to permit the most efficient and economical flow of work. Deliver steel members properly marked for field assembly and erection. 1. Deliver anchor bolts, washers, and other anchorage devices to be built into other work in time to avoid delays and permit their proper installation. B. Storage: Protect steel and other materials of this section from damage and corrosion. If temporary storage at the project site is required, keep steel members off the ground, using platforms or pallets, in location easily accessible for inspection. A. AESS Materials - General: For members which will be exposed in the finished work and have been identified as AESS on the drawings, provide only materials which are free of surface blemishes such as pitting, roller marks, rolled trade names, and surface roughness. B. Structural Steel Members: ASTM A 36. C. Structural Tubing, Cold- Formed: ASTM A 500. D. Mild to Medium - Strength Carbon -Steel Castings: ASTM A 27, Grade 65 -35. E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, Carbon steel, Grade C; ASTM A 36 steel plate washer; galvanized. F. Carbon Steel Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 307, Grade A. 1. AESS: Provide hexagonal bolt heads and nuts at all exposed 24646.00 05120 - 2 2.3 FABRICATION A. 2.4 SHOP COATING - PAINT SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL connections. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Electrodes and Fluxes: AWS D1.1; types as required by materials being welded. B. Nonshrink Grout: Prepackaged material requiring only the addition of water and complying with ASTM C 1107, and as follows: 1. Metallic type. C. Shop Primer: Zinc -rich urethane; Tnemec "90 -97" or approved. 1. Salt spray resistance at minimum recommended thickness: 4000 hours per ASTM B117. 2. AISC rated "Class B" for use on faying surfaces. Shop Assembly - General: Comply with requirements of AISC Specifications. Shop fabricate and assemble to maximum degree possible. 1 1. AESS: Comply with requirements of AISC Code for architecturally exposed structural steel. a. Appearance: Cut, fit, and assemble units with exposed surfaces smooth, square, and free from cutting marks, shear I b. distortion, burrs, and nicks. Tolerances: As specified in AISC Code for AESS, unless more stringent requirements are indicated on the drawings. I B. Thermal Cutting: Perform all thermal cutting by machine. 1. Plane thermally cut edges which are to be welded. C. Connections: I 1. Shop connections: Welded or bolted, as required. 2. Field connections: Welded or bolted, as required. 3. Welds: Comply with requirements of AWS Code for welding procedures and quality of welds, including appearance. I a. Built -up sections: Assemble components and weld using procedures which will maintain proper alignment of finished section. b. AESS: Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and i equipment to be employed will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Surface bleed of back -side welding on exposed surfaces will not be acceptable. (1) Grind smooth exposed fillet welds 1/2 inch and larger. (2) Grind flush butt welds. (3) Dress all exposed welds. D. Finishing: Accurately mill ends of columns and other members which I must transmit loads in bearing. E. Holes in Steel Members: Make all holes by means of cutting, drilling, or punching at right angles to surface of metal. Do not make or enlarge holes by burning. 1. Provide holes in steel members as required to permit connection of work by others. A. Shop prime all steel members, except: 1. Galvanized steel members. 2. Steel members to receive sprayed -on fireproofing. 24646.00 05120 - 3 3. Steel members which are not to receive a finish paint system. 4. Do not paint the following surfaces: a. Machined or milled surfaces. b. Surfaces adjacent to field welds. c. Faying surfaces of bolted connections. B. Preparation: Thoroughly clean steel surfaces to be shop primed, removing loose rust, loose mill scale, dirt, oil, and grease. Clean steel in accordance with SSPC procedures as follows: 1. Prepare for application of special coatings as specified elsewhere. C. Painting: As soon as possible after cleaning, apply specified primer paint in accordance with instructions of paint manufacturer, at a rate sufficient to provide a finished thickness of not less than 1.5 mils and an average thickness of 2.0 mils. 2.5 SHOP QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspection: 1. General: Provide access to testing and inspection agency so that specified testing and inspection can be safely accomplished. 2. Shop bolted connections: Comply with testing and verification procedures in AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts." 3. Shop welded connections: Inspect and test shop - fabricated welds as follows: a. Visually inspect all welds. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions for erection of structural steel and verify that the work may properly proceed. Do not commence erection of structural steel until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected or fabricated steel components have been adjusted with the Owner's agreement. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary guys, braces, falsework, cribbing, or other elements required to secure the steel framing against loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove such temporary support only when permanent connections have been made and the steel framing is fully capable of supporting design loads, including any temporary construction loads. 3.3 ERECTION A. General: Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC Code and Specifications. 1. AESS: Comply with erection requirements of AISC Code dealing with architecturally exposed structural steel. B. Assembly: 1. Set structural members accurately to locations and elevations indicated, within tolerances established in AISC Code, before making final connections. 2. Do not use thermal cutting to correct fabrication errors on any major structural member. 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 4 . E. Welding: 1. Do not perform field welding when ambient temperature is at 0 degrees F or below, or when surfaces are wet, exposed to rain, snow, or high wind. 2. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 3. Tighten and leave in place erection bolts used in field- welded construction. a. AESS: Verify that weld sizes, erection sequence, and equipment to be employed will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Surface bleed of back -side welding on exposed surfaces is not acceptable. (1) Grind smooth exposed fillet welds 1/2 inch and larger. (2) Grind flush butt welds. (3) Dress all exposed welds. (4) Remove erection bolts, plug -weld bolt holes, and grind smooth. F. Touch -up Painting: Requirements of touch -up painting are included as part of the painting specification in Division 9. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspection: 1. General: Provide access to testing and inspection agency so that specified testing and inspection can be safely accomplished. 2. Field- bolted connections: Comply with testing and verification procedures in AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts." 3. Field- welded connections: Inspect and test field - fabricated welds as follows: a. Visually inspect all field welds. END OF SECTION 05120 - 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 1.2 JOB CONDITIONS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS - METALS 2.2 MATERIALS - MISCELLANEOUS 2.3 FABRICATION - GENERAL 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Section Includes: 1. Ladders. 2. Miscellaneous metal fabrications. B. Related Sections: 1. Structural steel: Elsewhere in Division A. Coordination with Masonry and Concrete Work: Where fabricated items or their anchors are to be embedded into concrete and masonry work, deliver such items to those performing the installation, together with coordination drawings and installation instructions. A. Steel Shapes: 1. Plates, bars, angles, channels, and H- sections: ASTM A 36. 2. Galvanizing: Hot -dip galvanizing after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 123. B. Galvanizing for Steel Rough Hardware Fabrications: Hot -dip galvanizing in accordance with ASTM A 153. A. Fasteners: Use fasteners suitable for the material being fastened and for the type of connection required. 1. For exterior use or built into exterior walls: Nonferrous stainless steel, zinc coated or cadmium plated. 2. Use fasteners of same material as items being fastened unless otherwise indicated. 3. Bolts and studs: ASTM A 307. 4. Nuts: ASTM A 563. 5. Plain washers: FS FF -W -92. 6. Lock washers: FS FF -W -84. 7. Expansion shields: FS FF -S -325. B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: Zinc dust paint complying with SSPC -Paint 20 or MIL P- 21035B, Type I or II. A. Fabricate and shop - assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site. 1. Prepare and reinforce fabrications as required to receive applied items. 2. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. 3. Make exposed joints tight, flush, and hairline. B. Fasteners: Use concealed fasteners if possible. 1. Exposed fasteners: Flathead, countersunk type unless otherwise indicated. 05500 - 1 • ' • 24646.00 AnChori: Fabricate to suit conditions indicated; use 'anchors of same material and finish as item except where specifically indicated' otherwise. Welding: 1. Provide continuous welds at welded corners and seams. 2. Exposed welds: Grind flush and smooth. FABRICATION - LADDERS Fixed Ladders: Construct as indicated. 1. All steel construction. a. Where other handholds are not indicated: (1) Make rails extend at least 42 inches above the top rung; return to wall. 2. Weld rungs to side rails, on centerline. 3. Smooth sharp edges and remove burrs from side rails. • - - PART 3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL - EXECUTION • .' .;.SOUTHCENTERCORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON:: SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Anchor metal fabrications to substrates indicated; provide all'. fasteners required. Perform all field fabrication required for installation: 1. Fit joints tightly. 2. Weld joints as indicated. a. Weld in accordance with AWS code. b. Exposed welds: Grind.flush and smooth. C. Install items in correct location, plumb and level, without rack or. warp D. Provide temporary supports and bracing as required. END OF SECTION 05500 - 2 • ! PART 1 - GENERAL SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 05721 BUILDING ADDRESS NUMERALS SUMMARY Section Includes: Building address numerals. Related Sections: 1. Metal Fabrications: Elsewhere in Division 5. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: For each fabricated item, show the following: 1. Elevations. 2. Connections to building. ' PART'2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS - METALS A. Address Numerals: 1. Style as indicated on drawings. 2. Steel. 3. Finish: Duranar /Fluropon (70% resin); Metallic (3 coat system). 4. Color: Duranar "Silver Metallic ". B. Fasteners: Use fasteners suitable for the material being fastened and . for the type of connection required. 1. For exterior use: Nonferrous stainless steel, zinc coated or cadmium plated. 2.2 FABRICATION - GENERAL A. Fabricate and shop - assemble for delivery to site. B. Prepare fabrications as required to receive specified finish. C. Smooth off exposed edges D. Anchors: Fabricate to suit anchors indicated; use anchors of same material and finish as item except where specifically indicated otherwise. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install numerals in correct location, plumb and level. B. Anchor to substrates indicated; provide all fasteners required. 24646.00 END OF SECTION 05721 - 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Carpentry work not specified as part of other sections and which generally is not exposed, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Rough carpentry for: a. Wood framing. b. Miscellaneous lumber for attachment and support of other work. c. Sheathing. 3. Preservative treatment. B. Related Sections: 1. Finish carpentry: Elsewhere in Division 6. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber: Comply with NIST PS 20 and approved grading rules and inspection agencies. B. Inspection Agencies: 1. WCLB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. C. Grade Stamps for Concealed Lumber: Each piece of lumber, applied by inspection agency and showing compliance with each specified requirement. D. Construction Panels: Comply with NBS PS 1 where veneer plywood is specified; comply with APA PRP -108 where APA rated panels are specified; bearing APA trademark showing compliance with each specified requirement. 1.3 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect wood products against moisture and dimensional changes. Support stacks at several uniformly spaced points to prevent deformation. Store stacks raised above ground. Cover to protect from rain and snow. Select and arrange cover to allow air circulation under and all around stacks to prevent condensation. Maintain and restore displaced coverings. Remove from the site any wood products that have been subjected to moisture or that do not comply with the specified moisture requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Size: Provide nominal sizes indicated, complying with NIST PS 20 except where actual sizes are specifically required. 1. Surfacing: Dressed lumber (S4S). 2. Moisture content: S -dry or MC19 (19 percent maximum moisture content). B. Stud Framing -- 2 x 2 through 4 x 4 and 2 x 6: 1. Species: a. Any wood species /species group listed in National Design Specification Supplement. 2. Grade: No. 1 (Structural Light Framing). 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 1 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY C. Joist and Small Beam Framing -- 2 x 6 through 4 x 16: 1. Species: a. Any wood species listed in National Design Specification Supplement. 2. Grade: No. 1. D. Miscellaneous Lumber: Provide dimension lumber and boards necessary for the support of work specified in other sections, whether or not specifically indicated, and including but not limited to blocking, nailers, etc. 1. Moisture content: 19 percent maximum (S -dry). 2. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or standard grade. 3. Boards: Construction, 2 common, or No. 2 grade. 2.2 BOARDS - LESS THAN 2 INCHES THICKNESS A. Moisture Content: S -dry (19 percent maximum). B. Surfacing: S4S. C. Grading Agency: 1. WCLB. D. Species: 1. Douglas Fir. 2. Hem -Fir. E. Grade: No. 3, 3 common, or standard boards. 2.3 CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Roof Sheathing: 1. APA rated sheathing: a. Exterior exposure class. b. 24/16 span rated. c. Tongue and groove edges. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Provide as required by applicable codes and as otherwise indicated. 1. Provide fasteners with a hot -dip zinc coating (ASTM A 153) for treated lumber and where wood is in ground contact, subjected to high relative humidity, or exposed to weather. B. Framing Connectors and Supports: Prefabricated, formed steel units; hot -dip galvanized finish unless otherwise indicated; type and size as required; approved by applicable codes. C. Building Paper: 30 -1b. felt; asphalt saturated felt, ASTM D 226, Type I (nonperforated). 2.5 WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS A. Aboveground Lumber: AWPB LP -2 (waterborne preservatives). 1. Kiln dried after treatment to 19 percent maximum moisture content. 2. Treat the following: a. Wood within 18 inches of grade. b. Other members indicated. B. Fasteners for Preservative Treated Wood: Hot -dip galvanized steel (ASTM A153). 24646.00 06100 - 2 ..'. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY A. Arrange work to use full length pieces except where lengths would exceed commercially available lengths. Discard pieces with defects that would lower the required strength or appearance of the work. B. Cut and fit members accurately. Install plumb and true to line and level. C. Fasten carpentry in accordance with applicable codes and recognized standards. D. Where exposed, countersink nails and fill flush with suitable wood filler. E. Use fasteners of appropriate type and length. Predrill members when necessary to avoid splitting wood. 3.2 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY A. Provide miscellaneous blocking, nailers, grounds, and framing as shown and as required for support of facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. Cut and shape to the required size. Provide in locations required by other work. B. Use countersunk fasteners appropriate to applied loading. 3.3 WOOD FRAMING - GENERAL A. Comply with sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated. Where not specifically indicated, comply with applicable codes and NFPA "Manual for Wood Frame Construction." Splice members only,where specifically indicated or approved. B. Space fasteners as indicated. Where not specifically indicated, comply with applicable codes and the "Recommended Nailing Schedule" of NFPA "Manual for Wood Frame Construction" and "National Design Specification for Wood Construction." 3.4 BOARD SHEATHING A. Locate end joints over supports unless end matched boards are used. Separate joints in adjacent boards by at least one joist or stud space. Separate joints over the same support by at least two boards. Nail 6- inch -wide boards using two 8d nails at intermediate supports and three at diaphragm boundaries. Nail 8 -inch and wider boards using three 8d nails at intermediate supports and four at diaphragm boundaries. B. Install building paper weatherboard fashion, free of tears or gaps; lap edges at least 2 inches and ends at least 6 inches. Fasten with roofing nails. 24646.00 06100 - 3 A. Employ the following fastening methods: 1. Nail roof sheathing to framing. Staples not permitted. a. At panel edges, provide one panel clip per span. b., Provide solid blocking under panel, edges other than intact tongue and groove edges. . . • • . • SOUTHCENTER:. CORPORATE SQUARE: , • TUKW WASHINGTON SECTION, ROUGH" CARPENTRY •.,..':END•OF SECTION 24646.00 06100 4 • PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07180 WATER REPELLENTS A. Section Includes: 1. Application of clear water repellent coating to the following exposed surfaces: a. Exterior: (1) Precast concrete. (2) Concrete unit masonry. B. Section Does Not Include: Application of water repellents to horizontal traffic surfaces. C. Related Sections: 1. Concrete Mansonry Units: Division 4. 2. Precast Concrete: Division 3. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Contract Closeout Submittals: 1. Warranty. 1.3. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Provide water repellent manufactured by a firm having not less than 5 years' successful experience in manufacturing water repellents of the type required. B. A company installing products of this section and whose installations have performed in a satisfactory manner under comparable conditions for a period of 5 years. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable rules of the pollution control regulatory agency having jurisdiction in the project locale regarding use of hydrocarbon solvents. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the project site in manufacturer's unopened original containers. B. Store materials in dry, well - ventilated space. 1.5 SITE CONDITIONS A. Proceed with work of this section only after substrate construction and sealant installation have been completed. B. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations regarding condition of substrate to receive water repellent, weather conditions before and during installation, and protection of the installed water - repellent coating. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Furnish warranty to provide materials and labor required to repair or replace materials which fail to perform properly due to defective materials or workmanship. This warranty shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the contract documents. 24646.00 07180 - 1 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07180 WATER REPELLENTS w....._........ ...........Mr,a.,,,rnriwm:•]ra» Est; Sh; tra.' 4t :�;k`�as.�au.,a «,...,— ..»..._. 1. Warranty period is 5 years after date of substantial completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CLEAR WATER REPELLENTS A. General: Provide products recommended by the manufacturer for compatibility and proper performance when applied to the substrates indicated to receive water repellent treatment. B. Products: The following products, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: 1. Silane -- 20 percent active ingredients: Ethanol based, water based, or solvent based polymerized silane solution: a. "Chem -Trete BSM -20 "; Huls America Inc. b. "Pentane "; L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. c. "Hydrozo Enviroseal 20 "; Hydrozo Inc. d. "Klere -Seal 920S "; Pecora Corporation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Do not proceed with application of water repellent until sealants for joints adjacent to surfaces to receive water repellent treatment have been installed and cured. 1. Water repellent work may precede sealant application only if sealant adhesion and compatibility have been tested and verified using substrate, water repellent, and sealant materials identical to those used in the work. B. Clean substrate, removing substances deleterious to penetration or performance of water repellents. C. Moisture Content: Test cleaned substrates according to manufacturer's instructions before applying water repellents. D. Protection: 1. Mask off and cover adjacent surfaces to prevent contamination by water repellents whether by spray, drift, drip, or spillage. 2. Take special care to protect aluminum, glass, and live plant or turf surfaces. 3. Should contamination occur, clean surfaces immediately, following manufacturer's instructions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written application instructions. B. Unless specifically contraindicated by manufacturer's instructions, use low pressure spray equipment to apply a heavy saturation coat to substrate followed by a second saturation coat after the manufacturer's recommended drying time has elapsed. C. Remove protective coverings from adjacent surfaces. 24646.00 END OF SECTION 07180 - 2 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 1.2 REFERENCES 1.3 DEFINITIONS 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07240 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS A. Section Includes: 1. Class PB Type A exterior insulation and finish system. 2. Provide alternate price for heavy duty fabric as shown on Drawings. B. Section Does Not Include: 1. Construction or installation of substrates. Contractor shall confirm with Owner that existing plywood siding is adequate for Exterior Insulation and Finish System. C. Related Sections: 1. Building paper: Division 6. 2. Joint sealants: Elsewhere in Division 7. 3. Flashing: Elsewhere in Division 7. 4. Siding: Section 07460. A. Uniform Building Code; International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO); 1994. B. Uniform Building Code Standards; International Conference of Building Code Officials (ICBO); 1994. A. Class PB Type A Exterior Insulation and Finish System: 1. The materials forming the outer thermal and weathertight envelope of a building, excluding doors and windows, and comprising rigid thermal insulation, protective and decorative coatings, means of fastening to the supporting substrate, and related accessories as specified herein. 2. Class PB designates a base coating of the characteristics as defined by the Exterior Insulation Manufacturers Association. 3. Type A designates that the protective coating is reinforced with a fabric mesh of the type indicated. B. System Manufacturer: The manufacturer of the base and finish coatings. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide a Class PB Type A exterior insulation and finish system, including the following materials specified in this section: 1. Thermal insulation board. 2. Materials used for attachment of insulation board to substrates. 3. Protective coatings applied sequentially to insulation board. 4. Reinforcing fabrics. 5. Rigid joint trim. 6. Accessories necessary for a complete system. B. Provide system complying with the following requirements: 1. Fire tests: a. Tests performed on foam plastics shall have been performed using not less than the maximum thickness required by the project. b. Flame spread index (ASTM E 84) of foam plastic insulation: 07240 - 1 1.5 SUBMITTALS 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07240 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS 75, maximum. c. Smoke - developed index (ASTM E 84) of foam plastic insulation: 450, maximum. d. Insulation board and coatings and facings (each tested separately): (1) Flame spread index (ASTM E 84): 25, maximum. (2) Smoke developed index (ASTM E 84): 450, maximum. e. Specifically approved for use by the authorities having jurisdiction under paragraph 2602 of the Uniform Building Code. f. For those portions of the system applied to walls having a fire - resistive rating, system shall have been tested and shall have met the conditions of acceptance of Uniform Building Code Standard No. 7 -1. g. Potential heat of building materials (Uniform Building Code Standard No. 26 -1): 6000 Btu per square foot, maximum. h. Uniform Building Code Standard No. 26 -4: Wall system shall meet acceptance criteria. i. Systems not complying with one or more of the above requirements shall have been specifically approved for use by the authorities having jurisdiction under paragraph 1713(f) of the Uniform Building Code. C. Attachment Requirements: 1. Where indicated, secure insulation board to substrate using mechanical attachment. ....,,..., u.... or. wvegnnu_+. m1ma!r ue! �??,n?tYh�1'.ttR9actM.ea.,s�rnc t4,...,.— ...... A. Product Data: 1. Product data for each material specified. 2. Manufacturer's detailed storage, mixing, and installation instructions. 3. International Conference of Building Officials Evaluation Report demonstrating acceptance of system. a. Submit reports issued by code organization which are acceptable to governing authorities and which demonstrate compliance with the referenced building code. b. Reports submitted shall have been issued within the time period stated thereon for reevaluation or shall be accompanied by the code organization's current reapproval listing. 4. Independent laboratory test reports or certificates demonstrating compliance with specified requirements. 5. Warranty draft. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Details of mechanical attachment system, including spacing of fasteners. 2. Details of each edge and joint condition, including adjacent construction. C. Certificates Signed by Manufacturer: 1. Submit to Owner. 2. Installers are approved by system manufacturer for installation of the system. 3. Substrates indicated are approved for system. 4. These specifications and the details shown on the drawings conform to manufacturer's recommendations. D. Reports: 1. Installer's report of inspection of substrate and conditions 07240 - 2 �.•.• ......; affecting work. 2. Manufacturer's representative's inspection report. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07240 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS A. Manufacturer's representative shall visit the site to verify suitability of substrate preparation and to verify acceptability of system installation methods and workmanship. 1. Required visits: a. At the beginning of system installation. b. Twice during installation. c. Upon completion of the work. B. Installer's Qualifications: 1. Approved by system manufacturer. 2. Installers shall have at least 10 years' successful experience in applications similar to those required for the project. C. Manufacturer's Requirements: 1. System manufacturer shall certify that the system is suitable for use with substrates indicated herein and on the drawings. 2. System manufacturer shall review and certify that this specification and the details shown on the drawings conform to the manufacturer's recommendations. D. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Provide a system that conforms to the fire and code requirements enumerated under the paragraph titled "System Description" and the labeling requirements enumerated under the paragraph titled "Delivery, Storage, and Handling." E. Mock -up for First Building: 1. Construct mock -up of each system configuration and texture. Include typical edge, joint, sealant, and openings conditions. 2. Notify the Owner before constructing mock -ups. 3. Do not install system on project without the Owner's approval of mock -up. 4. Remove and dispose of mock -ups with the consent of the Owner only after substantial completion of work of this section is achieved. F. Preinstallation Conference: 1. Conduct conference at project site for purposes of a final review of the contract documents, manufacturer's instructions, and materials to be used. 2. The Contractor, the installer, the system manufacturer's representative, other trades as deemed appropriate by the Contractor, and the Owner shall be present. 3. Examine actual conditions of substrates to determine whether they are satisfactory for installation of system. 4. Examine the contract documents relating to system and compare with system manufacturer's current printed recommendations. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to project site in manufacturer's original packaging. 1. Materials shall bear manufacturer's name, brand name, description of contents, and identifying markings in the form required by this specification. Materials not so labeled will be rejected and shall be immediately removed from the site. a. Foam plastic insulation shall be listed by an independent testing agency acceptable to the authorities having 24646.00 07240 - 3 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07240 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS a.a.yranw�.rvr.vs AMfM otOn jurisdiction. b. Edge or face of each piece of insulation board shall bear the following identifying markings: (1) Inspection agency name. (2) Product for which the insulation is listed. (3) Identification of insulation manufacturer. (4) Flame spread and smoke - developed indexes. B. Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Storage area: Clean, dry, well - ventilated; protected from sunlight and excessive heat. 2. Coating materials susceptible to frost damage: Store above 40 degrees F. 3. Insulation board: a. Do not expose to flame or other ignition source. b. Cover with opaque, light - colored tarps to shield from sunlight when exposed for extended periods. c. Do not expose to sunlight for more than 5 days before covering with base coat. d. Do not expose to temperatures exceeding 165 degrees F. e. Store flat and at least 8 inches off the ground. A. Minimum Temperature of Ambient Air and Substrates: 40 degrees F or above and steady or rising at time of installation and curing of coating materials and for at least 24 hours thereafter. B. Hot - Weather Limits: As recommended by system manufacturer and depending upon air temperature, relative humidity, wind speed, and exposure to sun. C. Do not install coatings when conditions are outside of specified limits. D. Partially completed work or work not fully cured that is exposed to the elements in excess of manufacturer's recommendations may be rejected. 1.9 WARRANTY A. System manufacturer's standard 5 -year labor and material warranty. B. This warranty shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the contract documents. C. Contractor's Warranty Period: 5 years from the date of substantial completion. D. Provide alternate bid for manufacturer's 10 -year labor and material warranty. 1.10 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Prior to substantial completion, deliver the following materials to the location designated by the Owner: 1. 25 anchors of each type used. 2. 50 square feet of each type of reinforcing mesh. 3. One unopened pail of each system coating component used on the project. 24646.00 07240 - 4 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide products complying with requirements of the contract documents and made by one of the following: 1. Dryvit Systems, Inc. 2. Senergy, Inc. B. Single- Source Responsibility: 1. Provide only materials that are manufactured by or specifically approved by system manufacturer for use in specified system. 2. When required by system manufacturer, insulation board fabricated (by other than system manufacturer) for use with this system shall be labeled as required by system manufacturer. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Mechanical Attachment Materials: 1. Manufacturer's standard system. 2. Fasteners: Permanent, corrosion - resistant fasteners capable of resisting design loads. a. Length as necessary to accommodate thickness of insulation and to provide required embedment in substrate. B. Insulation Board: 1. Expanded polystyrene board complying with ASTM C 578, Type I and with system manufacturer's additional requirements. 2. Thickness as shown on drawings. C. Reinforcing Fabric: 1. Alkali- resistant glass -fiber fabric manufactured especially for use in exterior insulation and 2. Intermediate duty fabric up to 3. Standard duty above first revea 4. Alternate Number 1: Heavy Duty Mesh," heavy duty glass fabric D. Base 1. 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07240 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS finish system. first reveal. 1. Reinforcing Fabric: Dryvit "Panzer reinforcing. Coat: Acrylic -based material, factory -mixed with sand and alkali- resistant glass fibers, mixed on site with portland cement. E. Finish Coat: 1. Factory- mixed, textured, integrally colored finish coating. 2. Acrylic -based material. 3. Colors: a. "EIFS -1 ": Match Dryvit "449 Buckskin SWS -SPF7- 0109 ". b. "EIFS -2 ": Match Dryvit "440 Clover SWS -SPF6- 3387 ". c. "EIFS -3 ": Match Dryvit "452 Stormy Night SWS -SPF7- 0093 ". 4. Texture: a. Sandpebble Fine. F. Trim Accessories: As supplied by system manufacturer. 1. Plastic Components as shown on Drawings. 2. Custom: As shown on Drawings. 3. Vents: As shown on Drawings. G. Miscellaneous Materials: Provide primers, intermediate coatings, accessories, etc., not otherwise specified herein if recommended by system manufacturer as necessary for a complete installation. 07240 - 5 2.3 MIXING PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 3.3 INSULATION BOARD 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07240 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS A. Use mechanical attachment over the following substrates: 1. Existing sheathing or siding. B. Mechanical Attachment: 1. Shim where necessary due to unevenness of substrate level, plumb, planar, finished surface. 2. Do not over -drive fasteners. 3. Sheathing substrates: a. Drive fasteners squarely into framing members required embedment. b. Fasteners driven into sheathing only will not and shall be removed. 07240 - 6 A. Mix materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using only manufacturer - approved materials in the instructed quantities. Use only freshly mixed materials. Apply materials within the time prescribed by the manufacturer and without retempering, unless specifically approved. A. Examine substrates with installer and manufacturer's representative present. B. Determine whether or not substrate conditions are acceptable. C. Obtain approval of substrates by manufacturer's representative. D. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding with installation of system. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: 1. Protect adjacent surfaces from contamination during application of coatings. 2. Schedule flashing and system installation as necessary to produce an integrated, water -tight envelope. 3. Substrates shall be free of water, moisture, and frost. 4. Nail any loose existing siding to achieve firm substrate. to achieve a , achieving be accepted C. Insulation Boards: 1. Arrange layout of insulation joints such that joints do not coincide with sheathing joints. 2. Form tightly butted, flush surfaced joints between adjacent boards and adjacent courses. Fill any gaps with precisely fitted insulation. Do not use adhesive to secure filler pieces. 3. Rasp joints where necessary to produce a smooth, even, flush surface. 4. Precisely fit insulation at openings and edges. Ensure that edge of insulation conforms to required edge details. 5. Interrupt insulation and form joints where indicated. 6. Construct joints as required for sealant application. a. Width of gap as needed for application of sealant after encapsulation of board edges with base coat, reinforcing ",.....: • 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07240 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS fabric, and finish coat. b. Apply base coat, reinforcing fabric, and finish coat to exposed edges of insulation board including those forming substrates of sealed joints. Return base coat into joints. 3.4. COATINGS - GENERAL A. Complete each coating in sections by working from joint to joint, from edge to edge, from corner to corner, or according to other such divisions in the surface. B. Work materials keeping a wet edge. 1 C. Complete each application before initial set occurs. D. Allow each coating to cure before proceeding with subsequent operations. 1 E. Remove excess coatings from joint trim while still wet. F. Protect each coating from damage and excessive heat, cold, water, and moisture while curing. G. Install miscellaneous profiles where shown on drawings and where recommended by system manufacturer. 3.5 BASE COAT A. Apply a uniform thickness of base coat to insulation. 1. Thickness within system manufacturer's recommended minimum and maximum. B. Reinforcing Fabric: 1. Fully embed reinforcing fabrics in base coat while still plastic in order to produce smooth, evenly- coated installation. After embedment, pattern of fabric shall not be visible. 2. Comply with system manufacturer's requirements for lapping or 1 wrapping fabric edges and for reinforcement at corners, edges, and joints. 3.6 FINISH COAT A. Apply finish coat; minimum 1/8 -inch thickness, maximum thickness as recommended by manufacture. B. Color and texture shall match approved mock -up. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean finished surfaces in a timely manner if required in order to prevent permanent discoloration. B. If discoloration or contamination occurs and cannot be removed, or if system suffers damage prior to substantial completion, then restore, or remove and replace, affected portions (reworking entire planar surfaces as necessary to conceal reworked area), using manufacturer's recommended restoration coatings or new materials meeting the requirements of this specification, as acceptable to the Owner. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protection of Work in Progress: 07240 - 7 • SOUTHCENTER,CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON ' SECTION 07240 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS , 1. Provide temporary covering and other protection as necessary to ' • prevent, spattering of materials on other work. ,,Provide temporary protection for tops of walls and other exposed locations until permanent construction is installed. 3 . Protect system and substrates from inclement weather during installation. Prevent infiltration of moisture behind system and deterioration of substrates. 4. -Provide temporary protection of incomplete work at the end of each working day and whenever work is not in progress. B. Remove temporary coverings when no longer needed. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions until substantial ' completion. 24646.00 END OF SECTION 07240 - 8 • 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07250 SPRAYED -ON FIREPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Fireproofing of structural steel at elevator shaft. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Fireproofing Shop Drawings: Submit fireproofing shop drawings to the Owner for preliminary review; after Owner's review, submit shop drawings to the Building Department for their approval prior to fireproofing application. 1. Shop drawings must conform to the Building Department requirements, identifying primary and secondary framing members. 2. Shop drawings must include the type of fireproofing material, number of ICBO evaluation report or UL Design number, hourly ratings, and a clear method for identifying thicknesses and densities required for designated primary and secondary members and floor and roof assemblies (ie. color code or other acceptable method). 3. Submit a minimum of three (3) complete sets of fireproofing shop drawings to Building Department for approval. 4. After receiving Building Department approval, submit two (2) copies of approved fireproofing shop drawings to Owner for record purposes. B. Evidence of Acceptable Testing: Submit for each fire - resistance rated assembly to be constructed. Listing of the assembly to be used in the current edition of the Underwriters Laboratories Inc. "Fire Resistance Directory" will be considered evidence of acceptable testing. In lieu of such a directory listing, official printed notification from Underwriters Laboratories Inc., stating that the assembly in question has been tested and approved, will also be considered evidence of acceptable testing. C. Product Data: Submit complete product and system description, including installation instructions and limitations on use. D. Test Reports: Submit results of field quality control tests indicated in Part 3 of this section. E. Certificate of Acceptability of Substrates: Submit fireproofing manufacturer's certification that substrates to receive fireproofing are acceptable to fireproofing manufacturer. Where fireproofing manufacturer recommends use of a bonding agent to ensure adequate bond for fireproofing, follow manufacturer's instructions. F. Certificate of Compliance with Asbestos Requirements: Submit fireproofing manufacturer's certification of compliance with all asbestos requirements specified under "Quality Assurance." A. Asbestos and Mineral Wool Limitations: Comply with all current federal, state, and local regulations. 07250 - 1 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrates are fireproofing. B. Verify that items required to properly fastened. 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07250 SPRAYED -ON FIREPROOFING A. Store products in dry, protected area in manufacturer's original shipping containers bearing labels which include UL fire resistance ratings, manufacturer's name, product name, date of manufacture, and shelf life instructions where required. B. Do not use products beyond manufacturer's indicated shelf life. A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Minimum ambient and substrate temperatures for 24 hours immediately preceding, during, and for 24 hours after fireproofing installation: 40 degrees F. 2. Provide adequate air circulation to ensure proper curing of fireproofing materials. A. Coordinate work of this section with other work as required to ensure that installed materials are not damaged during construction period and that fire resistance ratings are not compromised by work of other trades. B. Schedule fireproofing installation sufficiently in advance of other work to permit field quality control testing and any required corrective procedures to be completed before construction which might interfere with these operations is started. C. Do not begin to install fireproofing on underside of metal roof decking until roofing installation is finished; do not allow traffic on roof during fireproofing installation and drying period. A. Sprayed Cementitious Fireproofing: Provide one of the following: 1. "Zonolite Mk VI "; W.R. Grace & Co. 2. "Cafco 300 "; Isolatek International. B. Accessory Products: Provide products which strictly comply with UL requirements for fire resistance rated assemblies. in satisfactory condition to receive penetrate fireproofing are in place and C. Perform fireproofing manufacturer's recommended test procedures wherever substances which might affect adhesion of fireproofing are suspected on substrates. 07250 - 2 3.2 PREPARATION 3.5 CLEANING 24646.00 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07250 SPRAYED -ON FIREPROOFING D. Notify the Owner in writing of any substrate conditions requiring correction by other than normal cleaning methods, prior to installation of fireproofing. E. Do not begin work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected; commencement of fireproofing installation indicates acceptance of conditions. A. Provide drop cloths, masking, or other suitable coverings for materials not to receive fireproofing. B. Take necessary precautions to protect workmen, the public, and the environment during installation. C. Prepare substrates as required to result in permanent bonding of fireproofing material. Strictly follow fireproofing manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and preparation of substrates. D. Primed Steel: Where required by fireproofing manufacturer for proper bond, apply fireproofing manufacturer's recommended bonding agent /substrate primer. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in strict accordance with UL (Underwriters Laboratories Inc.) "Fire Resistance Directory" instructions for assemblies indicated and with fireproofing manufacturer's instructions. B. Install fireproofing in a manner which will maximize adhesion between fireproofing and substrate and continuity of fire - resistive protection; use a single course of fireproofing unless otherwise recommended by fireproofing manufacturer. C. Finish: As applied, no additional finishing. A. The Owner will engage and pay an independent testing agency to conduct field inspection and testing to determine whether actual thicknesses and densities meet fire rating requirements. B. Measure thickness and density in accordance with ASTM E 605 procedures. C. Test each fireproofed structural member within one typical structural bay. For each distinct test area, bay must be selected at random. D. Testing agency shall submit written report to the Contractor and the Owner indicating results of field quality control procedures. E. The Contractor shall pay for further testing required to prove acceptability of installation. F. Patch test areas as necessary to restore integrity of fireproofing. A. Completely remove fireproofing from surfaces not designated to receive fireproofing while material is still wet and before it has begun to set. 07250 - 3 A. Follow instructions of fireproofing manufacturer to prevent damage to • Patch damaged fireproofing END OF SECTION , 1 . .SOUTHCENTER , CORPORATE: SQUARE' TUKWILA; WASHINGTON SECTION 07250'.' SPRAYED-ON FIREPROOFING 24646.00 07250 - 4 _ PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07275 FIRESTOPPING A. Section Includes: 1. Penetration Firestopping: Firestopping of all penetrations through fire barriers, including: a. Voids around: (1) Pipes. (2) Conduit. b. Other openings, as required by authorities having jurisdiction. c. Other openings indicated. 2. Gap Firestopping: Firestopping (safing) of slots and gaps between fire barriers, including: a. Gaps between top of fire -rated partitions and underside of structure above. B. Work Not Included: Repairing penetrations made in error and repairing penetrations which are too large to be sealed by the methods indicated; these are to be repaired using the original material of the construction. C. Products Furnished but Not Installed: 1. Sleeves which are an integral part of the firestopping assembly but which must be set by installer of other construction. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Fire Barrier: Any wall, floor, ceiling, or roof which is indicated as having a fire - resistance rating. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Preinstallation Inspection Report: Identify penetrations which need to be repaired using the original material of the assembly. B. Schedule of Firestopping: Complete list, for approval, of penetrations to be sealed, indicating location, fire rating of penetrated assembly, identification of penetration seal to be used, fire rating of penetration seal, and evidence of acceptable testing. C. Maintenance Data: Include detailed instructions for repair and for modification due to changes in penetrating items. D. Final inspection report(s). E. Project Record Documents: Drawings showing locations of all fire barriers, the actual penetrations through them, and the manner in which they have been sealed; cross - referenced to maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Requirements: Testing shall have been conducted or witnessed by an independent testing agency acceptable to governing authorities. 1. Test methods: UBC Standard No. 7 -1; tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E 814 will be acceptable. 2. Conduct tests with a measurably higher pressure inside the chamber than outside. 24646.00 07275 - 1 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07275 FIRESTOPPING 3. The listing of the assembly to be used in the current edition of one of the following classification guides will be considered evidence of acceptable testing: a. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. "Fire Resistance Directory." b. Warnock Hersey "Certification Listings." 4. A current evaluation report by one of the following will be considered evidence of acceptable testing: a. National Evaluation Service ( "NES "). «... o .+... � •» «,..r.aa�nm:'x''?nC�R�YdMfi4i+ Lift" d�: ar' � «.,....... A. Coordinate delivery of products to minimize storage time at site. B. Deliver products to project site in original unopened containers bearing the name of the manufacturer, product name, type, and testing agency's identification mark. C. Store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. A. Coordination Meeting: Prior to the start of work which involves cutting penetrations, conduct a meeting with installers of such work to identify fire barriers and required configurations of penetrations and to discuss the proper procedures and time schedule for cutting, patching, and sealing penetrations in such assemblies, with emphasis on avoiding unnecessary cutting and patching. A. Perform firestopping work after completion of work which penetrates fire barriers, but prior to covering up or eliminating access to the penetration. Coordinate with installers of such other work. A. Manufacturers: 1. Products made by the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Hilti, Inc. b. International Protective Coatings Corporation. c. Hevi- Duty /Nelson. d. 3M Ceramic Materials Department. e. Specified Technologies, Inc. f. Rectorseal (Metacaulk). g. Tremco. B. Penetration Firestopping Materials: Provide penetration seal assemblies whose fire - resistance ratings have been determined by testing in the configurations required and which have fire - resistance ratings at least as high as that of the fire -rated assembly in which they are to be installed. 1. It is the Contractor's responsibility to determine the types of penetrations to be sealed and to select appropriate firestopping assemblies. 07275 - 2 2. If a tested assembly is not available for a particular penetration configuration, modify the penetration configuration to suit available assemblies; do not modify assembly configuration except as specifically stated in the test report or as approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 3. Provide products which: a. Allow normal expansion and contraction movement of the penetrating item without failure of the penetration seal. b. Emit no hazardous, combustible, or irritating by- products during installation or curing period. c. Do not require special tools for installation. d. Provide air -tight and smoke -tight seal. C. Labels: Red, permanent marking using the words "Fire -Rated Assembly - Do not disturb - See maintenance instructions" and the testing agency designation, or equivalent as approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 1. For marking firestopping assemblies, use self - adhesive tape or wired -on labels. 2. For marking fire barriers themselves, use letters at least 2 inches high. 3. Include installer's company name and telephone number on labels. 2.2 GAP FIRESTOPPING SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07275 FIRESTOPPING A. Safing Insulation: Semi -rigid mineral fiber; minimum 6 pcf density. 1. Acceptable product: USG "Thermafiber Safing." 2. Provide galvanized steel retaining clips for curtainwall safing, or sheet metal closures as required and /or detailed. 3. Seal edges and joints in foil face with USG "Thermafiber Smoke Seal" or approved. 4. Metal deck flutes over fire walls: Preformed silicone rubber foam units, friction fit in flut opening, 15/16 -inch thick; Dow Corning "Q- Stop" or approved. B. Cementitious Seal: Spray or trowel applied cementitious fireproofing. 1. Acceptable product: W.R. Grace & Co. "Monokote MK -6." C. Substitutions: Provide assemblies whose fire - resistance ratings have been determined by testing in the configurations required and which have fire - resistance ratings at least as high as that of the fire -rated assembly in which they are to be installed. 1. Partition head firestopping: a. Coordinate configuration requirements with work of Gypsum Drywall Section in Division 9. b. Provide assembly which will accommodate plus and minus 1/2 inch deflection of structure above without reduction of firestopping capability. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Preinstallation Inspection: Inspect all fire barriers for penetrations of any type; mark or otherwise identify all penetrations indicating action required: 1) repair; or 2) firestopping. 1. Conduct inspection prior to covering up or enclosing walls or ceilings. 2. Submit a report detailing findings of inspection to the Owner. 24646.00 07275 - 3 B. If the configuration of a particular penetration does not conform to the configuration necessary for the required firestopping assembly, notify the installer of the penetration for modification of the configuration to suit the assembly; do not use the firestopping assembly in other configurations except as specifically stated in the test report or as approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Installation Meeting: Prior to start of work, conduct a meeting to verify that the installation instructions and procedures required are understood by installers. 1. The following shall attend this meeting: a. General Contractor. b. Installers of firestopping. c. Firestopping manufacturers' representatives. d. ' Representative of authority having jurisdiction B. Prepare penetrations in accordance with the material manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07275 FIRESTOPPING 3.4 PERMANENT IDENTIFICATION OF PENETRATIONS A. Install firestopping materials in exact accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the conditions of the testing; provide all accessory materials required. B. Remove combustible forming materials, unless they are a required component of the tested assembly. A. Near fire barriers, mark each exposed penetration with label identifying it as a fire - stopped assembly. B. Mark each fire barrier above lay -in ceilings with words identifying it as a fire barrier at intervals required by authorities having jurisdiction, but not less than 20 feet. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect completed installations for completeness and correct installation. 1. If installed work is to be covered in completed work, inspect prior to covering. 2. Submit report of inspection to the Owner. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean up excess material adjacent to penetrations promptly; use methods and materials approved by the manufacturers of the penetration seals and of surfaces to be cleaned. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect installed work during curing period. B. Protect installed work from damage from construction operations using substantial barriers if necessary. 24646.00 07275 - 4 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07275 FIRESTOPPING Repair damaged materials in accordance with manufacturer's 24646.00 07275 - 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plywood panel siding. B. Related Sections: 1. Rough carpentry: Division 6. 2. Flashing: Elsewhere in Division 7. 3. Sealants: Elsewhere in Division 7. 4. Painting: Division 9. 1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Labeling: Each piece of wood or wood product siding shall bear appropriate grade marks evidencing compliance with specified standards. Products not so labeled shall be removed from the site. B. Storage and Protection: 1. Protect wood products against moisture and dimensional changes. Support stacks at several uniformly spaced points to prevent deformation. Store stacks raised above ground. Cover to protect from rain and snow. Select and arrange cover to allow air circulation under and all around stacks to prevent condensation. Maintain and restore displaced coverings. Remove from the site any wood products that have been subjected to moisture or that do not comply with the specified moisture requirements. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Substrates: 1. Schedule and install wall penetrations before installing siding. 2. Do not apply siding over wet or moist substrates. Apply siding only to completely dry substrates. 1.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Painting and Other Coatings: 1. Plywood panel siding: Schedule first coat of finish specified elsewhere to be applied within 2 weeks of siding installation and complete finishing as soon as practicable thereafter. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLYWOOD PANEL SIDING 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07460 SIDING 07460 - 1 A. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: 1. Georgia- Pacific Corporation. B. Materials: 1. Face veneer: Douglas fir. 2. Pattern: T1 -11. 3. Groove spacing: Match exisiting. 4. Panel thickness exclusive of grooving: 5/8 inch, minimum. 5. Provide greater panel thickness if required to meet specified span rating. 6. Span rating: 16 inches on center. 7. Long edges: 3/8 -inch shiplapped. C. Fasteners: 1. Materials: a. Hot -dip galvanized siding or casing nails. 2. Length and spacing as indicated. 2.2 SEALANTS A. Specified elsewhere. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that required framing is installed and complete, including blocking and miscellaneous members as required by siding pattern, spacing, and joining. 3.2 FIELD PRIME - PAINTING OF WOOD AND WOOD PRODUCT SIDING EDGES A. Panel Products: Prior to installation, seal panel edges including both factory edges and field cut edges using products specified elsewhere. B. Field finishing of siding is specified elsewhere. 3.3 PLYWOOD PANEL SIDING INSTALLATION 3.4 SEALANTS 3.5 CLEANING A. Remove scraps and debris from the site on a regular and frequent basis. Do not allow to accumulate. 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07460 SIDING END OF SECTION 07460 - 2 A. General: 1. Install panels such that edges occur over framing or solid blocking,. 2. At panel edges and ends: 1/8 -inch space unless otherwise recommended by panel manufacturer. 3. Install panels to avoid built -in compression stress and to allow for framing shrinkage due to drying. B. Standard Nailing: Observe the following nailing except where otherwise required: 1. Maximum nail spacing on center: 6 inches at panel edges and 12 inches at intermediate supports. 2. Siding 1/2 inch thick or less: a. Applied direct to studs: 6d nails. A. Panel Siding: Apply sealant to framing before installing panel or apply bead along in -place panel before installing subsequent panel. Do not use exposed beads of sealant except where concealed application is not possible. PART 1 - GENERAL 1:1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. New roof to match existing. 2. Roof insulation. 3. Roof accessories. B Related Sections: 1. Flashing and sheet metal (weather protection for base flashings): Section 07600. 2. Roof drains: Division 15. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit technical product information, installation instructions, and recommendations for each type of roofing material. Furnish additional information as necessary to demonstrate products comply with project criteria. B. Shop Drawings: Submit for prefabricated curbs. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS of the contract and Division 1: a. Firestone Building Products Company. b. GAF Building Materials Corporation. c. Performance Roofing, Inc. ( "Derbigum "). d. Siplast, Inc. 2.2 SHEET MATERIALS A. Fiberglass Roofing Base Sheet: Nominal 25 pound per roofing square asphalt coated fiberglass sheet meeting the requirements of ASTM D 4601, Type II 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07525 BUILT -UP ROOFING REPAIRS 07525 - 1 B. Modified Bituminous Ply Sheet, Smooth Surface: Preformed sheets of reinforced rubberized asphalt for application using applied heat (torch) . 1. Acceptable product: "Firestone APP 160 "; Firestone. 2. Minimum thickness: 4mm (0.160 inch). 3. Reinforcement: Polyester or polyester and fiberglass. 2.3 INSULATION SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07525 BUILT -UP ROOFING REPAIRS A. System Requirements: 1. Match type and thickness of existing insulation. 2. Flame spread: 75 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 3. Provide insulation overlay for plastic foam insulation (not required for non - plastic insulations B. Insulation Overlay: 1. Perlite board, 3/4 inch thick: ASTM C 728. 2. Facers: Manufacturer's standard. C. Tapered Insulation System: Provide in areas where structure does not slope to drain. 1. Minimum slope: 1/4 inch per foot. 2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Roofing Bitumen: ASTM D 312, Type III; roofing asphalt. B. Primer: Cutback asphalt; ASTM D 41. C. Aluminum Roof Coating: Karnak " #97AF Fibrated Aluminum Roof Coating" or approved product meeting the requirements of ASTM D 2824, Type III (asbestos- free). E. Sealant: One - component urethane, nonsag, compatible with membrane and flashing materials. F. Nailers and Blocking: Fabricate from treated wood as specified in Division 6 section on rough carpentry. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas where roofing is to be installed. Correct substrate surfaces which are unacceptable to the installer, and are not in agreement with manufacturer's installation instructions, before starting roofing application. 3.2 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION A. General: Remove trash, debris, grease, oil, water, and contaminants from roof deck surface. 24646.00 07525 - 2 D. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, fluoropolymer- coated steel, or nonferrous metal. 1. Size, length, and type recommended by manufacturer as suitable for material to be fastened, substrate, and that will comply with requirements of governing authorities and listing agencies. SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07525 BUILT -UP ROOFING REPAIRS B. At Concrete Deck: Apply one coat of asphalt primer; coverage not less than 300 s.f per gallon. C. Install blocking, nailers, cants, reglets, and similar attachment devices as indicated or required. 3.3 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Install insulation units in continuous application (full mopping) of roofing bitumen or insulation adhesive. B. Install thermal insulation with end joints staggered and joints of upper layer staggered in both directions from joints of layer below. C. Install tapered insulation system in accordance with approved layout drawings to ensure positive slope to drains. D. Cover plastic foam insulation with a layer of insulation overlay board in continuous application (full mopping) of roofing bitumen or insulation adhesive. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Prevent roofing materials from damaging or spilling on adjacent construction. Replace adjacent materials damaged by roofing system installation. B. Interruptions of Roofing Work: 1. Install roofing plies, asphalt, and other roofing materials in a way to prevent roofing plies from being left exposed during precipitation or overnight. C. Torch Application: Heat underside of torch - applied roofing sheets sufficiently to ensure an even layer of fluid bitumen at point of contact with substrate. 1. Press mating surfaces together using minimum 20 -pound roller while bitumen is fluid. 2. Seams: Bitumen must flow a minimum of 1/4 inch out from seam edges. 3. Precautions: Exercise care when using torches to avoid setting fire to roofing and adjacent materials. Do not heat roofing sheets to the point of excessive smoke generation or "melt- through." Remove and replace roofing that shows evidence of excessive heating. D. Installation of Roofing Sheets: 1. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for installation to ensure proper installation of sheet without irregularities such as fishmouths or wrinkles. 2. Place and press sheets during installation to ensure proper adhesion to substrate and adjacent roofing sheet. 3. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations to ensure that joints are solidly adhered and weathertight. 3.5 ROOF MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with roofing manufacturer's current application instructions. B. Base Ply Installation: Install base ply in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and as follows: 24646.00 07525 - 3 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07525 BUILT -UP ROOFING REPAIRS 1. Adhered base ply: Install in full mopping of liquid asphalt. Install in the following locations: a. Existing roof membrane. b. New or existing roof insulation. C. Roofing Plies: 1. New roofing (over insulation and base sheet): Install two layers of smooth surface modified bituminous roofing ply sheet. Lap plies 19 inches; stagger end joints. 2. Roof repair (over existing membrane and new base sheet): Install one layer of smooth surface modified bituminous roofing sheet. 3.6 FLASHING AND STRIPPING A. Fasten edge of membrane at terminations to receive base fleshings in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. If torch -on method of application is used, take special precautions to avoid setting fire to cants, nailers, or insulation. B. Provide two -ply smooth surface modified bituminous fleshings. Apply using methods recommended by modified bituminous sheet roofing manufacturer. 1. Extend all plies of fleshings at terminations and curbs to height indicated, but to not less than 4 inches above top of cant or to top of curb less than 6 inches high. 2. Nail flashings at 8 inches on center, approximately 1 inch from top edge. 3. Seal top edge of flashing at terminations and curbs with sealant. C. Sheet Metal Work: Specified in Section 07600. Provide weather protection for edges of roofing membrane and base fleshings. D. Stripping: Do not strip metal items heavier than 24 gage sheet steel, 16 -oz copper or 0.040 -inch aluminum. Do not strip metal items greater than 10 feet in length. 1. Set metal flange in a full bed of roofing cement. Prime metal surface to receive stripping. 2. Install stripping as specified for fleshings above, except for nailing requirements. a. Extend modified bituminous stripping a minimum of 6 inches onto roof membrane. E. Existing Roof Membrane: Remove existing coating from surface and join to new membrane. Extend each roofing ply 6 inches beyond previous ply. (Minimum lap of new membrane over old membrane: 18 inches.) F. Coating: Apply fibrated aluminum roof coating to all membrane surfaces, flashing and stripping. Apply coating at manufacturer's recommended rate to obtain full coverage but not less than 2 gallons per roofing square (100 s.f.). G. Install other accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NRCA Construction Details as applicable. 07525 - 4 3.7: CLEANING SOUTHCENTER SQUARE TUKWILA,' WASHINGTON: • SECTIOWV7525 HUILT-UPROOFING REPAIRS': A'. Remove bituminous markings and roof coating from finished surfaces. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by asphalt or any other source of soiling caused by work of this section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice and conform to their instructions. END OF SECTION 24646.00 07525 - 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sheet metal flashing and trim and gu 2. Fasteners and attachment devices. 3. Coatings and slip sheets to isolate materials. B. Wood blocking, nailers, edge strips, and battens are not specified in this section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Detailed drawings clearly indicating component profiles, joints, transitions, fastening methods, and relationship of flashing materials to adjacent construction. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: A company familiar with installing products included in this section and which has completed at least 20 installations similar in scope to work included in this section. B. Quality Standard: 1. Fabricate and install sheet metal work in accordance with Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual," unless specifically indicated otherwise. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Prefinished Galvanized Steel Sheet: Coil coated, commercial quality steel sheet, ASTM A 526 or ASTM A 527, G90 hot -dip galvanized. 1. Minimum thickness: 24 gage (0.0239 inch), unless indicated otherwise. 2. Finish: 70 percent "Kynar 500" or "Hylar 5000" resin finish over epoxy primer; minimum system thickness 1.0 mil. Provide manufacturer's standard prime coat on underside. a. Color: Selected by Owner, after contract award, from manufacturer's standard color selection. 3. Provide strippable plastic protective film on prefinished surface. 2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Corrosion - resistant metal of same material as the material being fastened, or other material recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. Match finish and color of exposed fastener heads to finish and color of sheet material being fastened. B. Sealant: As specified in Division 7. 1. Use noncuring type for concealed joints. 2. Use nonsag elastomeric type for exposed joints. C. Joint Adhesive: Two - component noncorrosive epoxy adhesive, recommended by metal manufacturer for sealing of nonmoving joints. 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07600 - 1 tters. sheet metal from dissimilar 2.3 FABRICATION - GENERAL SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL A. Form sheet metal to match profiles indicated, substantially free from oil - canning, fish - mouths, and other defects. B. Comply with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for applications indicated. C. Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal work exceeding 15 feet running length. 1. Flashing and trim: Provide movement joints at maximum spacing of 10 feet; no joints allowed within 2 feet of corner or intersection. D. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions wherever possible. 1. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of sheet metal exposed to public view. E. Form a 1/2 -inch hem on underside of exposed edges. F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as sheet metal component being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. 1. Gage: As recommended by SMACNA or metal manufacturer for application, but in no case less than gage of metal being secured. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which products of this section are to be installed and verify that work may properly commence. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been fully resolved. 1. Verify that nailers, blocking, and other attachment provisions for sheet metal work are properly located and securely fastened to resist effects of wind and thermal stresses. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. B. Isolate dissimilar metals by means of an approved paint coating, adhered polyethylene sheet, or other means approved by the Owner. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with sheet metal manufacturer's installation methods and recommendations in the SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." B. Sealed Joints: Form minimum 1 -inch hooked joints and embed flange into sealant or adhesive. Form metal to completely conceal sealant or adhesive. 1. Use joint adhesive for nonmoving joints specified not to be soldered. 2. Moving joints: When ambient temperature is moderate (40 -70 degrees F) at time of installation, set joined members for 50 percent movement either way. Adjust setting position of joined members proportionally for temperatures above 70 degrees F. Do 24646.00 07600 - 2 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET'METAL. not install sealant at temperatures below :40.degrees F::_Referto section on sealants, elsewhere in Division 7 for handling installation requirements. for.joint, sealers CLEANING AND PROTECTION Remove protective film from prefinished sheet metal immediately: after installation. Repair or replace work which is damaged or defaced, as directed by the Owner. 1. Refinish marred and abraded areas of prefinished sheet using finish manufacturer's recommended methods and materials. Replace units which, in the opinion of the Owner, cannot satisfactorily be refinished in place. Protect sheet metal work as recommended by the installer so that completed work will be clean, secured, and without damage at substantial completion. END OF SECTION 24646.00 07600 - 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07820 TRANSLUCENT PANEL SKYLIGHTS A. Section Includes: 1. Aluminum framing and trim. 2. Translucent composite panels. 3. Flashings. 4. Anchors, fasteners, shims, and inserts as required to attach to structure. B. Related Sections: 1. Structural Steel: Division 5. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Structural Requirements: Design system to safely withstand wind load, dead load and live loads indicated on the drawings (refer to Structural General Notes). 1. Deflection of Structure: Allow for deflection of structural members to which system is anchored. B. Environmental Requirements: 1. Provide for expansion and contraction of system components due to ambient temperature and solar heat gain. Accommodate movement due to temperature change without buckling, undue stress on structural elements, reduction of performance, or other damaging effects. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data showing materials, fabrication, installation instructions and recommendations, and maintenance and reglazing instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Show elevations, dimensions, shapes of members, details of composite members, details of interface with structure, reinforcement, expansion provisions, method and location of attachment to structural system, and glazing materials and methods. C. Samples: 1. Samples for Verification of Panel Color(s): Submit fabricated panels minimum 18 by 24 inches with faces as specified. 2. Samples for Verification of Coated Finishes: For each color, submit 12- inch -long sections of extrusions or formed sections and 6- inch - square sheets. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Product Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard product warranty signed by the manufacturer's authorized official, guaranteeing to correct failures in product which may occur during the warranty period. 1. Warranty period: 5 years from date of project acceptance. 24646.00 07820 - 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.2 TRANSLUCENT FACING 2.3 GRID CORE SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07820 TRANSLUCENT PANEL SKYLIGHTS 2.1 CANOPY ROOF SYSTEM /SKYLIGHT SYSTEM A. Aluminum Perimeter Framing, clips and trim and associated flashing: 1. Framing members and trim: Extruded aluminum. a. See drawings for profiles, dimensions, and arrangement of members. 2. Finish: Clear aluminum. B. Translucent Panels: 2 -3/4 -inch thick aluminum and fiberglass composite translucent panels. A. Translucent fiberglass faces: Manufactured from glass fiber reinforced thermoset resins by insulated skylight system fabricator specially for architectural use. 1. Color: Smooth top sheet; match Kalwall "White 25- 200 ", U- Factor 53U, L.T. 35%; matte finish bottom sheet. 2. The face sheets shall be uniform in color to prevent splotchy appearance. Faces shall be completely free of ridges and wrinkles which prevent proper surface contact in bonding to the aluminum grid core. Clusters of air bubbles /pinholes which collect moisture and dirt are not acceptable. 3. Face sheets shall be .70" thick. Faces shall not vary more than 10 percent in thickness. B. Weatherability: 1. The full thickness of the facing sheet shall not change color more than 3.0 Hunter or CIE Units (DELTA E by ASTM D -2244) after 5 years outdoor South Florida weathering at 7 degrees facing south, determined by the average of at least 3 white samples without a protective film or coating to insure maximum, long term color stability. 2. Face sheet shall not darken more than .2 Units (DELTA L by ASTM D- 2244) when exposed to 150 degrees F for 2 weeks. 3. The exterior face shall have a permanent erosion barrier to provide maximum long term resistance to reinforcing fiber exposure and shall be warranted against fiber exposure for 25 years. 4. The exterior face shall have a self - cleaning surface molecularly bonded under factory controlled conditions, minimum 1.2 mils thick, fully field restorable if worn or damaged. A. Aluminum I- beams: 6063 -T6 with provisions for mechanical interlocking of muntin- mullion and perimeter to prevent high and low intersections which do not allow full bonding surface to contact face material. Width of I -beam shall be no less than 7/16 ". I -beam grid shall be machined to tolerances of plus or minus .002" for flat panels. B. Laminate Adhesive: Heat and pressure resin -type engineered for structural sandwich panel use. Minimum strength shall be: 1. 750 PSI tensile strength by ASTM C -297 after 2 exposures to 6 cycles each of the aging conditions prescribed by ASTM D -1037. 2. 500 PSI Shear strength average of 5 exposures by ASTM D -1002: a. 50% relative humidity at 73 degrees F b. Accelerated Aging by ASTM D -1183 c. 182 degrees F d. Full Cycle Soak e. 500 Hour Oxygen Bomb (.................. ." '■ !,.. '.: , 24646.00 07820 - 2 .,... ,.,x tip'.'.". e?' f1�A!* Y7f.! 3t; t�.•F!•Cfltze.x7nna......_.. aki0,'5.m?— « lwciiwur..,.. 2.4 PANEL FABRICATION SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07820 TRANSLUCENT PANEL SKYLIGHTS A. Fabricate panels as true sandwich panels of flat fiberglass sheets bonded to a grid core of mechanically interlocking aluminum I -beams and shall be laminated under a controlled process of heat and pressure. Tape bond systems are not allowed. B. Grid patterns for flat panels shall be nominal 8" x 20" and symmetrical about the horizontal center line of each panel. C. Grid patterns for curved panels shall be as indicated and symmetrical about the vertical center line of each panel. D. The adhesive bonding line shall be straight, cover the entire width of the I -beam and have a neat, sharp edge. In order to insure bonding strength, white spots at intersections of muntins and mullions shall not exceed 4 for each 40 square feet of panel, nor shall they be more than 3/64" in width. E. Pre - assemble skylight panels and aluminum perimeter frame where practical and sealed at the factory. Panels should be shipped to the job site in rugged shipping units, ready for erection. 2.5 CUSTOM TRIM, BATTENS AND PERIMETER CLOSURE SYSTEM I A. Extruded 6063 -T6 and 6063 -T5 aluminum screw attached clamp -tite type closure system. B. Aluminum closures supplied with 300 series stainless steel screws I (excluding final fasteners to the building) and shall be factory sealed to the panels. Aluminum battens and cap plates shall be field installed. C. Exposed Finish: Architectural Class I, Clear anodic coating in accordance with AA- M12C22A41 (minimum 0.7 mil thickness). 1. Anodic coating shall be continuous, fully sealed and free from powdery surfaces. 2. Coating shall meet the specified thickness when measured in accordance with ASTM B137 or B244. 3. There shall be no residual stain in the coating when tested in accordance with ASTM B136. D. Flexible Sealing Tape: Manufacturer's standard pre- applied to closure system at the factory under controlled conditions. E. Fasteners: Compatible with aluminum; nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other noncorrosive, noncorrodible material. 1. Provide reinforcement where fasteners are screwed into aluminum members of less than 1/8 inch thickness. 1 2. Exposed fasteners: Match finish of members being fastened. F. Dissimilar Metal Coating: Cold- applied asphalt mastic, or other nonconductive, nonabsorptive material. l G. Fabrication - General: 1. Perform all finishing before shipping to project site. 2. When it is necessary to begin fabrication without actual field measurements, provide adequate fabrication and installation tolerances for correct fit. 3. Fit joints tightly with adjacent members in correct relationship. 4. Avoid damage to finishes. i 24646.00 07820 - 3 • • Welding: Perform welding before finishing; use methods which d� not discolor metal; grind exposed welds flush; match original finish. . . . 'I. ..Reinforcing: Provide as required to comply with performance' , requirements'and for rigidity; isolate dissimilar metals as specified in "Installation." PART 3 - 24646.00 EXECUTION 3.1 . PREPARATION SOUTHCENTERCORPORATE . ..TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION '07820— TRANSLUCENT PANEL SKYLIGHTS A. Examine structural framing; report conditions in writing which will adversely affect installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION • PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.4 DELIVERY, HANDLING & STORAGE 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS A. Section Includes: Provide joint sealers and backing materials for sealing of interior and exterior joints in construction. 1. "Sealant ", "Joint Sealer ", "Calk ", "Caulk ", "Calking ", and "Caulking" are interchangeable terms for purposes of this contract. Refer to "Sealant Schedule" in Part 2 of this section for uses for each type of sealant material. B. Requirements of other sections for sealant materials and application take precedence over this section. C. Related Sections: 1. Cast -in -place concrete: Division 3. 2. Precast concrete: Division 3. 3. Sealants used in conjunction with firestopping: Elsewhere in Division 7. A. Product Data: Submit copies of tests and other product data verifying conformance with specified performance characteristics. Include preparation, recommended back -up material and other pertinent items as required.. A. Installer Qualifications: Experienced in the installation of bulk sealants of the types required, and able to show similar installations in watertight condition. B. Compatibility Testing: Obtain representative samples of exterior materials which will be in contact with sealants. Have sealant manufacturer test proposed sealants for adhesion and discoloration of sealant or substrate materials. C. Job Mock -Up: Prior to proceeding with sealing work, prime and seal representative joints of each type encountered on the Work as selected by Owner; demonstrate adhesion and other performance characteristics and obtain approval before proceeding. A. General: Deliver materials to the building in sealed containers bearing manufacturer's name, batch number or date of manufacture, and manufacturer's standard label information. B. Shelf Life: 1. Discard or remove from site, outdated sealants as indicated by shelf life from date of manufacture. Shelf life shall be as published in the sealant product data, or where not published, as follows: a. Single component sealants: 12 months. b. Multi - component sealants: 24 months. 2. Use of sealant in packages which are not labeled with date of manufacture or "use before" date: Not permitted unless manufacturer furnishes certificates correlating batch number with date of manufacture. 07900 - 1 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS ........ ...... .,......._ C. Backer rods and accessory materials: Keep backing rods dry and away from dirt and other contaminants at all times. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Performance of joint sealing work is subject to the following environmental conditions. B. Temperature: Do no work when the temperature is 40 -deg. F. or below. C. Moisture: Do no work when moisture is present or when surfaces to be sealed are wet. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Warranty: 1. Furnish 5 -year warranty for materials and labor required to repair and replace faulty sealants. This warranty shall include any adhesive or cohesive failure of joints, staining of surfaces adjacent to joints by sealant or primer, and chalking or visible color change on surface of the cured sealant. 2. Provide 10 -year unconditional manufacturer's warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EXTERIOR SEALANTS A. Type "A" Sealant: Low modulus silicone, non -sag; meeting the requirements of ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25. Minimum movement capability of plus and minus 50 percent. One of the following or approved: 1. Dow Corning "790 ". B. Type "B" Sealant: Two part, self - leveling, polyurethane sealant; meeting the requirements of ASTM C920, Grade P, Type M, Class 25. Minimum Shore A hardness: 40, plus or minus 5. One of the following or approved. 1. Sonneborn "Sonolastic SL2" 2. Tremco "THC 900" 3. Sika "Sikaflex -2c SL" 4. Mameco International "Vulkem 255" C. Color: Match color of adjacent material occurring in same plane. Where joints occur adjacent to two or more material colors in same plane, match color of lighter adjacent material, unless otherwise directed. 2.2 INTERIOR SEALANTS A. Type "B -1" Sealant: Two - component, flexible epoxy joint sealant. Minimum movement capability: plus•and minus 12.5 percent. Minimum Shore A hardness: 60. One of the following or approved. 1. Sika Corp. "Sikadur 51 SL" 2. Euclid Chemical Co. "Euco 700" 3. Pecora Corporation "EP -800 Epoxy Joint Filler" B. Type "C" Sealant: Acrylic latex sealant complying with requirements of ASTM C834. One of the following or approved. 1. Tremco "Tremco Acrylic Latex Caulk" 2. Pecora Chemical Corporation "AC -20 Acrylic Latex" 3. Sonneborn "Sonolac" 24646.00 07900 - 2 i 1 1 1 1 C. Type "D" Sealant: Mildew resistant silicone sealant complying with requirements of FS TT -S -1543, Class B. One of the following or approved. 1. Dow Corning "786 Mildew Resistant Silicone" 2. General Electric "Sanitary 1700 Silicone Sealant" 2.3 NONCURING SEALANT A. Tape or mastic (gun- grade) non - curing, non - hardening, synthetic rubber sealer, recommended for use by manufacturer for concealed metal -to- metal joints subject to movement or vibration. B. Tape Sealant: Solvent -free, butyl -based tape sealant with a solids content of 100 percent; meeting the requirements of AAMA 804.1 -85 (as described in AAMA 800). Packaged in rolls with release paper backing. Acceptable products include: 1. Tremco "440 Tape ". 2. Pecora "Extru - Seal ". 3. PTI "606 Architectural Sealant Tape" C. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant. Acceptable products include: 1. Tremco "Curtainwall Sealant" 2. PTI "404 Bed and Seal Sealant" 2.4 SEALANT ACCESSORY MATERIALS SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS A. Joint Filler ( "Backer" or "Backer Rod "): Closed cell, non- absorptive, polyethylene foam or polyethylene - jacketed polyurethane foam. I 1. Joint filler tensile strength: 20 -30 psi and as recommended for compatibility with sealant by sealant manufacturer. 2. Joint filler shape: Round. 3. Joint filler sizes: As recommended by the sealant manufacturer, with diameter never less than 30% greater than width of joint to give "hour glass" shape to the sealant. B. Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Provide self - adhesive tape wherever applicable. C. Joint Primer or Conditioner: Where required by the type of sealant and the materials to which the sealant is to be applied, shall be of a type as recommended by the sealant manufacturer for particular surface. 2.5 SEALANT SCHEDULE A. General: The various types of sealants shall be used in the following locations: 1. Type "A ": Exterior vertical joints, (all joints not subject to foot or vehicle traffic), between precast concrete and masonry, or exterior insulation and finish system. 2. Type "B ": Exterior and interior horizontal joints (joints subject to foot or vehicle traffic) in concrete, masonry, stone, tile, etc. except joints in interior concrete slabs. 3. Type "B -1 ": Interior horizontal joints in concrete slabs (both exposed and those to be concealed by floor finish material). 4. Type "C ": Interior vertical joints, except in wet areas as described below. 5. Type "D ": Interior vertical and horizontal joints in wet areas such as toilet and shower areas. Joints in interior ceramic work. 24646.00 07900 - 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS ,..,...... «w w.w >•.ur.n..- sxnR�;teM::`:'il'kk F1' \ 1 , ...2r�r. , . , eer.».n...._,..... A. Inspect surfaces for satisfactory and proper condition to receive sealant; application of sealant materials constitutes acceptance of joint surfaces as suitable to receive sealant. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean joint surfaces free from dirt, dust and other contaminants affecting bond of the sealant material. B. Apply sealants to dry surfaces only. C. Remove lacquers and protective films from metal surfaces. D. Apply masking around joints to protect adjacent surfaces from defacement and staining during sealing operations. Remove masking tape within 10 minutes after joint has been filled and tooled. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Mix and apply sealant materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions; apply sealant before weatherproofing materials are applied. 1. Do not apply sealant until mockup applications are approved. 2. Comply with requirements of ASTM C 1193 except where exceeded by manufacturer's instructions or requirements of this specification. B. Priming: Apply primer to contact surfaces as recommended by sealant manufacturer for the conditions of the application; if recommended, apply full strength, undiluted in uniform coating over surfaces. Care shall be exercised to ensure that only interior of joint surfaces are primed. C. Joint Filler: Install in butt type joints receiving sealant where depth of joint exceeds manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Use a blunt rounded tool or plain faced roller for installation. 2. Force joint filler into joint. 3. Do not puncture the surface skin when installing closed cell material. Avoid longitudinal stretching of the rod during installation. 4. Install to width -to -depth ratio recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Where manufacturer does not make specific recommendation install backer to 50 percent of the joint width but not less than 1/4 -inch, below the surface of the joint. D. Bond Breaker Tape: Where depth of joint is not sufficient to require joint filler, install bond breaker tape to cover full width and length of joint cavity. In all cases, sealant shall bond to only two opposing surfaces of the joint. E. Joint Width: Provide joint width as shown, or if not indicated, provide minimum 3/8" joint width. F. Application: 1. Before applying sealant, repair damaged masking. 2. Apply sealant over backing to uniform thickness in continuous beads, filling joints and voids solid. Superficial pointing with skim bead will not be accepted. 24646.00 07900 - 4 r ' . . . CLEANING A. Clean-Up: Upon completion, remove and dispose of masking materials; remove excess sealing materials; clean adjacent surfaces of all soil and stain resulting from sealing operations. 1. Obtain and comply with recommended cleaning materials and methods of manufacturer of surface requiring cleaning. 24646.00 • SOUTHCENTER •CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 'SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS •• ." ' • • = • • ' • • . • After application, tool Surface.to.achievecompleie adhesion and contact; leave surface of sealant slightly COncaVe.::Toolingshali be completed in One continuous stroke'. END OF SECTION 07900 - 5 ■ PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 08415 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONT A. Section Includes: 1. Glazed aluminum swinging doors. 2. Aluminum framing system. 3. Furnishing and installation of glass. B. Related Sections: 1. Joint sealants: Division 7. 2. Door hardware: Elsewhere in Division 8. 3. Glass: Elsewhere in Division 8. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Exterior Assemblies: Design to comply with the performance criteria listed below. B. Thermal Movement: Design to accommodate expansion and contraction resulting from air temperature range of 120 degrees F, solar heat gain, and nighttime re- radiation. C. Structural Performance: Design to withstand all live and dead loads without deformation and without deflection greater than 1/175 of span. 1. Deflection in plane of wall: Not greater than that which would reduce glass edge clearance to 25 percent of design dimension or 1/8 inch, whichever is greater, or that which would reduce glass bite to 75 percent of design dimension. 2. Design system to withstand 150 percent of design wind load with no failure or permanent deformation greater than 0.2 percent of span. D. Wind Loads: Framing system, including anchorages, shall be designed to withstand the wind pressures based on the 1994 UBC, Section 1613. Maximum deflection of any member shall not exceed L/175. Importance factor shall be 1.0. E. Air Infiltration: When tested in accordance with ASTM E283, at a test pressure of 6.24 psf, the air infiltration shall not exceed 0.06 cfm per square foot. F. Water Penetration: When tested in accordance with ASTM E331, no water shall penetrate during a test period of 15 minutes when the entrances or storefronts are subjected to a rate of flow of 5 gal /hr /sq.ft. with a differential pressure across the unit of 6.24 psf. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's material specifications, drawings of standard components, and installation recommendations. B. Shop Drawings: Show elevations, field measurements, composite members, reinforcement, anchorages, expansion provisions, hardware mounting, and glazing. Show compliance with specified structural performances, wind loads, air infiltration and water penetration. C. Calculations: Submit structural calculations required to show compliance with wind load and deflection requirements, including anchorages. 24646.00 08415 - 1 D. Warranty on Fabricated Products. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 08415 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONT A. Standard for Wind Load Testing: ASTM E 330. B. Standard for Air Infiltration Testing: ASTM E 283; report result as cubic feet per minute per unit of measurement indicated, at pressure differential indicated. C. Standard for Water Penetration Testing: ASTM E 331; report result at pressure differential indicated. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Take field measurements before starting fabrication. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Fabricated Products: Submit a written warranty, guaranteeing to correct failures in work which occur within 5 years from date of substantial completion, without reducing or otherwise limiting any other rights to correction which the Owner may have under the contract documents. 1. Failures are defined to include faulty workmanship, failure to meet the specified performance requirements, faulty operation, and deterioration other than normal weathering. Correction may include repair or replacement. 2. Warranty to be signed by manufacturer, installer, and Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Where product brand names are given, the design is based on the products indicated. B. Aluminum Framing Systems: 1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Kawneer Company, Inc. b. Vistawall Architectural Products Division /Butler Manufacturing Company. C. Glazed Aluminum Doors: 1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable: a. Kawneer Company, Inc. b. Vistawall Architectural Products Division /Butler Manufacturing Company. 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Aluminum Framing System: Extruded aluminum. 1. Style: Kawneer "Trifab 451 ", Vistawall "Series 3000" or approved. 2. Products which have minor differences will be accepted when, in the judgment of the Owner, such differences do not detract from design concept or performance. 24646.00 08415 - 2 . ? 2.3 SWINGING DOORS SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 08415 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONT 3. Glazing method: Resilient gasket glazed, with provision for replacement of glazing without disassembly of framing. 4. Finish: a. Class I color anodized finish. (1) Color: Dark bronze to match existing. Field verify and submit samples for Owner's approval. 5. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes as recommended by aluminum framing manufacturer. 6. End Dams: Provide end dams as recommended by aluminum framing manufacturer. A. Stile and Rail Doors: Glazed doors with tubular extruded aluminum frame members. 1. Frame joints: Either concealed mechanically fastened, using tie rods or j -bolts and reinforcing plates; or welded. 2. Thickness: 1 -3/4 inches. 3. Stile width: 2 inches nominal. 4. Full glazed, with one intermediate mullion. 5. Glazing stops: Snap -on extruded aluminum, designed to allow replacement of glazing without disassembly of frame. Provide nonremovable exterior stops. 6. Glaze doors in factory. 7. Finish: a. Class I color anodized finish. (1) Color: Dark bronze to match existing. Field verify and submit samples for Owner's approval. B. Weatherstripping: 1. At fixed stops: Replaceable, compression type molded gaskets of neoprene or EPDM rubber complying with ASTM C 864 or of polyvinyl chloride complying with ASTM D 2287. 2. At other edges: Replaceable woven polypropylene, wool, or nylon pile, with aluminum or nylon fabric backing, complying with AAMA 701. 3. At door bottom: Adjustable molded EPDM or vinyl sweep, continuously contacting threshold; concealed mounting. 4. Provide weatherstripping on all exterior doors. 2.4 MATERIALS - GENERAL A. Aluminum Members: ASTM B 221 for extrusions, ASTM B 209 for sheet /plate; alloy and temper recommended by the manufacturer for the strength required, for corrosion resistance, and for the finish required. 1. Class I color anodized finish: AA- M12C22A42/A44 (nonspecular, as- fabricated mechanical finish; medium matte etched chemical finish; integral or electrolytically deposited color, architectural Class I anodic coating minimum 0.7 mil thick). B. Fasteners: Compatible with aluminum; aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other noncorrosive, noncorrodible material. 1. Do not use exposed fasteners. C. Concealed Flashing: Fully annealed, soft stainless steel, 26 gage minimum; or extruded aluminum, 0.032 inch minimum. D. Miscellaneous Concealed Metal Members: High- strength aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel; hot -dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 123 may be used for members which are not exposed to weather or abrasion. 24646.00 08415 - 3 F. Avoid damage to finishes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION 3.2 INSTALLATION 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 08415 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONT E. Concrete Inserts: Cast iron, malleable iron, or steel hot -dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123. F. Dissimilar Metal Coating: Cold- applied asphalt mastic, or other nonconductive, nonabsorptive material. G. Glazing Gaskets: Comply .with ASTM C 864; style as recommended by manufacturer. H. Glass and Glazing Accessories: Provide products specified elsewhere in Division 8. I. Joint Sealers: Provide products 2.5 FABRICATION A. Any dimensions which may vary are of dimensional variation allowed. 08415 - 4 ...... �v., ,..,,- ....�.,..- .,...»...,...n. rv. .. v,. wrmMnrfr .•r.'y`.r:arU= .t!"4�'�SY. JAM d. 7tYrtl :44fi[.a'YXO.t. +..,�..,.._.... _ specified in Division 7. indicated on drawings, with amount B. Framing System: Pre -cut and perform all finishing in factory or shop. 1. Fit joints tightly with adjacent members in correct relationship. C. Doors: Factory- fabricate doors and factory - install all hardware except surface - mounted items. 1. Perform fabrication required for hardware before finishing. D. Welding: Perform welding before finishing; use methods which do not discolor metal; grind exposed welds flush; match original finish. E. Reinforcing: Provide as required to comply with performance requirements for rigidity and to support hardware; isolate dissimilar metals as specified in "Installation." A. Examine structures; report conditions in writing which will adversely affect installation. A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. B. Install plumb and level, square and true, in correct location; support adequately and securely anchor. C. Separate aluminum exposed to weather from dissimilar metals; coat dissimilar metals that are in drainage cavities using one of the materials specified. Aluminum, stainless steel, zinc, cadmium, and small areas of white bronze are not considered dissimilar from each other. D. Coat all metals that come into contact with masonry, concrete, and treated wood, using one of the materials specified. E. Install surface - mounted hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturer's instructions. G. Install glass using methods specified elsewhere in Division 8. 3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Adjust each operable unit for correct function and smooth, free Install joint sealers between exterior sill members and the surface below as indicated, to provide weathertight construction. Comply with Division 7 requirements for installation of joint sealers. 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 08415 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND • END OF SECTION 08415 - 5 B. Door and Hardware Institute (DHI): 1. Recommended Location for Builders' Hardware for Steel Doors and Frames, 1990 Edition. C. Uniform Building Code (UBC): 1. 1994 Edition with Washington State Amendments D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. Standard 80 "Fire Doors & Windows ", 1992 Edition. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: Provide hardware for fire -rated openings in compliance with NFPA 80. This requirement takes precedence over other requirements for such hardware. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300. B. Door Hardware Schedule: 1. Submit 4 reproducible copies of schedule on 8 -1/2 inch by 11 inch sheets. 2. Furnish cover sheet listing name of project as shown on Contract Documents, name of Owner, name of Architect, name of Contractor, name of hardware consultant and date of submittal or revision of submittal. 3. Furnish a vertical listing of hardware items used followed by manufacturer's name either on cover sheet or immediately following cover sheet; i.e., "hinges - manufacturer's name ". 24646.00 08700 - 1 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 08700 BUILDERS' HARDWARE 4. Schedule hardware items for each door separately in typed vertical form; a. Under each heading completely describe each opening. b. Doors with like hardware may be grouped under a single heading. c. Owner will review schedule and will return 1 copy to Contractor with comments. d. Resubmit only corrected copies of those sheets requiring correction and update all distributed copies with corrected sheets. e. Hardware schedules not complying with above will not be reviewed and will be returned for proper formatting. f. Door hardware schedules will not be reviewed by Owner until they have been reviewed and approved by Contractor. C. Templates: 1. Furnish hardware made to template; send template information to respective door and frame manufacturers or fabricators no later than 14 days after approval of door hardware schedule. 2. Coordinate templates between manufacturers of different hardware items to allow installation of various hardware items without interference between items. Special templates may be necessary. D. Keying Schedule: 1. Upon receipt of approved hardware schedule, arrange an interview with Owner to obtain necessary keying information. 2. Submit 3 copies of keying schedule indicating door numbers in numerical sequence, lock or cylinder number and its particular keying. Obtain approval before proceeding. E. Contract Close -out Submittals: 1. At time of acceptance of Work, deliver hardware templates, instruction sheets, schedules, installation details, and similar data to Owner. 2. Submit data in a clearly identified 3 ring binder, organized by hardware type in BHMA sequencing. A. Qualifications: 1. Contractor is responsible for proper application and fit of all door and specialty hardware in locations as indicated on drawings or as specified. 2. Coordinate dimensions between hardware items where installation of an item affects operation or installation of another item. 24646.00 08700 - 2 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE HANDLING A. Delivery: 1. Package each item of hardware separately with necessary . screws, bolts, tampins, keys and installation templates. 2. Deliver packages clearly identified with heading number as approved on hardware schedule. B. Storage: Store hardware in a dry, locked area. 1:7 MAINTENANCE SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 08700 BUILDERS' HARDWARE A. Tools: 1. After final adjustment of door hardware turn over to Owner tools furnished during construction for installation and adjustment. 2. Tag and identify each item as to its use and applicable piece of door hardware. PART .2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers and Alternates: 1. Door hardware items are specified from following manufacturer's catalogs with acceptable alternate manufacturers listed opposite for each listed hardware type. 2. Unless noted otherwise, only similar units of equivalent size, weight, type, function, design and finish will be approved provided templates and accessories can be furnished permitting installation without conflict with other specified hardware. 24646.00 Hardware Scheduled Mfr. Alternate Mfr. Hinges Stanley Hager, Lawrence, McKinney Exit Devices Adams Rite As approved Closers LCN Norton Stops & Holders Builders Brass Works As approved Pulls Builders Brass Works Quality, Tice Threshold & Pemko National Guard Weatherstripping Products, Reese, Sealeze, Zero Miscellaneous As Listed As approved 08700 - 3 • 2.3 DOOR HARDWARE 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 08700 BUILDERS' HARDWARE 08700 - 4 B. Equivalent Materials: Except as listed in hardware schedule, no substitutions will be allowed, unless approved by Owner. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Door hardware is specified by use of a manufacturers' numbers and are for purpose of establishing design, function, finish and quality. B. Except where scheduled otherwise, products with each hardware category are to be by one manufacturer, i.e. hinges, locks, closers, exit devices, etc. A. HINGES: 1. Provide hinges sized per hinge manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Provide quantities as noted in hardware sets. B. LOCK & LATCHSETS: 1. Include wrought box strikes or ANSI strikes with dust boxes, each with curved lips sufficient to protect door frame and trim. 2. Provide through bolted trim with 03A levers for mortise locks. C. EXIT DEVICES: 1. Center exit device cases and trim on door stiles unless required otherwise by manufacturer's template. D. PULLS: 1. Provide through bolt fasteners and coordinate location with vertical rod exit devices. E. CLOSERS: 1. Provide sizes as recommended by manufacturer for conditions of installation and otherwise as required to insure latching of doors with weatherstripping. 2. Provide closers capable of adjustment to forces scheduled in Part 3 of this section. 3. Provide closers with arms designed to permit opening of doors as far as job conditions will permit; closers with arms restricting opening swing of doors will not be accepted. 4. Provide spacers for attachment of fifth screws for Cush -N -Stop arms. 5. Provide drop plates and accessory items or attachments for coordinating installation of closers with frames. F. DOOR STOPS & HOLDERS: 1. Provide fasteners recommended by manufacturer. . THRESHOLDS: 1. Unless otherwise noted, provide in lengths to match widths measured between frame rabbets. .H. WEATHERSTRIPPING & SEALS: Provide in lengths to match door and frame widths or heights as applicable. 2.4 KEYING 2.5 FINISHES 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 08700 BUILDERS' HARDWARE A. Arrangement: 1. Provide 6 -pin cylinders for locks or scheduled items requiring cylinders for proper operation. 2. Key to existing Schlage master key system and otherwise key as later directed. B. Construction Keying: 1. During construction provide locks keyed to a construction masterkey system; maintain locks operative for access and exit by construction keys. 2. At time of completion convert construction keying to building key system under supervision of Owner or Owner's authorized representative.' C. Keys: 1. Provide 3 keys to each lock or keyed alike group unless otherwise required by approved keying schedule. 3. After conversion to building keying system adjust locks for proper key operation, file keys in individual envelopes furnished by lock manufacturer and mark each with door number, key number, and master key set to facilitate their integration into a key control system. 4. Deliver change keys to Owner. Send masterkeys by registered mail directly from manufacturer to: Owner as later directed. A. Provide hardware, including exposed fasteners, attachments, and accessory items, in following finishes, except as noted otherwise in Hardware Schedule: Hardware Item Finish Hinges US10B Exit Devices US32D Cylinders US26D Pulls US32D Closers KPDDARK Stops US26D Thresholds Extruded Aluminum Weatherstripping Clear Anodized Aluminum Miscellaneous US26D 08700 - 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 3.2 INSTALLATION 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 08700 BUILDERS' HARDWARE 08700 - 6 A. Verify doors and frames are ready to receive work, and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by manufacturers. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. A. General: 1. Install each hardware item in accordance with each manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 2. Install no hardware until substrate finishes are complete. 3. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or otherwise finished, install each item completely then remove and store during application of finishes; reinstall upon completion of finishing operations. 4. Set items level, plumb, and true to line and location. 5. Drill and countersink items which are not factory prepared for fasteners. 6. Space fasteners and anchors per manufacturer's instructions and in accordance with industry standards. 7. Attach wall mounted hardware to concealed wall blocking. Do not install wall mounted hardware where wall blocking has not been installed and arrange for blocking to be installed before proceeding. B. Installation Clarification: Direct questions regarding placement of hardware to Owner for clarification prior to installation of items under question. C. Locations: Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or listed below, locate hardware in accordance with DHI recommended locations. D. Hardware & Specialties: In addition to installation requirements specified above, install hardware as follows: 1. Hinges: a. Where shimming is necessary for proper door /frame installation, use only metal shims. 2. Exit Devices: Install cross bar or push pad centered 38" above finished floor unless shown otherwise on drawings. 3. Pulls: Mount to not conflict with vertical exit device rods. 4. Closers: a. Mount per manufacturer's instructions, and special templates for coordination with other scheduled hardware. Adjust closers to control door swing and latch door. 3.3 ADJUSTING: A. Adjustment & cleaning: 1. Adjust and check each item of hardware and each door, to insure proper operation and function of each unit. 2. Lubricate moving parts with graphite -type lubricant, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer. 3. Replace hardware which cannot be lubricated and adjusted to operate freely and smoothly. B. Final Adjustment: 1. Whenever hardware installation is made more than 1 month prior to acceptance of Work, make final adjustment and check of hardware during week immediately prior to acceptance. 2. Make final adjustment of locking, latching devices and closers to compensate for operation of heating and ventilating systems under supervision of manufacturer's representative. 3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. After installation, clean metal surfaces on both interior and exterior of mortar, plaster, paint and other contaminants. After cleaning, protect work against damage. 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 08700 BUILDERS' HARDWARE b. After air handling system has been balanced, arrange to have closer manufacturer's representative make final adjustment of their closers on job. c. Adjust closers to take 3 seconds minimum for door to swing from a 70 degree position to 3" from latching position. d. Adjust closers not to exceed following opening forces: Interior Doors 5 lb. Exterior Doors 8.5 lb. 5. Door stops: a. Install stops to permit maximum degree of swing allowed by job conditions. b. Locate floor stops so as not to create a tripping hazard, and to catch door at a point 6 inches in from latch edge, but in no case any further than 1/3 door width measured from latch edge. 6. Thresholds: a. Cut and fit to profiles of door jambs. File burrs smooth. b. At exterior doors and elsewhere as indicated, set thresholds in bed of butyl rubber sealant; completely fill voids to exclude moisture, taking care not to plug drainage holes or block weeps; remove excess sealant. c. Install thresholds level. 7. Weatherstripping & Seals: a. Install per manufacturer's instructions. b. Do not cut or interrupt extrusions for weatherstripping by any door closer attachment, i.e. soffit shoe. 08700 - 7 •': • .;ir• e , 3.5'....AMOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Provide following hardware sets for doors shown'on'the drawings. HW-1:. (Exterior atrium exit'doors). • ,:3 . Pair Hinges. FBB199 NRP, 5 x. 4-1/2 Exit Devices 8604 x cyl dogging Offset Pulls 2950 (US32D) 2 . Closers 1460 x 3077L Series x top jamb push side. mtg Floor Stops 7280 Threshold 172A HI472: (Building exit doors 3 Pair Hinges 2 Exit Devices 2 - Offset Pulls 1 Closer 1 Closer 2 . Floor stops 1 Threshold SOUTHCENTER CORPORATESQUARE TUKWILA,,'WASHINGTON SECTION BUILDERS' HARDWARE into atrium) FBB199, 5 x 4-1/2 8604 x cyl dogging 2950 (US32D) 1460 x 3077L Series x top jamb push side mtg. 1460 Series x top jamb push side mtg .7280 172A HW-3: (Exterior elevator machine room door) 1-1/2 Pair Hinges FBB199 NRP, 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 1 Storeroom Lock L9080 1 Closer w/ stop arm 1460 Cush-N-Stop Series 1 Threshold 1700A 1 Rain Drip 345A s full width frame 1 Set weatherstrip 2891AS 1 • Door sweep w/ rain drip 3452CP HW-4: (Interior storage room door) 1-1/2 Pair Hinges 1 Storeroom Lock 1 Closer 1 Wall Stop 1 Threshold 1 Set Gaskets 24646.00 FBB179, 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 L9080 P1460 Series W12X 270A PK55D END OF SECTION 08700 - 8 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Insulating glass. 2. Glazing sealants. 3. Glazing accessories. B. Types of work in this section include work for: 1. Exterior storefront. 2. Aluminum entrances. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Exterior Glazing: Provide glazing assemblies which will withstand normal conditions without failure, loss of weathertightness, or deterioration. 1. Design to accommodate thermal movement resulting from: a. Air temperature range of 120 degrees F. b. Material temperature range of 180 degrees F. B. Deterioration includes: 1. For insulating glass: a. Moisture or dirt between panes. b. Development of condensation between panes. c. Damage to internal coating, if any. d. Development of other visible indication of seal failure. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Insulating Unit Warranty. B. Weathertight Warranty. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 08800 GLAZING A. Standard for Sealed Insulating Glass Units: ASTM E 774, with compliance certified by independent certification program. 1. Label each unit permanently on spacer or on one pane. 2. Certification agency: B. Certified Safety Glazing: Provide Category II products which comply with test requirements of 16 CFR 1201 and ANSI Z97.1 and permanently marked with label of: 1. Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC). A. Protect products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations; specifically, avoid damage to glass edges; prevent damage due to temperature changes, sunlight, and moisture. A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install glazing when either air or substrate temperature exceeds the range recommended by manufacturer or when substrate is wet, damp, or covered with snow, ice, or frost. B. Install bulk sealants only at air and substrate temperatures above 40 degrees F. 08800 - 1 1.7 WARRANTY SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 08800 GLAZING A. Submit a written warranty guaranteeing to correct failures in glazing which occur within the period indicated after substantial completion, without reducing or otherwise limiting any other rights to correction which the Owner may have under the contract documents. 1. Warranty on insulating glass: 5 years. 2. Weathertight warranty: Signed by installer and Contractor, for 5 years. Failure is defined as water leakage through glazing assembly. Correction may include repair or replacement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Glass Manufacturers - General: 1. Obtain materials from only one manufacturer or fabricator for each type; obtain tinted primary glass (if any) used for each type from only one manufacturer. 2.2 GLASS TYPES A. Glass Types - General: Provide glass types fabricated of the glass products indicated. 1. Select products to comply with performance requirements indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Exterior glass thickness: 6 mm (1 /4 inch nominal), unless otherwise indicated. 3. Fabricate glass with bite and edge clearance dimensions, including tolerances, as recommended by manufacturer and FGMA "Glazing Manual." 4. Where safety glazing is required by governing authorities, provide certified safety glazing. B. Glass Type I - 1 : Sealed insulating units. 1. Total thickness: 1 inch, nominal. 2. Exterior pane: Transparent float glass. a. Annealed float glass (untreated). b. Color: Clear. 3. Interior pane: Transparent float glass. a. Annealed float glass (untreated). b. Color: Clear. 2.3 BASIC GLASS PRODUCTS A. Sealed Insulating Units: Factory - assembled multiple panes separated by and sealed to spacers forming air - tight, dehydrated air space(s). 1. ASTM E 774, Class A. 2. Spacer seals: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Spacer corner construction: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Drying agent: Manufacturer's standard. B. Float Glass: Quality q3, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Annealed: ASTM C 1036, Type I. 2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Installation Materials - General: Select products which have appropriate performance characteristics as recommended by glass and glazing materials manufacturers and which are compatible with all materials with which they will come into contact. 24646.00 08800 - 2 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 08800 GLAZING B. Exterior Glazing Sealant: Silicone sealant complying with ASTM C 920. 1. Demonstrate compatibility and adhesion by preconstruction testing. 2. Colors: To match substrates. C. Heel and Toe Bead Sealant: Noncuring, nonskinning, minimum 75 percent solids, butyl or polyisobutylene rubber, complying with 802.3, Type II ductile back bedding compound, as described in AAMA 800. D. Glazing Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM, or silicone. 1. Setting blocks: 80 to 90 Shore A hardness. 2. Spacers: As required to provide face and edge clearances recommended by FGMA "Glazing Manual," unless greater clearances are recommended by glazing manufacturer. E. Backer Rods: Flexible, nonabsorbent, compressible polyurethane foam, either open -cell or non - gassing closed -cell, unless otherwise restricted by sealant manufacturer; preformed to appropriate size and shape. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine frames and rabbets in which glazing is to be installed for conditions that could be detrimental to the longevity of the glazing. In particular, check for conditions that would void the manufacturer's warranty. B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION 1 A. Clean surfaces to receive glazing just before installation of glazing. 3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL 1 A. Comply with recommendations for installation contained in the FGMA "Glazing Manual" and "Sealant Manual" except when specifically not recommended or prohibited by the glass or glazing material 1 manufacturer; comply with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Protect glazing from edge damage during handling and installation. C. Do not install glass that has edge damage or defects that reduce glass strength or performance or diminish appearance. D. Install glass so that visual characteristics, such as pattern, bow, 1 and roll wave distortion, are uniform. 3.4 GLAZING IN FRAMES A. Use the following glazing methods in the locations indicated in other specification sections: 1. Sealant, both sides. B. Use continuous heel or toe bead at all exterior glazing. C. Permanently adhere setting and edge blocks to frame. D. Do not block weep holes. 08800 - 3 .• , 24646.00 SOUTRCENTERCORPORATESQUARB TUKWILA WASHINGTON SECTION:08800.! GLAZING — E , , 1.- Remove applied coatings from surfaces, unless such coatings have been tested to show acceptable adhesion and compatibility. 2. Use continuous spacers. a. Exception: For lights of less than 100 united inches, non-continuous spacers may be used, with backer rods to form proper sealant shape. 3. Use primer where required for proper adhesion. 4. Tool sealant, eliminating air pockets, with a definite slope away from glazing. 3.5 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Do not apply tape or labels to glazing; remove temporary labels. B. Protect glazing during subsequent construction operations; remove dirt, contaminants, staining agents and other deposits promptly using manufacturer's recommended procedures. 1. Clean off excess sealants as work progresses using methods which will not damage glazing. Replace glazing that is damaged. D. Wash both sides of glazing, using' manufacturer's recommended procedures not more than 10 days before inspection for substantial completion. END OF SECTION • 08800 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS A. Section Includes: 1. Gypsum wallboard. 2. Gypsum wallboard patching and repairs. 3. Drywall finishing. B. Related Sections: 1. Cold- formed metal framing: Division 5. 2. Painting: Elsewhere in Division 9. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: At locations indicated on drawings, provide fire -rated assemblies tested in accordance with ASTM E 119 and acceptable to authorities for ratings required. Provide assemblies as listed in the following: 1. GA -600, "Fire Resistance Design Manual." 2. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.'s (UL) "Fire Resistance Directory." 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original and unopened packages, containers, or bundles, with brand names and manufacturer's labels intact and legible. B. Store materials in dry location, fully protected.from weather and direct exposure to sunlight. C. Stack gypsum board products flat and level, properly supported to prevent sagging or damage to ends and edges. D. Store corner bead and other metal and plastic accessories to prevent bending, sagging, distortion, or other mechanical damage. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations, whichever are more stringent. For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 deg F (4 deg C). For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 48 hours before application and continuously after until dry. Do not exceed 95 deg F (35 deg C) when using temporary heat sources. Ventilate building spaces as required to dry joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during hot, dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly. B. Ventilation: Provide controlled ventilation during joint finishing operations, to eliminate excessive moisture. Avoid drafts during hot, dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too quickly. 24646.00 09260 - 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GYPSUM BOARD A. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36; maximum lengths available to minimize end -to -end butt joints in each area receiving finished gypsum board. 1. Fire- resistant type (Type X or equivalent), where required for fire - resistant rated assemblies. 2. Edges: Tapered. 3. Thickness: 5/8 inch, except as otherwise shown. 2.2 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, provide trim and accessories by manufacturer of gypsum board materials, made of galvanized steel or zinc alloy and configured for concealment in joint compound. 1. Include corner beads, edge trim, and other trim units necessary for project conditions. Provide accessories as required in order to achieve details indicated, whether or not specific accessories are shown on the drawings. B. Control Joints: At locations indicated, provide manufacturer's standard one -piece control joints of extruded vinyl, zinc alloy, or other noncorrosive metal. 2.3 JOINT TREATMENT A. General: Provide products by manufacturer of gypsum boards. Comply with ASTM C 475 and with manufacturer's recommendations for specific project conditions. B. Joint Tape: Manufacturer's standard paper reinforcing tape. C. Drying Type Joint Compound: Vinyl -based type for interior use, and as follows: 1. Taping compound: Type specifically formulated for embedding tape and accessories and for prefilling. 2. Topping compound: Type specifically formulated for finishing drywall over taping compound. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide miscellaneous materials as produced or recommended by manufacturer of gypsum products. B. Screws: ASTM C 1002; self - drilling type; lengths as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. 1. Exterior applications: Cadmium - plated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS .. ��,........._....,.......... . ................. u.... a...,.,. ve..+nrraa,,:'xxrte+?2Mkt�fifi�nn , S Pre A. Inspection: Verify that project conditions and substrates are appropriate to begin installation of work of this section. 24646.00 09260 - 2 3.2 PREPARATION 3.3 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM BOARD 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS A. Coordinate installation of anchorage devices for suspended ceilings /soffits, verifying that spacing and rated strength are correct for anticipated load conditions. A. General: Comply with ASTM C 840 and GA -216 except where exceeded by other requirements. 1. Wherever possible, install gypsum board to minimize butt end joints. 2. Apply ceiling boards prior to installation of wallboards. Arrange to minimize butt end joints near center of ceiling area. 3. Install wallboards in a manner which will minimize butt end joints in center of wall area. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of walls. 4. Butt all joints loosely, with maximum of 1/16 inch between boards. 5. Place wrapped edges adjacent to one another; do not place cut edges or butt ends adjacent to wrapped edges. 6. Support all edges and ends of each board on framing or by solid substrate, except that long edges at right angles to framing members in non - fire -rated construction may be left unsupported. 7. In double -layer ceiling work, apply base layer with long edges perpendicular to framing members, with face layer in opposite direction, and with all joints offset. 8.• In double -layer wall applications, apply base layer with long edges parallel to framing members, with face layer in opposite direction, and with all joints offset. B. Control Joints: Form control joints by means of 1/4 -inch space between adjacent gypsum boards, with each edge supported on separate framing member, ready to receive trim accessory, and located as shown on the drawings and as follows: 1. Not more than 30 feet apart on walls which are not intersected by other walls for 50 feet or more. 2. On ceilings with perimeter relief, not more than 50 feet apart in both directions. 3. On ceilings without perimeter relief, not more than 30 feet apart in both directions. 4. At exterior soffits, not more than 30 feet apart in both directions. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for installation of trim items. Except for items intended by manufacturer to be left exposed or semiexposed, install trim units for concealment in joint finishing compound. Wherever possible, fasten metal trim items to substrate with same fasteners used to install gypsum board products. B. Corner Bead: Install metal corner bead at all external corners unless details clearly indicate its omission at specific locations. C. Edge Trim: Install edge trim at locations indicated and wherever edge of gypsum board otherwise would be exposed. D. Control Joints: Install one -piece control joints at required locations. Do not remove tape until finishing operations are complete. 09260 - 3 A. General: Comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216 except where exceeded by other requirements. 1. Do not mix joint compounds except.as specifically recommended by manufacturer. . Finish gypsum board in accordance with the following level of finish per. GA-214, except where indicated otherwise on the drawings: 1. Level 4: Embed tape in joint compound at all joints and interior angles. Provide three separate coats of compound at all joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Provide smooth surfaces free of tool marks and ridges. C. Joint Treatment: Tape and finish joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for compounds used, using proper hand tools designed for the purpose. 1. Avoid raising nap of face paper when sanding; carefully sponge down any areas roughened by sanding process. .80UTHCENTERCORPORATE:SQUARE', . TUKWILA;.' WASHINGTON SECTION-09260, GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS ,3.5 FINISHING D. Penetrations: Fill cutouts and openings around fixtures and penetrations with joint compound. 3.6 CLEANING Promptly remove any residual gypsum drywall materials from adjacent or adjoining surfaces, leaving spaces ready for subsequent finishing operations and decorating. 24646.00 END OF SECTION 09260 - 4 • PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Unglazed ceramic mosaic tile. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation; Tile Council of America, (TCA) 1996. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Samples for Verification Purposes: 1. Submit each tile type selected board with joints filled using 2. Trim and accessories: Samples B. Qualifications Documentation: Written confirmation that companies executing work in this section comply with experience requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Material Source: Furnish each type, finish, and color of tile product and accessory materials from a single supplier. B. Installer: A company with not less than 10 installations of tile work similar in size and complexity to the work of this project. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 09311 CERAMIC MOSAIC TILE Submit the following: mounted on a minimum 12 inch square selected grout. of actual units in selected color. A. Deliver and store tile products and setting materials in manufacturer's sealed packages. Protect material from damage and store in dry location. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Provide temperatures in tiled areas during installation and after completion as required by referenced installation standard or manufacturer's instructions, but not less than 50 degrees F. B. If necessary to use temporary heaters, vent units to exterior to protect tile work from carbon dioxide accumulation. Inc. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS - GENERAL A. Tile Installation Materials Standard: ANSI standard referenced for setting and grouting materials. 1. Tile trim and accessories: Match color and finish of adjoining flat tile. B. Color Blending: Factory -blend tile products which have a natural color range so products taken from one box will have the same range as products from a separate box. 24646.00 09311 - 1 2.2 TILE PRODUCTS SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 09311 CERAMIC MOSAIC TILE A. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile, Factory - Mounted Flat Tile: 1. The design is based on the following product: a. Tile: (1) Manufacturer: Unglazed Floor Tile "; American Olean (2) Color: W68 -Black (U). 2. Trim units: Match color and finish of adjacent flat tile: a. Shapes and sizes: Manufacturer's standard as indicated; coordinated with adjacent flat tile, where applicable: (1) Corner bead. (2) Cove. (3) Surface bullnose. 2.3 SETTING MATERIALS A. Latex- Portland Cement Mortar: One - component dry grout mix, field -mixed with water; or two- component, dry grout mix and liquid latex additive, field- mixed; complying with ANSI A118.4. 1. All components premeasured and prepackaged. 2. Dry latex additive: Polyvinyl acetate or ethylene vinyl acetate. 3. Liquid latex additive: Manufacturer's standard water emulsion. 4. Mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2.4 GROUTING MATERIALS A. Latex - Portland Cement Grout: One - component dry grout mix, field -mixed with water; or two - component, dry grout mix and liquid latex additive, field- mixed; complying with ANSI A118.6. 1. All components premeasured and prepackaged. 2. Dry latex additive: Polyvinyl acetate or ethylene vinyl acetate. 3. Liquid latex additive: Manufacturer's standard water emulsion. 4. Mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 5. Colors: Selected by Owner, after contract award, from manufacturer's standards. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Tile Cleaner: Product specifically acceptable to tile manufacturer and grout manufacturer for application indicated and as recommended by National Tile Promotion Federation or Ceramic Tile Institute. 2.6 MIXING MORTAR AND GROUT A. Mix mortar and grout to comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's mixing procedures. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify with the installer that substrate areas where tile is to be installed have been prepared correctly, and that all backing materials have been installed. Correct unacceptable conditions before start of tile work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Factory - Blending: Before start of installation verify that tile with an anticipated range of colors has been correctly blended to achieve a uniform color range from tile package to tile package. 24646.00 09311 - 2 3.4 TILE APPLICATIONS 24646.00 3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 09311 CERAMIC MOSAIC TILE A. Tile Installation Standard: ANSI A108 series, for setting and grouting materials listed. B. Installation Methods: Comply with TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for type of applications indicated. C. Install tile under or behind equipment and fixtures. D. Carefully cut, drill, and grind tile to fit around items projecting through tile surface, so that escutcheons or cover plates conceal cut edges. E. Joint Patterns: Lay out tile according to patterns indicated on drawings, or if not shown, in a grid pattern with floor joints aligning with wall and trim joints. Install joints straight and of uniform width. F. Sealant - Filled Joints: Install expansion, control, and isolation joints where indicated on drawings. Saw -cut joints are unacceptable. 1. Expansion joint installation method: TCA EJ 171. G. Grout Installation Standards: 1. Ceramic tile grouts (sand - portland cement, dry -set, commercial portland cement, and latex - portland cement): ANSI A108.10. A. Interior Floor, Thin -Bed: 1. Installation method: a. Concrete subfloor: TCA F113. b. Bond coat: Latex - portland cement mortar, ANSI A108.5. 2. Grout: Latex - portland cement. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean tile surfaces after installation is complete. 1. Wipe latex - portland cement residue from tile with a damp cloth or sponge as soon as possible after tile installation. 2. Only clean unglazed tile with acid solutions when recommended by the tile manufacturer. If acid solution is an acceptable cleaner, wait minimum 14 days after installation to clean tile. Protect materials other than tile from the acid solution during cleaning process. B. Replace any broken, chipped, marred, or otherwise damaged tile before final acceptance. C. Protection: Apply neutral protective cleaner to tile after installation if recommended by tile manufacturer. Overlay completed tile installation with kraft paper for protection from subsequent construction activities. 1. Do not allow any traffic on completed tile floors for minimum 7 days after completion. 2. Remove protection, rinse, and dry tile installations before final review and acceptance. END OF SECTION 09311 - 3 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section. Includes: 1. Broadloom carpet. 2. Carpet accessories. 3. Rubber base. 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.4 PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 09680 CARPET B. Allow carpet materials to reach room temperature or minimum temperature recommended by manufacturer before installation. 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate work of this section with other work to ensure that installed carpeting materials are not damaged or soiled. 24646.00 09680 - 1 A. Shop Drawings: 1. For broadloom, show the following: a. Carpet direction, seaming plan, edge strip placement. b. Other details as necessary to clearly indicate arrangement of carpeting materials. 2. Include details for the following: a. Doorways. b. Walls /partitions. c. Carpet cutouts. B. Verification Samples: Submit the following to serve as standards for judging the completed work: 1. For each distinct color, pattern, or type indicated, submit sample 18 inches square which has been prepared from actual carpet to be installed. 2. Edging accessories: For each distinct edging accessory which will remain exposed after installation, submit sample 12 inches long. A. Installer's Qualifications: Firm regularly engaged in installation of products specified in this section, with a minimum of 5 years of experience. A. Fire Performance: Provide carpet materials capable of meeting the following requirements when tested in accordance with methods indicated, by UL (Underwriters Laboratories Inc.) or other independent testing agency acceptable to governing authorities. 1. Methenamine pill test (ASTM D 2859): Passes. A. Take measures as required to ensure materials are not damaged or deformed. Store products in flat position in properly ventilated, dry space. Use suitable means to prevent materials from lying in direct contact with the ground. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer, installer, and the Contractor, guaranteeing to correct failures in carpeting which occur within 10 years after substantial completion, without reducing or otherwise limiting any other rights to correction which Owner may have under the contract documents. Failures are defined to include faulty workmanship or faulty materials. Correction may include repair or replacement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain all of each different material from a single manufacturer. 2.2 MATERIALS A. "Carpet ": 1. Manufacturer: Shaw Commercial Carpet. 2. Product name: "Earls Court B1 ". 3. Product number: Style No. 50092 4. No substitutions. 5. Color /texture /pattern: #92530 6. • Installation method: Direct glue -down. 7. Edge guard: Vinyl or rubber. B. "Carpet Border ": 1. Manufacturer: Shaw Commercial Carpet 2. Product name: "Cypress Point IV ". 3. No substitutions. 4. Color /texture /pattern: #85352, Deep Olive 5. Installation method: Direct glue -down. 6. Edge guard: Vinyl or rubber. C. Rubber Base: 1. Style: Coved. 2. Manufacturer: Roppe 3. Color: "93 Blk Brown 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Provide accessories recommended by carpet manufacturer. B. Vinyl or Rubber Edge Guard: Minimum width of anchorage flange 2 inches, size and shape indicated, colors selected by the Owner from manufacturer's standards. C. Carpet Installation Adhesive: Manufacturer's recommended water - resistant adhesive manufactured for use with type of carpet and substrates indicated, and complying with fire performance requirements indicated for carpet. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 09680 CARPET A. General: Verify that substrates are completely dry, free of harmful substances, and in satisfactory condition to receive carpeting 24646.00 09680 - 2 i i 1 i 1 materials. SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 09680 CARPET B. Notify the Owner in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not begin installation until these conditions have been satisfactorily corrected. C. Start of installation work constitutes acceptance of substrate conditions and full responsibility for the completed work. D. Perform moisture and acidity tests on concrete surfaces where recommended by carpet manufacturer. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Follow carpet manufacturer's recommendations to ensure that each substrate is properly prepared to receive carpeting. Fill all cracks, gaps, and depressions using carpet manufacturer's recommended materials and methods. 1. Glue -down installation: Maximum variation in substrate 1/8 inch in 10 feet. B. Level off all high spots or ridges to prevent uneven carpet wear. C. Determine whether substrates are susceptible to dusting. Apply sealer where required to prevent formation of dust. D. Vacuum -clean substrates thoroughly, just prior to beginning installation. E. Maintain temperature of floor and relative humidity of rooms where carpet materials are to be installed at levels and for periods recommended by carpet manufacturer before, during, and after installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Perform installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where project conditions require extra precautions or provisions to ensure satisfactory performance of the work. 1. Maximize consistency of carpet appearance, particularly in terms of lay of pile and its direction. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for placement of seams. 2. Continue carpet into recessed spaces such as closets, and underneath obstacles with open bases. 3. Follow manufacturer's instructions for cutting carpet, using tools designed to cut type of carpet materials being installed. B. At door openings, orient carpet seam perpendicular to traffic direction; doorway seam must be located directly underneath door in closed position. 3.4 INSTALLATION - GLUE -DOWN CARPET A. Before applying adhesive to substrate, prefit carpet in areas where it is to be installed. Where cutting is necessary, provide properly prepared, straight, and unfrayed edges. 1. Seams: Conform to submitted seaming plan. B. Apply even layer of adhesive to substrate, using trowel of carpet manufacturer's recommended notch size. 24646.00 09680 - 3 C. Install prefitted carpet; butt edges snugly at seams and against vertical obstructions. 1. Stretch carpet tightly over substrate, so that it lies flat, is uniformly smooth, and free of bulges. 2. Apply seaming cement to butted edges. D. Install edge guards at exposed carpet edges unless indicated otherwise; provide secure attachment to substrate. E. After installation, lightly roll carpet as recommended by carpet manufacturer. F. Immediately remove adhesive from surface of carpet by method which will not damage carpet. 3.5 INSTALLATION - BASE A. Installation of Base: 1. Install base using maximum lengths available to minimize joints. Tightly bond base to substrate with full spread of adhesive, with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces. Adhere base in straight lines with top edges level and true and bottom edges fitted tightly to flooring material. 2. Install premolded corners before installing straight runs. 3. Form inside corners from straight pieces by cutting an inverted V- shaped notch in toe of base at the point where corner is formed. Shave back of base as necessary for snug fit to substrate. 4. Extend base into closets and alcoves off spaces with same flooring material. Install base where floor intersects vertical surfaces, including cabinet toe spaces, free standing columns, pilasters and walls. 5. On masonry surfaces, or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. 3.6 CLEANING SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 09680 CARPET A. Remove carpet remnants which are not usable; comply with Owner's instructions for final disposition of usable remnants. B. Use commercial - quality vacuum cleaner to thoroughly clean installed carpeting; trim loose yarns where required. C. Eliminate stains; Contractor shall pay for and replace carpet from which stains cannot be eliminated using carpet manufacturer's recommended products and methods. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect installation with a nonstaining building paper. Do not use a moisture barrier such as plastic film. B. Do not permit foot traffic or place furniture on glued -down carpet for a minimum of 48 hours after installation. 1. Do not wet -clean any glued -down carpet within 60 days of installation. C. Ensure that carpet will be clean and without deterioration or damage at date of substantial completion. 24646.00 END OF SECTION 09680 - 4 . *.,...,v 4.vw0 u (0 hY'i1.5M `HI,..Mq ....k......,.,._..... PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 1.2 A. Section. Includes: 1. Painting and finishing of exposed exterior items and surfaces. 2. Painting and finishing of exposed interior items and surfaces. 3. Field painting of architectural exposed structural steel members. 4. Field painting of precast concrete elements. 5. Field painting of exposed electrical items. B. Section does not include: 1. Factory finishing of manufactured products. 2. Painting of concealed surfaces, unless specifically indicated. 3. Prefinished metal surfaces. C. Related Sections: 1. Shop priming of architectural exposed structural steel: Division 5 DEFINITIONS SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 09900 PAINTING A. DFM (dry film mils): Thickness, measured in mils, of a coat of paint in the cured state. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical data sheets for each coating. 1. Material analysis including vehicle type and percentage by weight and by volume of vehicle, resin, and pigment. 2. Application instructions including mixing, surface preparation, compatible primers and topcoats, recommended wet and dry film thickness, recommended application methods. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials: 1. All coating materials required by this section shall be provided by a single manufacturer, unless otherwise required or approved. B. Applicator: Firm with not less than 5 years of successful experience in painting work similar in scope to work of this project. 1. Maintain throughout duration of the work a crew of painters who are fully qualified to satisfy requirements of the specifications. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original containers bearing coating name and color, material composition data, date of manufacture, legal notices if applicable, and mixing, thinning, and application instructions. B. Storage: 1. Store materials in an orderly fashion and in clean, well - closed containers with labels intact. 2. Maintain above 40 degrees F. Do not allow materials to freeze. 24646.00 09900 - 1 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply coatings only under the following environmental conditions: 1. Air and surface temperatures are between 50 and 100 degrees F, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer. 2. Surface temperature is at least 5 degrees F above dew point. 3. Relative humidity is less than 85 percent. B. Do not apply coatings during inclement weather except within enclosed, conditioned spaces. 1. Provide temporary lighting to achieve a well -lit surface with a level of at least 80 footcandles measured mid - height. 2. Provide continuous ventilation and heating to prevent accumulation of hazardous fumes and to maintain surface and ambient temperatures above 45 degrees F for 24 hours before, during, and for 48 hours after application of finishes, or longer if required to obtain fuel cure as indicated by manufacturer's instructions. 1.7 COORDINATION A. General: Perform work in proper sequence with work of other trades to avoid damage to finished work. B. Coordination: Where special coatings will be applied over shop coatings specified in other sections, coordinate work of such other sections to ensure that only approved, compatible primers are applied. 1. Furnish the Owner with product data on both coatings demonstrating coating compatibility. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 09900 PAINTING A. The brand -name products listed in the schedule at the end of this section and made by the following manufacturer are the basis of the contract documents: 1. Sherwin Williams Company. B. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered in accordance with standard substitution procedures: 1. The Glidden Company. 2. Benjamin Moore & Company. 3. Pratt & Lambert, Inc. 4. Sherwin Williams Company. 5. Miller Paint Company. 2.2 PRODUCTS A. Colors: 1. For multicoat systems, apply each coat using a successively darker tint or shade, unless approved otherwise. 2. Top coat colors: As shown on drawings. 24646.00 09900 - 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 09900 PAINTING A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready for work in accordance with coating manufacturer's recommendations. B. Prior to commencement of work, examine surfaces scheduled to be finished. 1. Report any unsatisfactory conditions in writing. 2. Do not apply coatings to unsatisfactory substrates. 3. Beginning painting work on an area will be deemed construed acceptance of surfaces in that area. A. Apply coatings to surfaces that are clean and properly prepared in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as herein specified. Remove dirt, dust, grease, oils, and foreign matter. Prepare surface for proper texture necessary to optimum coating adhesion and intended finished appearance. Plan cleaning, preparation, and coating operations to avoid contamination of freshly coated surfaces. 1. Do not apply coatings to labels that identify equipment, fire - resistance ratings, etc. 2. Remove hardware, cover plates, and similar items before applying coatings. 3. Provide protection for non - removable items not scheduled for coating. After application of coatings, install removed items. Use only skilled workmen for removal and replacement of such items. 4. Protect surfaces not scheduled for coating. Clean, repair, or replace to the satisfaction of the Owner any surfaces inadvertently spattered or coated. B. Wood: Water blast, sand and remove any sap or pitch deposits from surface and clean with mineral spirits. Seal any knots and pitch pockets with a suitable product recommended by the coating manufacturer. Sand rough spots. Remove dust. 1. After first coat has dried, fill holes, cracks, or depressions with a suitable wood filler recommended by the coating manufacturer. Sand filler when dry. 2. Sand surfaces lightly between successive coats. Remove dust. C. Ferrous Metal: 1. Clean and prepare surface profile in accordance with the applicable SSPC specifications for hand tool or power tool cleaning. 2. Intricate fabricated shapes may be pickled in lieu of hand or power tool cleaning. 3. Before hand or power tool cleaning, remove visible oil, grease, soluble welding residue, and salts by solvent cleaning. After hand or power tool cleaning, reclean surfaces if necessary. 4. Before touching up coatings damaged by handling or welding, reprepare damaged surfaces. D. Galvanized Metal: Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC specifications. E. Gypsum Board: 1. Latex -fill minor defects. 2. Spot -prime defects after repair. 09900 - 3 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 09900 PAINTING ............�... m . m ... �.,...< a ,..., �w... n•: ��. yac� :w:.ty:*.nrr:*:a�vxr,.scar.: F. Mildew: 1. Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of trisodium phosphate and bleach. 2. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. 3.3 MIXING AND THINNING A. Remove and discard any skin formed on surface of coatings in containers. Discard any containers where skin comprises 2 percent or more of the remaining material. Do not add thinner except as specifically recommended (not merely permitted) by the coating manufacturer for proper coating application under the circumstances prevailing at the project site when application equipment recommended by the coating manufacturer is employed. Use only the quantities and the types of thinner recommended. B. Mix materials using mechanical mixers in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions. Agitate mixed materials during application if recommended by manufacturer. C. Combine multi- component paints in quantities needed for use within the manufacturer's recommended pot life at the anticipated application temperatures. Discard remaining mixed material after pot life has expired. D. Strain pigmented coatings after mixing except where mechanical application equipment is provided with effective strainers. E. Tinting: Except where coating materials cannot be tinted, tint each successive coat of paint a sufficiently contrasting color to facilitate identification of complete coating coverage. 3.4 APPLICATION A. General: 1. Apply coatings in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions and using application method best suited for obtaining full, uniform coverage of surfaces to be coated. 2. Employ only application equipment that is clean, properly adjusted, in good working order, and of the type recommended by the coating manufacturer. 3. Apply each coat to achieve the dry film thickness per coat recommended by the coating manufacturer. Application rates in excess of those recommended and fewer numbers of coats than specified will not be accepted. 4. Completed coatings shall be free of defects such as runs, sags, variations in color, lap or brush marks, holidays, and skips. 5. Apply coatings according to the schedule at the end of this section and as otherwise indicated. Coat all similar surfaces not specifically mentioned unless specifically exempted. a. Ensure that all surfaces receive a dry film thickness equivalent to those of flat surfaces. 6. Coat front and back of miscellaneous items such as covers, access panels, and grilles. Apply fully finish coats behind movable items of furniture and equipment before installation. Apply prime coat only behind non - movable items of furniture and equipment before installation. 7. Sand gloss coats before applying subsequent coatings. B. Remove coatings not in compliance with this specification, reclean and re- prepare surfaces as specified, and apply coatings to comply with the contract documents. 24646.00 09900 - 4 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 09900 PAINTING C. Scheduling: 1. Apply first coat of material to properly prepared surfaces without delay. a. Apply successive coats within the time limits recommended by the manufacturer. D. Electrical Items: 1. Paint electrical items exposed to view in finished spaces and in equipment rooms. 2. Finish color to match color of surrounding surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3. Paint the following electrical items: a. Conduit and fittings. b. Panel enclosures. c. Others as indicated on drawings. 3.5 PRIME COATS A. General: 1. Field apply bottom coats scheduled except where the contract documents require shop coating of ferrous metals. 2. Where first coat shows signs of suction spots or poorly sealed areas, reapply first coat material to adequately seal surface before proceeding with successive coats. 3. Ferrous metals that have not been shop primed shall be field primed promptly after arrival at the site or shall be stored away from the effects of weather. 4. Reprepare and retouch damaged prime coats using approved, compatible primer. B. Primers for Wood and Wood Products: 1. Apply first coat to wood upon receipt at the site and before wood is exposed to sun or rain. 2. Before installation, prime both concealed and exposed surfaces of interior wood, including cut ends. 3. Finish tops, bottoms, edges, and cutouts of exterior wood doors as scheduled for exterior face. 3.6 FINISH COATS A. Number of Coats and Minimum Coating Thickness: 1. Apply not less than the number of coats indicated. 2. Apply each coat to achieve not less than the dry film thicknesses indicated per coat. 3. Apply additional coats at no additional cost to the Owner when necessary to achieve complete hiding, uniform texture, or uniform sheen and appearance. 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Cleaning: 1. Clean work area on a daily basis; dispose of spent materials and empty containers. If requested, turn over the Owner all empty coatings containers used during the course of each day. 2. Remove all trace of coatings from adjacent surfaces not scheduled to be coated. Remove by appropriate methods that do not damage surfaces. B. Protection: 1. Protect work against damage until fully cured. Provide signs identifying wet surfaces until surfaces are adequately cured. 24646.00 09900 - 5 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON SECTION 09900 PAINTING 2. Shortly before final completion of the project, examine surfaces for damage to coatings and restore coatings to new, undamaged condition. 3. Touch -up of minor damage will be acceptable where result is not visibly different from surrounding surfaces. Where result is different either in color, sheen, or texture, recoat entire surface. 3.8 SCHEDULE OF COATINGS FOR INTERIOR NONTRAFFIC SURFACES A. Gypsum Wallboard: 1. Acrylic Latex, semigloss. a. Bottom coat: ProMar 200 Interior Latex Wall Primer B28 W 200; 1.1 DFM. b. Intermediate coat: Same as top coat. c. Top coat: Proclassic 100% Acrylic Interior Latex Gloss Enamel B21 W 201; 2.0 DFM. B. Wood: 1. Acrylic Latex, gloss. a. Bottom coat: Preprite Classic Latex Primer; B28 W 101; 2.0 DFM. b. Intermediate coat: Same as top coat. c. Top coat: Proclassic 100% Acrylic Interior Latex Gloss Enamel B31; 2.0 DFM. 2. Varnish, satin. a. Bottom and intermediate coats: Polyurethane Varnish, High Gloss A67 V 1; 1.0 DFM. b. Top coat: Polyurethane Varnish, Satin A67 F 1; 1.0 DFM. C. Ferrous Metal: 1. Latex, gloss. a. Bottom coat: Latex Metal Primer B42 N 8; 3.0 DFM. b. Intermediate coat: Same as top coat. c. Top coat: Proclassic 100% Acrylic Interior Latex Gloss Enamel B21 W 201; 2.0 DFM. 3.9 SCHEDULE OF COATINGS FOR EXTERIOR NONTRAFFIC SURFACES A. Ferrous Metal: 1. Architectural Exposed Structural Steel Members. a. Finish: Satin - Overall Coating Mil Thickness: 6.0 to 10.0 dry mils in addition to the shop applied primer.. b. Intermediate coat: Tnemec Series 66 -AA90 Epoxoline Primer (Dry mil thickness - 3.0 to 5.0 mils). c. Top Coat: Tnemec Series 175 Endura- Shield Aliphatic Acrylic Urethane (Dry mil thickness - 3.0 to 5.0 mils). B. Galvanized Metal: 1. Alkyd, gloss. a. Bottom coat: Galvite Paint B50 W 3; 2.0 DFM. b. Intermediate coat: Same as top coat. c. Top coat: Industrial Enamel B54 Series; 2.0 DFM. C. Precast Concrete Caps: 1. Surface Preparation: Clean and Dry. 2. Finish: Tenemec "Series 55 Tneme- crete ", Flat, smooth (8.0 to 10.0 Mils). 24646.00 09900 - 6 „ • • 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE'. TUKWILA,. WASHINGTON SECTION 09900 PAINTING Miscellaneous Wood: 1. Acrylic Latex, flat. a. 'Bottom coat: A-100 Alkyd Exterior Wood Primer; B49; 2.0 DFM. b. Intermediate coat: Same as top coat. c. Top coat: SuperPaint Exterior Acrylic Latex Flat House & Trim; A80; 2.0 DFM. Wood Siding (T1-11): 1. Acrylic Latex, flat. a. Bottom coat: A-100 Exterior Wood Primer; B42; 2.0 DFM. b. Intermediate coat: Same as top coat. c. Top coat: SuperPaint Exterior Acrylic Latex Flat House & Trim; A80; 2.0 DFM. COLOR SCHEDULE A. PT-1: Sherwin-Williams, Sculpture Gray SW 1030 LRV 55%, E. PT-2: Sherwin-Williams, Dover White SW 1648 LRV 85%. C. , Sherwin-Williams, Heavy Metal SW 1035 LRV 9%. D. PT-4: Sherwin-Williams, Dolphin SW 1034 LRV 25%. E. • • PT-5: Benjamin Moore 294. F. Precast Concrete Caps: Tnemec "Tea Biscuit" YB11, LRV-57.2 END OF SECTION 09900 - 7 PART 1 - MINERAL SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 GENERAL Conform to the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and related work in other Divisions for all work in Division 16. See Division 1 for sequence of work. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK It is the intention of this Division of the Specifications and the accompanying drawings to describe and provide for the furnishing, installing, testing and placing in satisfactory and fully operational condition all equipment, materials, devices and necessary appurtenances to provide a complete electrical system, together with such other miscellaneous installations and equipment hereinafter specified and /or shown on the drawings. The work shall include all materials, appliances and apparatus not specifically mentioned herein or shown on the drawings, but which are necessary to make a complete, fully operational installation of all electrical systems shown on the drawings or described herein. Equipment and devices furnished and installed under other Divisions of this specification (or the Owner) shall be connected under this Division. The drawings and specifications are complementary and what is called for in either is binding as if called for in both. 1.3 WORK IN OTHER DIVISIONS See all other divisions of specifications for other work which includes but is not limited to: 24646.00 Temporary Power Cutting and Patching Painting, Refinishing and Finishes Equipment Wiring 1.4 CODES AND REGULATIONS A. If any conflict occurs between government adopted code rules and this Specification, the codes are to govern. Nothing in these drawings and specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming with the governing codes. Also, this shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from complying with any requirements of the drawings or specifications which may be in excess of requirements of the hereinbefore mentioned governing codes and rules and not contrary to same. B. The electrical systems shall be installed based on the following current Standards. NFPA 70 1996 National Electrical Code as adopted and amended by the State of Washington AND City of Tukwila Uniform Building Code International Conference of Building Officials as adopted and amended by the Local Jurisdiction. 16010 - 1 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS The Contractor is required to familiarize himself with the detailed requirements of these standards and any local codes and ordinances as they affect the installation of specific electrical systems. 1.5 PERMITS AND FEES The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all licenses, permits and inspections required by laws, ordinances and rules governing work specified herein. The Contractor shall arrange for inspection of work by the inspectors and shall give the inspectors all necessary assistance in their work of inspection. 1.6 COORDINATION A. The Contractor responsible for accomplishing Division 16 work shall coordinate his work with that of the other Contractors and /or other trades doing work on the project and shall examine all drawings and specifications of other trades including the mechanical, architectural, and structural for construction details and necessary coordination. B. Obtain submittals and shop drawings of all equipment with electrical connections furnished under other divisions of the specifications. Provide all wiring in accordance with requirements indicated. Advise the Architect of any changes which may affect the contract price. C. Special attention is called to the following items and all conflicts shall be coordinated prior to installation. 24646.00 1. Door swings to the end that switches will be located on the "strike" side of the door. 2. Location of grilles, pipes, sprinkler heads, ducts and other mechanical equipment so that all electrical outlets, lighting fixtures and other electrical outlets and equipment are clear from and in proper relation to these items. 3. Location of cabinets, counters and doors so that electrical outlets, lighting fixtures and equipment are clear from and in proper relation to these items. 4. Recessing and concealing electrical materials in CMU walls, concrete construction, precast construction and similar construction methods. 5. Electrical characteristics (HP, KVA, voltage, phase) of actual equipment furnished under other divisions being different from that shown on the electrical drawings. D. The Contractor will not be paid for relocation of work, cuttings, patching and finishing required for work requiring reinstallation due to lack of coordination prior to installation. 1.7 CONTRACT DRAWINGS A. Raceways, boxes and ground connections are shown diagrammatically only and indicate the general character and approximate location. The layout 16010 - 2 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS does not necessarily show the total number of raceways or boxes for the circuits required, nor are the locations of indicated rune intended to show the actual routing of the raceways. The Contractor shall furnish, install and place in satisfactory condition all raceways, boxes, conductors and connections and all other materials required for the electrical systems shown or noted in the contract documents to be complete, fully operational and fully tested upon completion of the project. B. The drawings do not show all requirements of the specifications. The drawings and specifications are complementary and what is called for (or shown) in either is required to be provided as if called for in both. C. The horsepower of motors and apparatus wattages shown on the drawings are estimated requirements of equipment furnished under other Divisions of this contract and bid shall be based on these sizes. Overload elements shall be provided to suit actual equipment nameplate current. Advise Architect of any equipment changes or substitutions affecting electrical systems. Conform to Substitution Requirements, Section 16100. D. Any minor changes (less than 6' -6" horizontal) in the location of the raceways, outlets, boxes, devices, wiring, etc., from those shown on the drawings shall be made without extra charge, where coordination requires or if so directed by the Architect before rough -in. E. Contractor shall consult the architectural drawings for the exact height and location of all electrical equipment not specified herein or shown on the drawings. F. Outlet locations shown on the drawings are approximate. Contractor shall study the building drawings in relation to spaces and equipment surrounding each outlet so that the outlet is correctly positioned and symmetrically located for proper usage. Lighting fixtures are to be symmetrically located according to ceiling tile and room layout. G. When inserts or sleeves for outlet boxes, conductors, cables and /or raceways are required, Contractor shall provide and shall fully coordinate the installation thereof with other trades. H. Electrical drawings to be utilized for electrical construction only. These drawings do not show the work of other trades 1.8 ITEMIZED SCHEDULE OF COSTS Furnish a contract cost breakdown by specification section to the Architect with a copy to the Engineer to allow evaluation of partial payment requests. Refer to the Supplementary Conditions of General Contract for details, and conform thereto. 1.9 WARRANTY The Contractor shall guarantee all work installed under this specification. He shall make good, repair or replace, at his own expense, any defective work, materials or parts which may show 24646.00 16010 - 3 . %�«+ -...., .. 1.10 RECORD DRAWINGS Continually record the actual electrical system(s) installation on a set of prints kept readily available at the project during construction. These prints shall be used for this purpose alone. Accurately locate with exact dimensions all underground and underelab raceways and stub- outs. At the completion of the work, Contractor shall furnish the Architect a set of reproducible record drawings (xerox type) and the set of mark -ups. Final payment to the Contractor will not be authorized until these prints have been submitted to and accepted by the Architect. 1.11 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUALS A. The Contractor shall prepare four (4) O&M manuals for all equipment furnished under Division 16 of the specifications. B. The information included must be the exact equipment installed, not the complete "line" of the manufacturer. Where sheets show the equipment installed and other equipment, the installed equipment shall be neatly and clearly identified on such sheets. C. These 0 & M manuals shall contain all the information needed to operate and maintain all systems and equipment provided in the project. It shall be presented and arranged in a logical manner for efficient use by the Owner's operating personnel. The information provided shall include but not be limited to the following: 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS themselves within one year after final acceptance, if in the opinion of the Architect said defect is due to imperfection in material, design or workmanship. Incandescent lamps are not warranted, but all shall be operating at time of final acceptance. 1. Equipment manufacturer, make, model number, size, etc. 2. Equipment nameplate data. 3. Description of system configuration and operation including component identification and interrelations. A master control schematic drawing(s) may be required for this purpose. 4. Dimensional and performance data for specific unit provided as appropriate. 5. Manufacturer's recommended operation instructions as appropriate. 6. Manufacturer's recommended lubrication and servicing data including frequency as appropriate. 7. Complete parts list including reordering information, recommended spares and anticipated useful life (if appropriate). Parts lists shall give full ordering information assigned by the original parts manufacturer. Relabeled and /or renumbered parts information as reassigned by equipment supplier not acceptable. 8. Shop drawings. 16010 - 4 24646.00 9. Wiring diagrams. SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS 10. Signal equipment submittals shall contain step -by -step circuit description information designed to acquaint maintenance personnel with equipment operation in each mode of operation. D. Wiring diagrams for each system shall be complete drawings for the specific system installed under the contract. "Typical" line diagrams will not be acceptable unless properly marked to indicate the exact field installation. E. The information contained in the manuals shall be grouped in an orderly arrangement by specification index. The manuals shall have a typewritten index and divider sheets between categories with identifying tabs. The completed manuals shall be bound with hard board covers. The covers shall be imprinted with the name of the job, Owner, Architect, Electrical Engineer, Contractor and year of completion. The back edge shall be imprinted with the name of the job, Owner and year of completion. Hard board covers and literature contained may be held together with screw post bindings. Bayless Bindery (206) 622 -6395 acceptable. F. A preliminary copy, complete except for the bound cover, shall be submitted 60 days prior to completion of the project for checking and review. Four (4) bound, final, corrected copies shall be provided. Deliver one (1) to Sparling, Inc. Deliver three (3) to the Owner via the Architect 20 days prior to scheduled instruction periods. Obtain a receipt for the manuals and forward a copy of the receipt to both the Architect and Engineer with the completed form. 1.12 INSTRUCTION PERIODS After substantial completion of the work and 20 days after the 0 & M manuals have been delivered to the owner and after all teats and final inspection of the work by the Authority(s) Having Jurisdiction; the Contractor shall demonstrate the electrical systems and instruct the Owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in the operation and maintenance of the various electrical systems. The Contractor shall arrange scheduled instruction periods with the Owner. The Contractor's representatives shall be superintendents or foremen knowledgeable in each system and suppliers representatives when so specified. Scheduled instruction periods shall be: 1. Lighting Control 2 hours 1.13 FINAL ACCEPTANCE REQUEST The Contractor shall submit to the Architect, with a copy to the Engineer, a Job Completion Form (form attached in this section) properly filled out prior to the time final acceptance of the electrical work is requested. At this time also submit copies of final inspection certificates and receipts for loose materials (keys, etc.) turned over to the Owner. 16010 - 5 PROJECT NAME: PROJECT LOCATION: DATE: A. Electrical Inspectors Final Acceptance Copy of certificate attached. Name B. Fire Marshal's Final Acceptance of Fire Alarm System Copy of certificate attached. Name 1. Lighting & Power Systems •SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS JOB COMPLETION FORM Agency Date Agency Date w C. The following systems have been demonstrated to Owner's representative. Owner's Rep. Date D. Record Drawings Attached Transmitted previously to Date E. 0 & M Manuals Attached Transmitted previously to Date F. Test Reports Attached Transmitted previously to Date G. The work is complete in accordance with contract documents and authorized changes except for and the architect /engineer's representative is requested to meet with at on Supervisor of Electrical Work Time Date Contractors Rep. Signature Date Note: Additional copies of this form are available from Sparling, Inc., 720 Olive Way, Suite 1100, Seattle, WA 98101. 24646.00 16010 - 6 1.14 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS When the following abbreviations and definitions are used in relation the work for Divisions 16 they shall have the following meanings: 24646.00 Item Meaning Accepted Reviewed with no exceptions taken to eubmittal material. See "Submittal" below. AHJ Authority Having Jurisdiction ANSI American National Standards Institute Approved Inspected and accepted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction ASTM Boxes Code NEC SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS American Society for Testing Materials Outlet, Junction or Pull Boxes All codes currently enforced at project location. Compression Compressed using a leverage powered (hydraulic or equivalent) crimping tool Connection All materials and labor required for equipment fully operational. EMT Electrical Metallic Tubing Exterior Outside of or penetrating the outer surfaces of the Location building weather protective membrane. Fully Oper- Tested and approved and operating to the satisfaction ational of the AHJ, manufacturer and contract documents Furnish Deliver to the jobsite ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association Install To enter permanently into the project and make fully operational. RCM Thousand circular mils (formerly MCM) Mfr. Manufacturer National Electrical Code, National Fire Protection Association Publication 170 (latest adopted edition with amendments) NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association 16010 - 7 to be to ..„ .. • "• • Noted • . . ;PVC • .. Provide 24646.00 RGS • Shop Drawing • Shown SubMittal • ; . UL Wiring SOUTHCENTER , CORPORATE :SQUARE SECTION 16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS National Fire Protection Association • ShOwn or specified in the contract documents Polyvinyl Chloride : Furnish and install Rigid Galvanized Steel Required• As required by code, AHJ or contract documents for the particular installation to be fully operational. Hand draftecUdocument which fully details the equipment and intended installation relative this specified project. As indicated on the drawings or details. Material for Engineer review which may contain catalog cuts, shop drawings, wiring diagrams, etc., of the actual material being furnished. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Raceway, conductors and connections END OF SECTION 16010 - 8 • • " • ? PART 1 - GENERAL 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16030 TESTING 1.1 DESCRIPTION Test and provide written certification that the entire electrical installation complies with contract documents, code and proper system operation. Perform acceptance testa in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, NFPA 70B and International Electrical Testing Association (NETA) testing specifications NETA ATS -1991. 1.2 SCHEDULE Perform all testing after installation. All systems shall pass tests prior to substantial completion or owner occupancy. 1.3 RECEPTACLE AND DEVICE TEST A. Receptacle Polarity Test: Test every receptacle installed or reconnected under this contract with a receptacle circuit tester. Tester shall test for open ground, reverse polarity, open hot, open neutral, hot and ground reversed, hot or neutral and hot open. Rewire receptacles with faults and retest. Submit test report signed by electrician that performed the test. B. Ground -Fault Receptacle Circuit Interrupter Tests: Test each receptacle or branch circuit breaker having ground -fault circuit protection to assure that the ground -fault circuit interrupter will not operate when subjected to a ground -fault current of less than 4 milliamperes and will operate when subjected to a ground -fault current exceeding 6 milliamperes. Perform testing using an instrument specifically designed and manufactured for testing ground -fault circuit interrupters. Apply the test to the receptacle. "TEST" button operation will not be acceptable as a substitute for this test. Replace receptacles that do not shutoff power with 5/1000 of an ampere within 1 /40th of a second and retest. C. Operational Tests: Demonstrate the operation of each switch, circuit breaker and other item of electrical control with the systems fully energized and operating. Each shall be demonstrated three times. 1.4 600 VOLT WIRING A. Scope: Test all electrical feeders whose operating voltage is 600 volts or less that are installed or reconnected under this contract. B. Test for continuity of each circuit. C. Test for grounds in each circuit which shall consist of the physical examination of the installation to ensure that all required ground jumpers, devices, and appurtenances do exist and are mechanically firm. D. Perform a 500 volt megohm meter test on each circuit between the conductor and ground. The insulation resistance shall not be less than 2 megohms for circuits under 115V, 6 megohms between conductor and ground on those circuits (115V -600V) with total single conductor length of 2,500 feet and over, nor lees than 8 megohms for those circuits 16030 - 1 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16030 TESTING (115V -600V) with single conductor length of less than 2,500 feet. If conductor fails test replace wiring or correct defect and retest. E. Perform torque test for every conductor tested and terminated in an overcurrent device or bolted type connection; torque all connections per manufacturers recommendations and tabulate the results on a tabular form. 1.5 POWER SYSTEM TESTS A. Scope. Inspect and test entire electrical systems provided by this contract to verify equipment and controls are correctly operating. B. Load Balance Tests: Checks all panelboards for proper load balance between phase conductors and make adjustments as necessary to bring unbalanced phases to within 15% of average load. ?ART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT The Contractor shall provide all apparatus and material required for testing. The Contractor shall use installation tools and test equipment which are designed for the specific task and shall use this equipment per the manufacturer's instructions. All test equipment shall have current calibration certification by a third party calibration laboratory, and shall have a signed and dated calibration sticker affixed to the device. Calibration shall be traceable to the National Bureau of Standards and be less than 6 months since last calibration. Defective test equipment and installation tools shall not be used. Installation tools such as torque wrenches shall be calibration certified. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE Notify Architect 10 working days prior to performance of any test. .lwnwrt Vial• . 3.3 TEST REPORTS A. The Contractor shall prepare test reports including description of project, description of equipment tested, description of test, test results, conclusions and recommendations, retesting results and list of test equipment used and calibration date. B. One copy of each test report shall be delivered directly to the electrical engineer and Owner within 7 calendar days of the test. C. Insert a copy of each test report in the operation and maintenance manuals. END OF SECTION 24646.00 16030 - 2 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section contains the general requirements for materials and installation methods which apply to all sections of Division 16. All materials and equipment shall be installed in conformance with the manufacturer's installation instructions and U.L. requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16100 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 2.1 GENERAL A. All materials to be new, free from defects and not less than quality herein specified. Materials shall be designed to insure satisfactory operation and operational life in the environmental conditions which will prevail where they are being installed. B. Each type of materials furnished shall be of the same make, be standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in production of such materials and be the manufacturer's latest standard design. C. All materials and equipment installed, including lighting fixtures, shall have been tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories or other approved testing organization and shall be so labeled unless otherwise permitted by the Code Inspector (AHJ) and the Architect. 2.2 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS A. Listing of materials is not intended to prevent listing of other material provided the substitute product is submitted for listing and has been reviewed and listed in accordance with the following Substitution of Materials requirements. 24646.00 1. No Substitute: It is the intent of this specification to require new materials to be compatible with the existing installation and to this end certain materials and systems are indicated "No Substitute" and shall be provided as specified. 2. Listing Prior to Bid Opening: Listing of products other than those specified will be issued after the following requirements are met: Requests to be original material, clearly indicating the product fully complies with contract documents and be neatly marked with yellow felt tip marker to clearly define and describe the product for which listing is requested. Include certified laboratory test report for lighting fixtures. Samples shall be submitted if requested. Requests shall be received prior to 10 days before bid opening. Requests containing insufficient information to confirm compliance with contract documents will not be considered. 3. After Award of Contract: 16100 - 1 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16100 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Substitution of products will be considered after award of contract only under the following conditions: a. The Contractor shall have placed orders for specified materials promptly after contract is awarded. b. The reason for the unavailability is beyond the Contractor's control, i.e., due to strikes, bankruptcy, discontinuance of manufacture, acts of God. c. Requests for substitutions shall be made in writing and shall be accompanied by complete description of the material or equipment. B. In all cases, should a substituted material result in requiring electrical system or building modifications; the Contractor alone shall pay all costs to provide these modifications including all costs to the Engineer and Architect for redesign time required to accommodate the required modifications. 2.3 COMPLETE SYSTEMS All the systems mentioned shall be complete in every detail and fully operational upon completion of the project unless specifically noted otherwise. Mention of certain materials in these specifications shall not be construed as releasing the Contractor from furnishing such additional materials and performing all labor required to provide complete and fully operational systems. 2.4 SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submittals: Within 30 days after award of contract, submit common brochure(s) with index and divider tabs by specification section, containing all required catalog cute, to the Architect in a three ring binder with hardboard cover. The data shall indicate listing by U.L. or other approved testing agency and contain sufficient information neatly highlighted with yellow or blue marker to demonstrate that the materials being submitted fully comply with contract documents. Each item submitted shall have been stamped "Reviewed and Approved" by the Contractor prior to review by the Architect. (Note: Submittals and shop drawings which are incomplete or which contain insufficient information will be returned for reeubmittal.) See General Conditions for format, quantity, etc. B. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall be submitted as soon as available but not later than 45 days after award of contract. Shop drawings shall show the ratings of items and systems and how the components of an item or system are assembled, interconnected, function together and how they will be installed on the project. System layout drawings shall show floor plans with complete device layout and point -to -point wiring and connection diagrams between all components of the system. Show wire sizes and color coding. C. The contractor agrees that submittals and shop drawings processed by the Architect are not change orders; that the purpose of submittals and shop 24646.00 16100 - 2 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16100 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS drawings by the Contractor is to demonstrate to the Engineer that the Contractor understands the design concept, that he demonstrates his understanding by indicating which equipment and material he intends to furnish and install and by detailing the fabrication and installation methods he intends to use. The Contractor alone accepts all responsibility for assuring that all materials furniehed under this Division of the specifications meet in full all requirements of the contract documents. The Engineer's review is for general conformance with the design concept and contract documents. Markings or comments shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from compliance with the project plans and specifications, nor departures therefrom. The Contractor remains responsible for details and accuracy for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions, for selecting fabrication processes and for techniques of assembly. D. Submittals are required for: Contract Cost Breakdown Raceways, Wire and Cables Wiring Devices Lighting Fixtures and Ballasts Lighting Control PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CUTTING BUILDING CONSTRUCTION A. Obtain permission from the Architect and coordinate with other trades prior to cutting. Locate cuttings so they will not weaken structural components. Cut carefully and only the minimum amount necessary. Cut concrete with diamond core drills or concrete saws except where space limitations prevent the use of such tools. B. All construction materials damaged or cut into during the installation of this work must be repaired or replaced with materials of like kind and quality as original materials by skilled labor experienced in that particular building trade. 3.2 EXCAVATIONS A. Excavations shall not disturb or injure walls, footings, existing underground utilities or other property. B. Remove all surplus earth not needed for backfilling and dispose of same as directed. 3.3 PENETRATIONS OF FIRE RATED ELEMENTS Must be provided such as to retain that rating. 3.4 PAINTING A. Painting in general will be covered under another Division of this specification, except items furnished under this Division that are scratched or marred in shipment or installation shall be refinished. 16100 - 3 'SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16100 BASIC MATERIALS'AND METHODS B. Exposed raceways and /or Wiremold (when allowed) in finished areas, shall be painted with two coats of oil based paint. Paint color shall match color of surface the raceway is attached to. 3.5 CLEAN UP Contractor shall continually remove debris, cuttings, crates, cartons, etc., created by his work. Such clean up shall be done daily and at sufficient frequency to eliminate hazard to the public, other workmen, the building or the Owner's employees. Before acceptance of the installation, Contractor shall carefully clean cabinets, panels, lighting fixtures, wiring devices, cover plates, etc., to remove dirt, cuttings, paint, plaster, mortar, concrete, etc. Blemishes to finished surfaces of apparatus shall be removed and new finish equal to the original applied. 3.6 WORKMANSHIP AND OBSERVATION A. Workmanship shall be of the best quality and none but competent and experienced electricians shall be employed and shall be under the supervision of a competent and experienced foreman. All completed work shall represent a neat and orderly appearance. B. All work and materials shall be subject to observation at any and all times by representatives of the Architect. 3.7 EQUIPMENT CONNECTION A. For equipment furnished under this or other Divisions of the specifications, or by owner; provide complete all electrical connections necessary to serve such equipment and provide required control connections to all equipment so that the equipment is fully operational upon completion of the project. Whenever the drawings show an equipment connection the Contractor shall provide the code required disconnect switch. B. Prior to rough -in, obtain submittals and shop drawings for all equipment requiring electrical connections being furnished under other divisions of the specifications and by the owner. Provide all wiring per the wiring diagrams and requirements indicated. 3.8 INTERFACE WITH OTHER TRADES A. The Contractor shall continually interface and coordinate the electrical work with the work of other trades. 24646.00 END OF SECTION 16100 - 4 PART 1 - GENERAL SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1.1 DESCRIPTION Provide all raceway systems complete and in conformance with code. 2.1 RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RGS) AND INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC) A. Hot dipped galvanized steel. Fittings: Galvanized malleable iron or noncorrosive alloy threaded fittings compatible with galvanized conduit. Erickson couplings, watertight split couplings, similar to OZ permitted. Set screw and running thread fittings not permitted. B. Wherever rigid galvanized steel conduit is specified, intermediate metal conduit is permitted unless noted or required otherwise. 2.2 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A. Not dip galvanized, electrogalvanized or sherardized, steel tubing. B. Couplings and Connectors: Raintight; steel or malleable iron type using a split corrugated compression ring and tightening nut or stainless steel locking disc. Steel set screw fittings are permitted. Indenter, drive -on and pressure cast or diecast type fittings are not permitted. 2.3 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Galvanized, or zinc coated flexible steel for dry locations. Aluminum and flexible metallic tubing not permitted. Fittings: malleable iron or steel, similar to Thomas and Betts "squeeze" type. B. Liquid Tight Flexible Metal Conduit. PVC weatherproof cover over flexible steel conduit. Fittings: similar to Thomas and Betts "Super - Tite". 2.4 METAL SURFACE RACEWAY Formed steel type. Standard Factory painted finish. Where color choice is available, consult Architect for selection. Manufacturer: Wiremold. 2.5 RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT (PVC) Schedule 40, rigid polyvinyl chloride type, unless noted otherwise. Type EB permitted for underground rebar reinforced concrete duct banks. PVC elbows not permitted. 2.6 EXPANSION FITTINGS Malleable iron, hot dip galvanized allowing 4" ( +/ -2 ") conduit movement. O -Z /Gedney type AX series. 2.7 RACEWAY PENETRATION SEALS Thruwall and Floor Seals: New Construction - OZ /Gedney FSK Series, existing construction - OZ /Gedney CSM Series. 2.8 RACEWAY SEALING FITTINGS 24646.00 16110 - 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS 16110 - 2 ..+...+.., v........ a��.,. a.. nw. avexta�: r.<: ayn� •t� ;a�?!iSK:r.4CVC±� ".uvrs: For one through four conductors: OZ /Gedney CSB Series. For greater than four conductors: OZ /Gedney EYA Series with sealing compound. Low Temperature or Hazardous Locations: OZ /Gedney EYA Series with sealing compound. 3.1 GENERAL A. Provide raceways concealed in construction unless noted otherwise or unless specifically authorized by the Architect. B. Supports, bending, reaming and threading of raceway shall conform with code. 3.2 RIGID METAL AND INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT All connections watertight. Shall be used for: 1) all raceways where subject to damage, 2) all stubups in concrete, 3) all stubouts through concrete walls or from slabs, 4) where exposed to weather. 3.3 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) Provide for wiring in masonry or frame construction and for wiring in furred ceilings and above suspended ceilings. May be used for exposed work in unfinished areas where not subject to damage. Where construction involves masonry work, assemble and install at the same time as the wall is erected. Avoid surface cut masonry units wherever such masonry units are to remain unplastered or uncovered in completed construction. EMT not permitted to be encased in concrete slabs. 3.4 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT Provide flexible raceway connection with 90 degree loop minimum for isolation to 1) motors 2) transformers and 3) to all other equipment subject to vibration, (i.e. control equipment, such as solenoid valves, pressure controls, aquastats, pneumatic electric relays, etc.). Provide liquid tight for pumps, for equipment in areas which are regularly washed down, and for equipment in damp or wet locations. Provide code bonding jumper. 3.5 METAL SURFACE RACEWAY Verify exact mounting and locations with Architect prior to rough -in. Install parallel to a building surface (i.e., wall, ceiling, floor). Fasten to surface as recommended by manufacturer. Mount so raceway is in the least obvious location. Ream all cuts smooth. Provide all required boxes, extensions, fittings, elbows and devices for a complete installation. Provide bushings in ends of Wiremold 500 and 700 runs at all boxes and devices. 3.6 RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT A. When permitted by code, may be used underground, or where completely encased with 2" of concrete (or as required by code). Exception: Use rigid steel for elbows, penetrations through floors and walls and stub ups. Raceway size may need to be increased to include code required SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS ground wire. Provide expansion joints per code. Field bends limited to less than 44 degrees, formed with manufacturer's recommended heater. B. Fire alarm and clock systems in raceway shall be in steel raceway. 3.7 RACEWAYS UNDERGROUND A. Rigid galvanized steel with a 15 mil. PVC jacket (repair abrasions with two coats PVC base paint). Option: Two applications of Scotchrap primer and 51 tape, 1/2 lapped, each application. Rigid nonmetallic raceways may be used where permitted by code unless noted otherwise. B. Arrange and slope raceways entering building to drain away from building. C. Provide marker tape over underground raceways. Marker tape to read "Caution - Electric Line Buried Below" as manufactured by Terra Tape or accepted equal. Install 1' -0" below grade. D. Install underground raceways a minimum of 24" below final grade (36" on public property) unless otherwise noted or required. E. Provide backfill around underground raceways. Use clean sand 6" above and below raceways. Backfill above 6" shall be free of debris or rocks greater than 1" in diameter. Space raceways 7 -1/2" minimum between centers and 3" minimum between raceways. F. Anchor raceways encased in concrete to prevent floating during pour. 3.8 RACEWAYS THAT STUB UP THROUGH FLOOR Install at such depth that the exposed raceway is vertical and no curved section of the elbow is visible. 3.9 RACEWAY PENETRATION SEALS A. Exterior wall surfaces above grade: Provide watertight seal around all raceways. For concrete construction above ground level, cast raceway in wall or core drill wall and hard pack with a mixture of equal parts of sand and cement. For other types of construction use method acceptable to Architect. B. Exterior surfaces below grade: Provide watertight seal around all raceways. Cast raceway into wall (or floor) or use manufactured seal assembly. C. Roofs: Provide flashed and hot mopped weatherproof seal, or a pitch pan filled and sealed to be weatherproof where raceway penetrates roof membrane. Provide a weatherhead on all raceway stubups penetrating roof. D. Fire rated construction: Seal penetrations to maintain fire rating of construction penetrated. Caulk around penetration with Thomas & Betts Flame -Safe Compound, 3M Fire Barrier Caulk, Nelson Electric Flameseal or Dow Corning Silicone RTV foam. Install as recommended by manufacturer. 24646.00 16110 - 3 3.10 RACEWAYS SEALING FITTINGS A. Provide watertight seal in the interior of all raceways which pass through building roof, ground floor slab or through outside walls of the building above or below grade. Seal on the end inside the building, using raceway sealing fittings manufactured for the purpose. Seal poured type fittings with a non - hardening compound manufactured for such service. B. Provide sealing fittings for all raceways entering freezers and refrigeration units. 3.11 HANGERS FOR RACEWAYS A. Raceways 1" and larger: Provide lay -in pipe hangers on 3/8" all threaded rods attached to metal ceiling inserts or to structural members at not greater than 10' -0" on center and within 12" of each change in direction. B. When more than two raceways will use the same routing, group together on a patented channel trapeze support system supported by 3/8" (minimum) threaded rode attached to metal ceiling inserts or structural members. C. Suspended ceiling systems: Do not attach raceways to ceiling suspension system hangers. Raceways 3/4" and smaller serving equipment located within ceiling cavity or mounted on or supported by the ceiling grid system may be supported by dedicated #9 ga. galvanized, soft annealed mild steel wire hangers. Two raceways maximum per hanger. Attach raceways with clips manufactured for the purpose. Attach hangers to structure and to ceiling system. 3.12 PULL CORDS A. Provide a pull cord in all raceways for communications and telephone systems. B. In other raceways, provide a nylon pull cord in those which are left empty at end of the project, greater than 25 feet in length. 3.13 PROXIMITY TO HIGH TEMPERATURE SURFACES Maintain 12" minimum clearance. 3.14 RACEWAY FILL Raceways not sized on the drawings shall be sized per NEC Table 3A. Raceways for signal and communications systems shall be sized per the shop drawings and code. 3.15 EXPANSION FITTINGS Provide expansion fittings for raceways crossing expansion joints, building separation walls, and seismic joints. Provide bonding jumper. 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS END OF SECTION 16110 - 4 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide all conductors, splices and terminations, complete. B. Refer to Section 16700 and specific sections following for limited energy wiring and conductors. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 POWER CONDUCTORS A. Copper, 600V insulation, UL labeled, brought to project in original containers. Aluminum or copper clad aluminum conductors not permitted. B. Interior and above grade: All conductors to be type THW or RHW. Type THWN /THHN or XHHW conductors may be utilized at Contractor's option, subject to code requirements. Conductors #8 and larger stranded, #10 and #12 solid. C. Underground: Rome -XLP type USE /RHW insulation or equal. Exception: Underground conductors completely contained in code recognized raceway and boxes may be type THW, THWN or XHHW. Type OF direct burial not permitted unless shown on the drawings. D. Conductor insulation color code: 2.2 SPLICES A. Above Grade: Solderlees type. Preinsulated "twist -on" type (limited to size #10 and smaller). Bolt or compression set type with application of preformed insulated cover, heat shrinkable tubing or plastic insulated tape acceptable for all sizes. B. Below Grade: Provide in handholes with watertight epoxy resin type splicing kits similar to Scotchcast. 2.3 TERMINATIONS A. Compression set, bolted or screw type lug or direct to bolted or screw type terminal. B. Conductors #12 and smaller: Provide eye or forked tongue compression set terminator at bolted or screw set type terminal block or terminal cabinet. 2.4 PLASTIC CABLE TIES Nylon or equivalent, locking type. 24646.00 16120 - 1 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16120 CONUCTORS AND TERMINATIONS 208Y/120V: A- Black, B -Red, C -Blue, N- White, G- Green. 480Y/277V: A- Brown, B- Orange, C- Yellow, N- Natural Grey, G- Green. Colored tape acceptable on #8 and larger. Tape 3" at ends. PART 3 - E -CUTION SOUTHCENTER"CORPORATE SQUARE 'SECTION 16120 CONUCTORS AND TERMINATIONS 3.1 GENERAL A. Install conductors in raceway unless shown or specifically authorized otherwise. B. Conductors from one system shall not be intermixed in same raceway as another system unless shown in same raceway. Examples of circuits not to be intermixed are 480/277 with 208 /120, emergency power with normal power, 120V with low voltage, intercom with nurse call, etc. . Install splices and terminations in enclosures as required or shown. . ▪ Tape ends of future circuit conductors in each enclosure. 3.2 CONDUCTOR SIZE Number 12 AWG minimum for power and lighting circuits. 3.3 CONDUCTOR SIZES SHOWN ON DRAWINGS Copper, type THW, unless noted. Aluminum conductors not permitted. 3.4 RACEWAY SIZES SHOWN ON DRAWINGS Raceway sizes (when shown) are for THW copper conductors unless shown otherwise. Size raceways per code unless specifically shown larger on drawings. 3.5 TAPING, if used, shall be half lapped synthetic tape. 3.6 CONDUCTORS IN'PANELS, SWITCHBOARDS AND TERMINAL CABINETS Install neatly grouped and formed in a manner to "fan" into terminals with regular spacing. 3.7 CONDUCTORS SUPPORTS Provide conductor support devices per code in vertical cable runs. 24646.00 END OF SECTION 16120 - 2 • t 1 1 i 1 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16500 LIGHTING 1.1 DESCRIPTION Provide lighting system complete and fully operational. Conform with code and U.L. listing requirements. 1.2 LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE SERIES NUMBERS Are a design series reference and do not necessarily represent the exact catalog number, size, voltage, wattage, type of lamp, ballast, finish trim, ceiling type, mounting hardware or special requirements as specified hereinafter or as required by the particular installation(s). Acceptable manufacturers and series numbers are listed. The manufacturer listed shall provide complete fixtures equaling or exceeding the written specifications. Verify these requirements and order fixtures as required to give a complete and fully operational installation per the contract documents and per code. Provide fixture to correspond with the number of lamps, wattage and /or size shown on the drawings. 1.3 LIGHT FIXTURE VOLTAGE To match voltage of circuit serving the light fixture. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Include certified laboratory test report prepared by a recognized independent testing facility. Manufacturer's test report is not acceptable. A complete fixture housing and trim supplied with 8' cord, plug and specified lamp shall be submitted if requested either during prior approval or during submittals. Original material, neatly and clearly marked to indicate light fixtures, ballasts and lamps fully comply with contract documents. B. Submittals for each light fixture shall be prepared by the authorized manufacturer's representatives serving the project area. A list of manufacturer's representatives (including address, telephone and fax numbers) identifying which light fixture types they represent shall be included with submittals. This same requirement applies to approvals prior to bid. Submittals not meeting these requirements will be rejected. C. Submittals for other than as specified manufacturers and /or fixtures shall meet all requirements as specified herein and shall be received for review within the prior approval period. Submittals not meeting these requirements will be rejected. D. Submittals are the contractor's, distributor's, manufacturer's and manufacturer's authorized representatives agreement that the fixtures will be provided and installed per contract documents. 16500 - 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16500 LIGHTING 2.1 METAL PARTS AND HOUSING A. Interior Light Fixtures: U.L. listed, steel or aluminum with 300 degrees F., baked enamel finish, brushed aluminum with baked acrylic clear lacquer finish, or stainless steel with a brushed finish, manufacturer's standard color unless specified otherwise. B. Exterior Fixtures: U.L. listed for wet or damp locations as required. Constructed of corrosion resisting metal, (non - ferrous, aluminum or stainless steel) and in all cases suitable for outdoor service without tarnishing or other damage due to exposure. Gasketed for bug tight operation. C. Recessed Fluorescent Fixtures: Specular Alzak aluminum reflector cones shall be self flanged and Color -Chek processed to reduce iridescence; parabolic louvers shall be low iridescence, low brightness semi - specular or specular Alzak as specified. D. Recessed incandescent fixtures with thermal device per NEC 410 -65c. E. Recessed fixtures shall be prewired and approved for a minimum of 8 #12 AWG branch circuit pull - through wiring. 2.2 LIGHT TRANSMITTING COMPONENTS Shall be U.V. stabilized. Unless noted otherwise, shall conform to the following: A. Where the fluorescent fixture requires an acrylic prismatic diffuser, the lens shall be 100% virgin acrylic not less than 0.125 inches overall. B. Light fixtures containing lamps which require protective shielding shall have tempered glass lens or approved unbreakable lens, U.L. listed for the application. 2.3 SPECIAL PARTS A. Provide adapters, plates, brackets and anchors where required by manufacturers and /or construction features of the building to suitably mount lighting fixtures. All such appurtenances and mounting methods shall be reviewed by the Architect prior to fabrication and installation. Provide end plates for all individually hung fluorescent light fixtures and for row ends of continuous rows of light fixtures. B. Provide plaster frame for recessed light fixtures mounted in other than T- bar ceilings. Contractor shall verify mounting with architectural reflected ceiling plan before ordering light fixtures. 2.4 CANOPY Provide for each light fixture or hanger except where light fixture conceals the outlet box directly without a canopy. 24646.00 16500 - 2 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16500 LIGHTING 2.5 LAMPS A. Manufacturer: General Electric, Sylvania, Osram, Philips, Venture, or as listed specifically in Light Fixture Schedule. B. Provide for each light fixture in the exact number and type for which the light fixture is designed or as noted. C. All lamps shall be replaced with new at close of job. D. Fluorescent Type: Bi -pin, T -8 rapid start; 3500 ° K color temperature unless otherwise noted. Bi -pin, T -12, rapid start; 3500 ° K color temperature unless otherwise noted. Compact TT and DTT; 3500 ° K color temperature unless otherwise noted. E. Incandescent Type: Inside frosted, 125V, filament lamps rated for 2500 hours of life (extended service type). F. High Intensity Discharge Type Metallic Vapor - 10,000 hours life minimum. G. Tungsten Halogen - Low voltage (MR -11, MR -16) a compact Tungsten Halogen lamp operating at low voltage (12V), shall consist of a precision faceted dichroic glass reflector allowing heat to be transmitted backwards while reflecting light forwards in a controlled beam. Lamps shall have the following lamp life characteristics: MR -11 (20 and 35 watt) 3000 hours MR -11 (50 watt) 2000 hours MR -16 (35, 50 and 75 watt) 4000 hours Refer to light fixture schedule for lamp beam spreads. H. Spare Lamps. Provide one case of each type used on project. Turn over to owner and obtain signed receipt. 2.6 SOCKETS A. Incandescent - Porcelain, medium base except where mogul base lamps are standard for the light fixture specified. B. Fluorescent - Suitable for lamp type employed. C. H.I.D. - Porcelain, mogul or medium base, pulse rated as required by light fixture. Keyed for all position oriented lamps. 2.7 MAGNETIC BALLASTS AND WHIPS - FLUORESCENT Universal, Valmont, Advance, Robertson or as specifically noted in the light fixture schedule. A. Standard application for all fluorescent light fixtures: 1. Suitable for lamp type employed. 16500 - 3 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16500 LIGHTING 2. UL and CBM (where applicable) labels, non -PCB, Class P, high power factor type. Provide Multi -tap when available. 3. Low Heat, energy saving type. Secured with bolts or one bolt and opposite flange.. 4. Each ballast individually protected by an in -line GMF fuse in a Sussman type HLR fuseholder. Provide six spare fuses of each type used. Turn over to Owner and obtain signed receipt. 5. "A" sound rating for 430 ma. and 265 ma. 6. Provide 6' -0 ", 3 -wire flexible conduit connections (whips) for dual level switching as shown on the drawings, light fixtures recessed in accessible suspended ceilings. 7. Provide high power factor ballasts for all compact fluorescent twintube /PL type lamps. B. Low temperature and /or outdoor application. Provide ballasts suitable for low temperature where light fixture is located outdoors, in freezer or refrigerator or other location where space ambient is expected to be below 50 degrees F. C. Dimming ballasts (when applicable): type required by dimmer manufacturer for proper operation and to maintain U.L. listing of dimming system components utilized. D. Warranty. Ballast shall be warranted by the manufacturer for a period of not less than three years. E. Spare Ballasts. Provide six of each type used on project. Turn over to Owner and obtain signed receipt. 2.8 ELECTRONIC BALLASTS - FLUORESCENT Rapid Start Series: EBT SSB1 /LH Series; Motorola MRN Series; Valmont SR /G01 Series or as specifically noted in the light fixture schedule. A. For light fixtures as identified in the Light Fixture Schedule. B. Ballasts shall meet the following regulatory requirements: 24646.00 1. Suitable for lamp type and quantity employed. 2. U.L. and CBM (where applicable) labels, non -PCB high power factor type. 3. Each ballast individually protected by an in -line GMF fuse in a Sussman HLR fuseholder. 4. Provide 6' -0 ", 3 -wire flexible conduit connections (whips) for dual level switching as shown on the drawings, light fixtures recessed in accessible suspended ceilings. 16500 - 4 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16500 LIGHTING IEEE publication 587, category A (transients) - FCC part 18 - Minimum efficiency standards of Public Law No. 100 -357 C. Reduced light output ballasts are not acceptable except as noted in the light fixture schedule. D. Total harmonic distortion shall be less than 20% of the input current. Current crest factor shall not be greater than 1.6. Operating frequency shall be between 20 and 60 KHZ. E. Dimming ballasts (Lutron or as noted in the light fixture schedule) shall be compatible with dimmer manufacturer for proper operation and to maintain U.L. listing of dimming system components utilized. Total harmonic distortion shall be less than 10 %. F. Dual light level ballasts (Motorola Adjustable Potentiometer Series or Magnetek LLSS Series, or as noted in the light fixture schedule) shall be operated by two SPST switch, low voltage (24VAC) EMS, occupancy sensor or photocell as indicated on the drawings. G. Warranty. Ballast shall be warranted by the manufacturer for a period of not less than three years. H. Spare Ballasts. Provide 24 of each type used on project; except dimming, provide six. Turn over to Owner and obtain signed receipt. 2.9 BALLAST - HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE A. Valmont, Osram, Zumtobel, Jefferson, Advance, Widelite, Universal. Constant wattage (CW) or Constant Wattage Autotransformer (CWA) HPF type (minimum power factor 90 %), non -PCB or electronic as specifically listed in the light fixture schedule. Provide multi -tap when available. Provide "low noise" or "extra quiet" type ballasts for each light fixture. Noticeably noisy ballasts to be replaced. Each ballast shall be individually protected by an in -line fuse in a Sussman fuaeholder type HLR for 120 and 277 volt, type HEX for 208, 240 and 480 volt. Provide six spare fuses with each type used on project. Turn over to Owner and obtain signed receipt. B. Spare Ballasts. Provide six of each type used on project. Turn over to Owner and obtain signed receipt. 2.10 EXIT SIGNS A. Unless shown otherwise to be two circuit, universal mounting, universal arrows, green letters with single or double face as required. See "Light Fixture Schedule ". B. Fronts: Cutout stencils made of minimum #20 gauge sheet steel or sheet aluminum with green glass or plastic back of the cutout; mount fronts either on concealed hinges or pull -out type with chain catch. Removable cutout arrows to indicate direction of travel. 24646.00 16500 - 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16500 LIGHTING 2.11 HANGERS FOR PENDANT FIXTURES Painted rigid raceway type, not less than 5- thread engagement at each end, consisting of painted steel pipe, with brass or aluminum tubing casing, or painted tubing not less than 0.040 inches thick. Provide swivel -ball aligners for each pendant. 2.12 OUTDOOR LIGHTING STANDARDS Provide 100 mph steady wind rated poles with ground lug and access handhole plate. Provide watertight insulating fuse and holder in the base of each lighting standard to individually protect each lighting fixture. Fuse holder similar to Buss style "HEX" (HEB permitted for 120V or 277V), with Buss fuse of appropriate ampacity and voltage. Provide fuse for each hot circuit wire; do not fuse neutral. Provide rebar reinforced concrete base per manufacturer's recommendations. Provide galvanized anchor bolts with length 12" shorter than concrete base length. 3.1 LIGHTING FIXTURES, GENERAL A. Mounting height from finished floor to or center of outlet box for wall light Architect. Verify mounting provisions order of light fixtures and provide as application and location in which they B. In accessible suspended ceilings, wiring connection by 72" flexible conduit (flexible tubing not permitted) from a rigidly supported junction box. C. All finishes unmarred upon project completion. All damaged finishes repaired or replaced. 3.2 DIFFUSERS AND ENCLOSURES Install lighting fixture diffusers only after construction work, painting and clean up are completed. Remove all dirty lamps, reflectors and diffusers; clean and reinstall. When cleaning "Alzak: reflectors, use a manufacturer recommended cleaning solution. Reflectors damaged or impregnated with fingerprints shall be replaced at the contractor's expense. 3.3 ADJUSTMENT OF LIGHT FIXTURES Make all final spotlight and adjustable light settings under the direction of the Architect or Lighting Designer during a scheduled period of time prior to the completion of the project. Include in base bid all equipment and personnel expenses (including overtime) required for adjustment. 3.4 SUPPORT OF INCANDESCENT AND COMPACT FLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXTURES A. Surface or pendant type: Attach to heavy formed steel straps attached to the outlet box by means of threaded stems with locknuts, or directly to the outlet box where the light fixture is specifically so designed. 24646.00 16500 - 6 .... at• AroerIttm :V:NiN.601?7et:yx•+:,afN'snr .mrn bottom of pendant light fixture fixture as noted or verified with and other requirements prior to required. UL listed for the are installed. . `:�£ .,rr:i;ri ✓:wns......M.,....,,..„ 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16500 LIGHTING B. Recessed Type: Mount in frames suitable for the ceiling, with the recessed portion of the fixture securely supported from the ceiling framing. Bottom of light fixture to be flush with adjacent ceiling. Fixture trim shall totally conceal ceiling opening. Provide earthquake chains when fixture is supported by ceiling suspension system. 3.5 SUPPORT OF FLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXTURES A. Recessed type: For light fixtures supported by the ceiling suspension system, provide four Caddy #515 support clips (one each corner) which lock light fixture to ceiling tees after light fixture is installed. In addition, provide for each light fixture two #14 earthquake chains or #9 wires secured (at diagonally opposite fixture corners) to structural members above suspended ceiling. For plaster or GWB ceilings provide plaster frame compatible with light fixture. B. Surface mounted type: 1. Where mounted on accessible ceilings, support from structural members above ceiling by means of hanger rods through ceiling or as approved. 2. Continuous Runs of Fixtures: Laser sight to insure straight when sighting from end to end, regardless of irregularities in the ceiling. Where light fixtures are eo installed, omit ornamental ends between sections. C. Pendant Mounted Type: 1. Provide strong back channel entire fixture length unless light fixture is designed specifically for supporting itself. 2. Where suspended from accessible ceiling, support from structural members above ceiling by means of hanger rods through ceiling or as approved. 3. Continuous Runs of Light Fixtures: Laser sight to insure straight when sighting from end to end, regardless of irregularities in the ceiling. Where light fixtures are so installed, omit ornamental ends between sections. 3.6 SUPPORT OF HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE LAMPED LIGHT FIXTURES As specified for incandescent light fixtures, except where special provisions are required for ballast arrangements; provide access to ballasts in all cases. Provide earthquake chains when light fixture is supported by the ceiling suspension system. 3.7 CEILING LIGHT FIXTURE SUPPORT Where ceiling is of insufficient strength to support weight of lighting fixture(s) installed, provide additional framing to support as required. 3.8 SWITCHING FLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXTURES A. Except where indicated otherwise provide two level switching of all three and four lamp fluorescent light fixtures such that the center lamp(s) are on one switch and the outer lamps are on another. Required 16500 - 7 switchlegs in light fixture flex connection "whips" are not shown on the drawings. B. Where indicated on the drawings or as noted in the light fixture schedule, provide dual light level ballast as specified in Section' 16800, 2.8.F. Required switchlegs in light fixture flex connection "whips" are not shown on the drawings. : • • •3.9.011TDOOR.LIGHTING BOLLARDS .• all:bollards to .true vertical. .Provide galvanized anchor bolts andnuts. .Plumb using a nut above and below the bale plate on the anchor bolts. Pack grout between base plate and Concrete basi. base shall be .flush with grade when located in paved sUrface..' Ground. • •. • 3.10 OUTDOOR LIGHTING STANDARDS Plumb all standards to true vertical. For bolted poles, provide . galvanized anchor bolts and nuts. Plumb using a nut above and below the base plate on the anchor bolts. Pack grout between base plate and concrete base and provide drain hole below base plate to prevent accumulation of moisture inside pole base. Provide two piece or individual covers for nuts exposed above the baseplate of the same color as the pole.. Ground pole and light fixture. . , • 24646.00 • • • ••• • • , END OF SECTION 16500 - 8 tf '51 1 r 1 ; 1 1 1 PART 1 - GENERAL •IsART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 2.2 ?ART 3 - EXECUTION 24646.00 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16930 LIGTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 1.1 DESCRIPTION Provide U.L. listed lighting control equipment. PHOTO CELL Off-day, on-night, 1500 watt tungsten rated SPST contact, 2 to 5 footcandle adjustable light sensing range, time delayed switching, weatherproof. Tork #2100 or similar by Paragon or G.E. TIME CLOCK Rated 120 volt, 40 amps, SPST, 24 hour dial • time, •elf-winding reserve • power carry over, with day omitting device, two sets of on-off trippers. and. auto-off-on selector, switch. Tork series 7200L (modified) or similar by Paragon. 2.3 LIGHTING CONTACTORS AND CONTROL RELAYS A. Contactors: Multipole, mechanically or electrically held as shown, rated for 480V operation. Contact rating 20A minimum or as required, with coil clearing contacts. Square D Class 8903. B. Control relays: Rated 600V, 20A contacts. Square D Class 8501 XMO-40. C. NEMA 1 enclosures and 120V coils unless noted otherwise. 3.1 PHOTO CONTROL Provide roof mounted (unless noted otherwise) support stand. Orient light sensor in northerly direction. 3.2 LIGHTING CONTROLS Install control equipment with required wiring to achieve lighting control noted. Outdoor lights off during daylight hours. END OF SECTION 16930 - 1 f . ?ART 1 - GENERAL PART 2 - PRODUCTS PART 3 - EXECUTION 24646.00 16999 - 1 SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE SECTION 16999 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 1.1 DESCRIPTION Summary of procedures and requirements for project closeout of electrical portions of work. Conform also with other portions of the Contract Documents. Final payment to Contractor is subject to full completion of this Section. 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS Reproducible, Xerox drawings. See 16010, 1.10. 2.2 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (0 & M) MANUALS Hardboard, screw post, imprinted covers. Tabbed dividers between categories. See 16010, 1.11. 3.1 REQUEST FOR FINAL PUNCH LIST To request a final electrical punch list, forward a letter to Sparling, Inc. stating; "The electrical work on this project is complete, all punch list items to date are complete, items 1 - 14 in Section 16999, 3.2 are complete and the project is ready for final punch list observation ". 3.2 JOB CLOSEOUT PROCEDURE A. Perform the following procedures for project closeout of electrical portions of work: 1. Perform testing, tests and documentation per 16030. 2. Refinish electrical equipment finishes which are damaged. 3. Clean up per 16100, 3.5. Clean all parts of lighting fixtures. 4. Type panel schedules with actual "as- built" circuit descriptions. Number all circuit breakers. 5. Seal all conduit penetrations. 6. Obtain final electrical inspection. Include copies in 0 & M manual. 7. Give written one year warranty in 0 & 14 per 16010, 1.9. 8. Furnish Record Drawings per 16010, 1.10. Obtain signature on Job Completion Form. 9. Furnish 0 & M Manuals per 16010, 1.11. Obtain signature on Job Completion Form. 10. Give instruction periods to owner's personnel per 16010, 1.12. Obtain signature on Job Completion Form. END OF SECTION PROPOSED FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS & REMODEL OF 36o Corpora -4e Di. N thc NBBJ 111 South Jackson Street Seattle. Washington 98104 (206) 223 -5555 Fax 12061 621 -2300 PROPOSED FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS & REMODEL OF: SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON OWNER : OrpOr ISSUE I FOR PERMIT LDG. 10 ONLY 1 Lowe Enterprises Northwest, Inc. 600 University Street, Suite 2820 Seattle, Washington 98101 ARCHITECT : NBBJ STRUCTURAL : COUGHLIN PORTER LUNDEEN ELECTRICAL : SPARKING DRAWINGS INDEX A -1.0 COVER SHEET SURVEY / VICINITY MAP A -1.1 ABBREVIATIONS / GRAPHICS A -2 SITE PLAN A -3 LOBBY PLANS A -4 STOREFRONT DETAILS A -5 EXTERIOR DETAILS / SITE DETAILS A -6 EXTERIOR DETAILS A -7 E.I.F.S. DETAILS A -8 EXT. BLDG. ELEVATIONS S1 GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES S2 BRIDGE /PAVILION FRAMIMG PLANS & DETAILS ES ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN Dale DetvpFm of Ronc s 5eet L 11e COVER SHEET APR..' By Davgged SM ua.,,JC Jub N.rba 24646.00 aeded Date 6/16/97 Sheet per RECENED CITY OF TUK`MLp PERMIT CENTER M A -1.0 l.��n - C, ( A 3 PRti°t1- ot CURVE RADIUS DELTA LENGTH BEARING CHORD C1 C2 50.00' 15.00' 90'06'49 5445'56 78.64' 14.34' S4650'53 "W N60'42'44 "W 70.78' 73.80' C3 C4 50.00 15.00' 2893 54'45'56 252.66 14.34' S0154'18 ° W 664'31'200 57.69' 13.80' 05 C6 50.00' 50.00' 8953'11 90 78.44' 78.64' S43139'07'E S4650'53 'W 70.64' 70.78' C7 08 15.00' 50.00' 5445'56" 289731'52" 14.34' 252.66' 66042'44 "W S0154'18 "W 13.00' 57.69' C9 C10 15.00' 50.00' 5445'56" 8953'11" 14.34' 78.44' 96471'20 S43'09'07 13.80' 70.64' C11 30.00 9097'29 47.28' 546'56 W 42.53' BUILDING 7 2 STORY F. F. =22.50 10.708 S.F. BUILDING 2 2 STORY FF. =22 10,521 SF. BUILDING 3 2 STORY F.F. =23.50 10,709 S.F. BUILDING 4 2 STORY 6. =23. t 0,803 S.F. I ` CHAINLINK FENCE LINE 52: 90' 451.30' BUILDING 12 2 STORY F.F. =24.00 10,8455.F. BUILDING 10 2 STORY F.F. =24.00 10,807 S.F. sYMWAVIS 501 7'29 ANDOVER PARK (WEST BUILDING 8 2 STORY F.F. =24.00 10,865 S.F. BUILDGING 5 2 STORY F.F. =24.00 10,791 S.F. COVERED ATRIUM BUILDGING 6 2 STORY F.F. =24.00 10,854 S.F. BUILDING 7 2 STORY F.F. =24.00 10,833 S.F. • BUILDING 17 2 STORY FF =24.50 17,062 S.F. S01 '47'29 522.00 ----w -' w ° _ I BUILDING 9 2 STORY F.F. =24.00 10,819 S.F. ! } II I�II�I (e) 1322.34' 4 N_ _':3U709�.i� KOHN, i" IRON PIPE wTH YELLOW PLASTIC CAP. 0.09' NORTH OF 'RUE CORNER :ELLOW GLASDC CRP - SI,. 0. 11' EAST OF TRUE CORNER o. �:anu Arfr EAST I.a ,.,.n v sE �nyw :c LEGAL DESCRIPTION S88'05'42'E c ✓ 30.00' SO1'47'29 * W THAT PORTION OF THE EAST 1/2 OF THE NORTHWEST 1/4 OF THE SOUTHEAST 1/4 OF 5ECTION 26, TOWNSHIP 23 NORTH, RANGE 4 EAST W.M., DESCRIBED AS F0,0,5, BEGINNING A7 757 NOR;74FAS'. C005,.R OF SAID EAST 1/2 61-1/014 I5 NORTH 88 DEGREES 05 MINUTES 42 SECONDS WEST ALONG THE NORTH LINE OF SAID SOUTHEAST 1/4, A DISTANCE OF 1,339.34 FEET FROM THE NORTHEAST CORNER OF SAID 50UTHEA57 1/4; THENCE SOUTH 01 DEGREES 47 MINUTES 29 SECONDS NEST ALONG THE EAST UNE OF SAID EAST 1/2, A DISTANCE OF 1,322.34 FEET TO THE SOUTHEAST CORNER THEREOF; THENCE NORTH 87 DEGREES 5. 'AINUTES 02 SECONDS WEST ALONG THE SOUTH UNE OF SAID EAST 1/2 A DISTANCE OF 659.35 FEET TO THE WEST UNE OF THE EAST 659.34 FFUT OF SAID EAST I/O THENCE NORTH 01 DEGREES 47 MINUTES 29 SECONDS EAST ALONG SAID WEST UNE A DISTANCE OF 7,320.30 FEET TO THE NORTH UNE OF SAID EAST 1/2; THENCE SOUTH 88 DEGREES 05 MINUTES 42 SECONDS EAST ALONG SAID NORTH UNE A DISTANCE OF 659.34 FEET TO THE POINT OF BEGINNING; EXCEPT THE EAST 30 FEET THEREOF FOR ROAD; AND EXCEPT THE SOU16 30 FEET THEREOF DEEDED TO THE CITY OF TUKMLA UNDE RECORDING NO. 9408290327, AS AND EXCEPT R'JLROAD TRACKAGE AC RESERVED BY UNION PACIFIC RAILROAD COMPANY AS DISCLOSED BY DEED RECORDED UNDER RECORDING N0. 7607070502; CERTIFICATION To Tra-Isnation 77716 Insurance Company, Lowe Northwest investor Properties 1. L.C.C. Washington Umited Liability Company NO1 '47 29T AND EXCEPT THAT PORTION OF SAID SUBDIVISION DESCRIBED AS FOLLOWS: BEGINNING AT A POINT ON THE WESTERLY MARGIN OF ANDOVER PARK WEST, WHICH POINT BEARS NORTH 88 DEGREES 05 MINUTES 42 SECONDS WEST 1,369.34 FEET ALONG 11-18 NORTHERLY UNE OF SAID SOUTHEAST 1/4 AND SOUTH 01 DEGREES 47 MINUTES 29 SECONDS WEST 457.30 FEET ALONG SAID WESTERLY MARGIN OF ANDOVER PARK WEST; THENCE FROM SAID POINT OF BEGINNING LEAVING SAID WESTERLY MARGIN, TANGENT TO THE PRECEDING COURSE, ALONG THE ARC OF A CURVE 70 THE RIGHT HAVING A RADIUS OF 50.00 FEET AND A CENTRAL ANGLE OF 90 DEGREES 06 MINUTES 49 SECONDS, AN ARC LENGTH OF 78.64 FEET TO A POINT ON A UNE THAT IS PARALLEL TO AND 501.40 FEET SOUTHERLY OF THE NORTHERLY LINE OF SAID SOUTHEAST 1/4, THENCE ALONG SAID PARALLEL UNE NORTH 88 DEGREES 05 MINUTES 42 SECONDS WEST 326.76 FEET; THENCE LEAVING LAST SAID PARALLEL LINE TANGENT TO THE PRECEDING COURSE ALONG THE ARC OF A CURVE TO THE RIGHT HAVING A RADIUS OF 1500 FEET AND A CENTRAL ANGLE OF 54 DEGREES 45 MINUTES 56 SECONDS, AN ARC DISTANCE OF 14.34 FEET TO A POINT OF REVERSE CURVATURE; THENCE ' ANGENT TO THE PRECEDING CURVE ALONG THE ARC OF A CURVE TO THE LEFT HAVING A RADIUS OF 50.00 FEET AND A CENTRAL ANGLE OF 289 DEGREES 31 MINUTES 52 SECONDS, AN ARC DISTANCE OF 25266 FEET TO A POINT OF REVERSE CURVATURE; THENCE TANGENT TO THE PRECEDING CURVE ALONG THE ARC OF A CURVE TO THE RIGHT, HAVING A RADIUS OF 15.00 FEET AND A CENTRAL ANGLE OF 54 DEGREE5 45 MINUTES 56 SECONDS, AN ARC LENGTH OF 14.34 FEET TO A UNE THAT IS PARALLEL TO AND 546.40 FEET SOUTHERLY OF THE NORTHERLY UNE OF SAID SOUTHEAST 1/4; THENCE ALONG SAID PARALLEL UNE SOUTH 88 DEGREES 05 MINUTES 42 SECONDS EAST 327.05 FEET THENCE LEAVING SAID PARALLEL LINE, TANGENT 70 THE PRECEDING COURSE ALONG THE ARC OF A CURVE TO THE RIGHT, HAVING A RADIUS OF 50.00 FEET AND A CENTRAL ANGLE OF 89 DEGREES 53 MINUTES 11 SECONDS AN ARC LENGTH OF 7844 FEET TO A POINT ON THE WESTERLY MARGIN OF ANDOVER PARK WEST; THENCE ALONG SAID WESTERLY MARGIN NORTH 07 DEGREES 47 MINUTES 29 SECONDS EAST 145.00 FEET TO THE POINT OF BEGINNING This is to certify that this map and the survey on which it o based were made(;) in accordance with 'Minimum Standard Detail Requirements for ALTA /AGSM Land Title Surveys', jointly established and adopted by ALTA and AGSM In 1992, and Includes items 1 -11 of Table A thereof, and (7) pursuant to the Accuracy Standards (as adopted by ALTA and AGSM and in effect on the date of this certification) of an Urban Survey. Dote: 2I SI / Signed, FWND ]/2" 1158 600 8TH YELLOW PUSnL CAP "5eA ", 017' EAST W PROPERTY LINE Registration No.• ' Q ` 1 1290.30' AND EXCEPT MAT PORTION MORE rA:'TICULARLY DESCRIBED AS FOLLOWS: BEGINNING AT A POINT ON THE WESTERLY MARGIN OF ANDOVER PARK WEST WHICH POINT BEARS NORTH 88 DEGREES 05 MINUTES 42 SECONDS WEST 1,369.34 FEET ALONG THE NORTHERLY UNE OF SAID SOUTHEAST 1/4, AND 50637H 01 DEGREES 47 MINUTES 29 SECONDS WEST 973.30 FEET ALONG SAID WESTERLY MARGIN OF ANDOVER PARK WEST,; THENCE FROM SAID POINT OF BEGINNING LEAVING SAID WESTERLY MARGIN, TANGENT TO THE PRECEDING COURSE, ALONG THE ARC OF F. CURVE TO 114E RIGHT HAVING A RADIUS OF 50.00 AND A CENTRAL ANGLE OF 90 DEGREES 06 MINUTES 49 SECONDS AN ARC LENGTH OF 7864 FEET TO A POINT ON A LINE THAT IS PARALLEL TO AND 1,023.40 FEET SOUTHERLY OF THE NORTHERLY UNE OF SAID SOUTHEAST 1/4; THENCE ALONG SAID PARALLEL LINE NORTH 88 DEGREES 05 MINUTES 42 SECONDS WEST 326.76 FEET,' THENCE LEAVING LAST SAID PARALLEL UNE TANGENT 70 THE PRECEDING COURSE ALONG THE ARC OF A CURVE TO THE RIGHT HAVING A RADIUS OF 15.00 FEET AND A CENTRAL ANGLE OF 54 DEGREES 45 MINUTES 56 SECONDS AN ARC DISTANCE OF 74.34 FEET TO A POINT OF REVERSE CURVATURE; THENCE TANGENT TO THE PRECEDING CURVE ALONG THE ARC OF A CURVE TO THE LEFT HAVING A RADIUS OF 50.00 FEET AND A CENTRAL APILYE OF 289 DEGREES 31 MINUTES 52 SECONDS, AN ARC DISTANCE OF 25266 FEET TO A POINT OF REVERSE CURVATURE THENCE TANGENT TO THE PRECEDING CURVE ALONG THE ARC OF A CURE TO THE RIGHT HAVING A RADIUS OF 15.00 FEET AND A CENTRAL ANGLE OF 54 DEGREES 45 MINUTES 56 SECONDS AN ARC LENGTH OF 14.34 FEET TO A LINE THAT IS PARALLEL TO AND 1,06840 FEET SOUTHERLY OF THE NORTHERLY UNE OF SAID SOUTHEAST 1/4; THENCE ALONG SAID PARALLEL UNE SOUTH 88 DEGREES 05 MINUTES 42 SECONDS EAST 327.05 FEET; THENCE LAVING SAID PARALLEL LINE, TANGENT TO THE PRECEDING COURSE, ALONG THE ARC OF A CURVE TO THE RIGHT HAVING A RADIUS OF 50.00 FEET AND A CENTRAL ANGLE OF 89 DEGREES 53 MINUTES 11 SECONDS, AN ARC LENGTH OF 7844 FEET TO A POINT ON THE WESTERLY MARGIN OF ANDOVER PARK WEST; THENCE ALONG SAID WESTERLY MARGIN NORTH 01 DEGREES 47 MINUTES 29 SECONDS EAST 145.00 ,FUT TO THE POINT OF BEGINNING SITUATED IN THE CITY OF TUKWILA, COUNTY OF KING, STATE OF WASHINGTON. CURVE DATA RESERVATIONS AND EXCEPTIONS (1RANSNADOH 119E INSURANCE COMPANY PRELWMARY 711f1 REPORT, OROFR NO 865927 WED OCTOBER 34 1998j © EASEMENT AND THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS THEREOF PURPOSE: RAILROAD LEAD LINES AND SPURS, ROAD AND UNDERGROUND STORM AND SANITARY SEWERS AREA. AREA AFFECTED: SOUTH 30 FEET 5973722 RECORDING NO.: Cl EASEMENT AND THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS THEREOF: PIJRFGSE: RAILROAD TRACKAGE AND APPURTENANCES FFECTED: AS LOC7ED ON SAID ERTY RECO RDING A NO.: 76 0 70 70502 COVER PROP EXISTING TRACKS QT, EASEMENT AND THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS THEREOF: PURPOSE: AREA AFFECTED: RECORDING NO.: EASEMENT AND THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS THEREOF: PURPOSE: RAILROAD AREA AFFECTED: RECORDING NO.; EASEMEN7 AND 714E TERMS AND CONDIDONS PURPOSE: AREA AFFECTED: RECORDING NO.: UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC UTILITY SYSTEM NORTH 12 -13 FEET 7610290608 AS DESCRIBED THEREIN 7703070907 69. 00' 45.00' THEREOF: UNDERGROUND ELECTRIC TRANSMISSION AND /OR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 7 FEET IN W7D7H AS PRESENTLY STAKED OR AS MAY BF CONSTRUCTED, EXTENDED OR RELOCATED IN 761E 713TURE 7801730816 COVERS ENTIRE PARCEL AMC .•au5 30.00' ® 501'47'29 W 30 . 0 0 ' ❑ r I f 0 ;0' 30.00' " L 5� REC. N0. 5573722 EQUIPMENT ADDRESSES BUILDING j1 BUILDING 12 BUILDING 13 BUILDING 14 BUILDING #5 BUILDING 15 BUILDING 17 BUILDING 18 BUILDING /9 BUILDING /10 BUILDING /11 BUILDING 112 SCA,_t 50 0 25 50 100 700 (FEET) Inch = 50 �L GENERAL NOTES 3 PARKING SPACE COUNT: STANDARD COMPACT 784 483 4. VERTICAL DATUM: 9CVD 1929 5. PARCEL CONTAINS 17.45 ACRES LEGEND ,Q FIRE HYDRANT AUTO FIRE CONNECT,/ X WATER VAL ® WATER METER KA POST INDICA o- WATER BLOND, - -w-- WATER PAINT MARK UTILITY POLE WART E / - car ANCHOP UTILITY PO. 9 POWER METER POWER TRANSFORMER L, TELEPHONE VAULT TELEPHONE RISER OT TELEPHONE MANHOLE - T - TELEPHONE PNNT MARK GAS METER 1 541 VENT --C- GAS PAINT MARK ❑ CATCH BAN 0 STORM MANN° EYERCREL:N TREE O OE 0000u5 TREE EM CONCRETE WA. V7C!N1 TY MAP 0 SEWER MANHOLE ,UNCTION BOX • FOUND B4A55 CAP 9W. 1N YDNUYEN] BOX O FOUND MONUMENT AS NO. r) , LOCATION OF n5E REPORT EXCEPTION REFERENCES 7. REFERENCE SURVEY PLATS; VOL. 728/27 -28, VOL 104/8 -10, VOL 31/73 -74, VCt 83/22 -23. REFERENCE SURVEYS 54/212, 43/115 128/26. 2. SHORT PLAT N0. TU SP 91 -9 SS RECORDED UNDER RECORDING N0. 9208267819, RECORDS OF KING COUNTY, WASHINGTON. FIELD MEASUREMENTS FOR THIS SURVEY WERE PERFORMED WITH A WILD TOTAL STATION INSTRUMENT. ALL PRIMARY MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT UTILIZED HAS BEEN COMPARED TO AND ADJUSTED AGAINST A NATIONAL GEODETIC BASELINE WITHIN THE LAST ONE YEAR. 545 ANDOVER PARK WEST TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98188 565 ANDOVER PARK WEST TUKWILA. WASHINGTON 98188 575 ANDOVER PARK WEST 7047474, WASHINGTON 98188 555 574DOVER PARK NEST TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98788 625 ANDOVER PARK WEST TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98188 645 ANDOVER PARK WEST TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98788 655 ANDOVER PARK ft TUKMLA, WASHINGTON 98188 635 ANDOVER PARK NEST TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98188 685 ANDOVER PARK WEST TUKWILA. WASHINGTON 98188 360 CORPORATE DRIVE NORTH TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98188 375 CORPORATE DRIVE SOUTH TUKINLA, WASHINGTON 98188 370 CORPORATE DRIVE NORTH 7UK8LA, WASHINGTON 98188 7. SUBMECT PARCEL 15 ZONE X - OUTSIDE 500 YEAR FLOOD PLAIN PER FIRM MAP 5303: 2. BULDING SETBACKS PER CITY OF TUKWILA: FRONT - 15', SECOND FRONT - 15, SIDE - 10', REAR - 10' HANDICAP 21 gECE'VED Y � r- 54E77 1 NBBJ ''NJs`I g!or 93',04 2QQ6 223 -55PO Fox '206: 62 2300 STANDARD GRAPHICS Symbols Datum or Bench Mork Fba Elevation 5 1 A � Symbols for Floor Plans Partition Type Indicator See Per.° Type Schedule Schedule Indicators for Elevations W= W.ow L = Louver Match Line Sheet Number of Adjacent Crowing Existing ConeWctipn Hatch Poche BWdina Section Letter Identification Sheet Number 0 Roof Drain Building Elevation Letter Identification Sheet Number WWI Section Number Identification Sheet Number D etai Indicator Number Identification Sheet Number Detafl Mon Numbs Identification Sheet Number Key. Indicator Letter Denotes 8 ding Section or Elevation Revision Indicator Notation Ind.tor G- General Notes D -Demolition Notes R- Remodel Notes SSNe Notes Shower Wall Hung Water Closet Wall Hung Urinal Counter Mounted Lavatory Wall Hung Lewd, Floor Mounted Service Sink Electric Water Coder A ti Symbols for Column Grid Symbols Reflected Celiing Plana North Arrow R302 L -1 1 I o I API Reflected Cellkg Plana Interior Elevation Number Identification Sheet Number • Material Legend Earth/Pavement Section Mew Concrete/M.onry Section View J Concrete �7 Masonry Unitas S B05 , TyPkxtl Door Conditions m N ��, � Door number a Same as Ijl CIaY Tile AB AnchorAnchorBdt NFF Dtihms GGPI. Gape -m Plaster HLP aid Number of Roan Served � �1 AC Acauauc, Alternating D irecto nlel GPM Gallons Per 10Aute YO ...Metal ry Lath OpeNng Plaster Carynt DiR Dkaetorfel GPS Gallen Per Second EMU EMU au76ar, mow, When More Than 0110 Door ' � Marble - AD Area Uotn DISC Disconnect GRP Gloss .r Rdtforcetl Mod.. x ACT A .nclu Ge!b9 TTie DISC Disc Plaster MON MonNa w.e,m r Grout ADD Addendum NWar GS Galvanized Galvanized Steel MP Movable Per.i , Metal Suffix 90 Swing Typical 2, ANA Adt:waai DIV Didabn, Cc Dad Load GT Glazed Tne Pone) 180 Shown as Required Igortar AODN Addlbn DN Down GWB Gypsum Wallboard MR Mt Recess, Mad Red ADJ Adjuaable, Adpcent DO Ditto GYP Gypsum IIS NW Screw W� Finishes AFF Above Finished Floc DPS Door Podtlon Switch MSS Nkr and Shell Cased Opening AGGR Aggregate DB 0 LVOb H MT um ALUM Al.. DS Dow nepou HARDWARE HEADING CODES MfD Man. Section View Elevation New ALT Alternate,Alterotlon DSP Dry Stantlpge (see open. eche.. MTG Mamtlng Metal Loth & AMp Amperes DT Uain 'Se Xhge WIG HT Mount. Height Plaster or Stucco - ANCN Mcha DWG Drawbglal Group MIR Tatar New Door in ANOD AnadUeO (Mafk DWI. Dowd er MUL Mu. Exlagng Wall Coating) DER Draws gl . Gypsum W_.. .rd AP Access Panel F pP Dos Pbro N Veneer Plaster on ARCH Amhltecaral E Ebctrkal Outlet W Weatherstripping N No Existing Door A Bose Board ASST Asdaanl EA Ead, M Height, HIS, NEG Negotfre Exlatlng .1 AST Astragal EB Expansion eat HB Hose Bib • Not h Contract Ceramic Tie Ilia ASSY Aeaenahly Elea, Computer, PC Hose CaWetMaidkan NK No Key : ATM Atlnosphereticl ECT E Thin Set A —__ A�0 Automatic Telephone Outlet HCW Hollow Ve./pot and NOM Number Louvers NN U —..2 Number Conaecutively Ceramic Tile = == AU% AuxNory EJ EI:: JoM HDBD Hardboard NONCOM NmcouLlutlGe Grout Set AV Audio Veal EL !APYE SRRellte G wash YR Acastk aonELIM NS Rellte number Same Floor FtnIshes as Room number with 13 ELNT Cern. Tie or Plan VIOW XM Hollow Metal . 41 . Prefix Section View Quarry Tile AM E HM11 Half and .11 Masonry Th. Set on BC Bottom A Curb ENCL Endorsed Ur. Outlet Engbeer HORI2 Har .. OA 0.11 Concrete Floor ••U BD Barad EWE Entrance HP HOreepawer/Mgh OBS Obserwdon .N. BLUM ®.9 r EP E:plodon Proof Pressure/High Point OA On Center Equal, Earthquake HPL High Pressure Laminate OD Outeide Diameter ::�= BLDG Balidin9 EOJ Earthquake "I' HR p OF 0uAide Face, Overflow Ceramic Tile or till BLKG BIec EOUP Equlpmenl HS X ack Strlp/Hipl Strengm OFD Overflow Dry Q �� BLVD Boulevard ES Emersency Shower HSKG H aasekeepb9 OFF Office Supply Air BM Bech tAOrk eteldl EST Emb HT Height Nfaeer Grout uarry Sel Tiie elm :m Beanm ON 0.1., Overhang. Membrane BOT Bosom Exhaust ETC Et Cet NTC Heating a pea ETR Exis.g to Remain HTR Hater OHS Owl Head Screw Return Air or BRG Barb, 118Y Hating orb VenYotlA :HMS Owl Had Machine Screw Diffuser Resilient GRID Bridge, Bridgbg EWC Ebctrk Water Cooler HVAC Hatkm, Yan kton, Ak Flooring BRKT Bracket EXAM Examine., Examining Hea dA A S Owl Had Wood Screw BS Both Sides, Back Set E %C Excewaed, Excavation, HW pot Water, HarOware R Dperatbg Slot r BS, Basement Excewte HWO Hardwood 0ppoalfa Maid Lk. Mt.. .ri°" Caryet BW Bet hernial Unit EHP Exhaust pyyy pighvwy Openlhgl OT poelfe EXIST Eslefhg HYD Hydrant 02 D C''' . Li t Futures BUR But:: f Wall EXP EWoaed, Exp... See Et Schedule BW Bottom of Wall E %T Exterbr I p Wood/Plastic /s E %TD Extruded 1 Intercom D InaMe Uometo, Inside P Power, Phone Section .w Elevation View F Otnensbn PA Public Address Closer Ilea Door 1I Woad framing Cad... Computer Outlet F Fahrenheit, Fie Drawer le that A PAR Paragraph, Parapet CAB Gabber PA83 Paseemger CAD CaMdum 'r TO F Face to Facer E Invert Elevation P Pordtlode) Exult LIAP Shim or CAP Cap°dty FA Fire Alarm IG meukted Meal Panel I Sutton FAB xhorkbte, Fab... N Inch Blackleg CARP Caryet Fahrk Access Panel CB Catch Barb, Chapbeerd FAC Fadlly NCAND Inwidesoent ' Finished wood CCTV Closed Circuit TV FAX FacalMle NCN I'C:fl a PorEael rmr CD Celina Diffuser, Cup FB Flat Sam INCL bcludelhgl PCC Precast C FBD Fl . ND 1.3.1 PCD Paper Cup Dspenser Plywood CEM PL C Muter .0 Alarmafbn PCF Pounds /Cubic Feet CER Ceramic FCU Fan Cog Ibtt PCP Rvoasi Cam. -r . nal PL AM W CFH Luhk Feet/Hour FD Floor Drab NL plat PDN Power D.. Nal CPU Clack FeetMWte FIX Fke 000117.70 NSTL In Install PDS Power Ltiwn Sod Portlae Board Coenatlon NSUL AeulatddNing) CFS Cubic FeeU3vaald FGN FWidotlon NT nterbr PED Pedestal PLAM on CG Comer Guard, Center of FDPR Fire Damper LATER I11=.., PERF Perfomtidbl Plywood Gravity FDS Mow Divider Strip AAPH eAOte PERIM Perimeter CH Coral Hook FDV Ftre Department Valve F NV Invert PERP Per dad Glue Laminated CHAN Channel Channel PG PreahrkataLdl Section CHAM Chamfer Fire ExWgdeher FP 19obtron Power Pond PG Pl. Glace Smoke or Io dzaAon CHEM CheMCal, Chemist. Fke Exthgaleher Cabhmt pGBD Pegboard Detects Cast trop, Curb Inlet FF Factory FF., For Face pH Phase F CIF Compreea;le bpregneted FH Fire Hydrant Fume Hood, JAN Janitor PL Planter Pharmacy J -BOX Junction Box PL rylate Fire Sprinkler Insulation Foam FHC Fire Hose Co., FA. Head, Flat Head JST Jdat P PLAM P.tk .ninate CR Caenci e JNT Joint Section .w Elevation Mew • Construction Joint G er btret kanbea L CK Chorge -Plac KeY (concrete) RFC F. Hasa aid FHMC Flat Heed Moehl Screw y PLF PLBG Pa Foot Suspended Ceti. ' -- - - - -- Rigid Insulation CL Center Line, Clearance FIN Fire How Rack ^ PL.) Plywood GNd CIA Celina FIE Flat Had Screw KD KM Dried / Knocl d Down PMU Pumice Masonry U. Batt or Blanket CLJ Control Join[ K 1,000 Poude PNEU Pneurnatic Ctl(G GOBidg FHWS Flat Had Woad Screw KO Knock Out PNL Pend Insulation OS Closet FIC by C F and installed KP Kick Plata PAT PoNtledl CLR Clan by Garrotte KS Knee Saxe POL P lists. CO Glaser FN FlNahlid) KSI Kips Per $gore Inch PORT Portable GWB or Plaster FIO FurNahed and installed on CIF Composition Mos. KW KlbwatNal PP Posh Plate CWimg Fireproofln9 Flooring FIV F aid Installed PR , P.., Computer f N6 Countersunk Fetishes Screw oY Vr L CMT Ceram. Mosaic Tae L Lead PREFAB Prefahrb:mltll Metal CMU Concrete Masonry U. FL Fba Line, Floor LAB Laboratory PRELIM Prelkb�ary Printer FLASH F R P AAPH CO Can at FLEX Flexible UV Lavatory P ProjwUbn l Seetion Mew Elevation Mew CO, Carbon Dioxide FLG Flallpa te1S1 Lag Bo. el PROP Property FLR Fborfinel gel, L d PROT Protective Steel FLUOR Fluorescent LB Lumbar PS Praetreeeed COL CColumn Ls Lan LF Lineal Fat LYaor Fat (large scale) COIN ConbklatlOn /Comrbuatbis FM From LG Laminated Sloes PSI Pa'.LMp reY Space Inks Elevation View la umlwl Drain Ow PSF Pow. Fa SWme toot COIM ComnxANWtlon F Fur big nar, Lp Lek Hand PT Dahl) Pneumatic Tube COMP CompreeeledlBad, LNR Lek ' Hail Reverse (undisturbed) Oars Metal beaRed by Contractor PTD Papa ToYotrel rol Dispenser CompordoriledlUonl, UM Lise leolatbn Yalta Ilan scale) FDiV Fu by Owner, PT0.W Papa Disperser Earth Con crete bnl belaged by Vendor LN . ear (HI) CONC Concrete FP Fireproof.), Full L. Locker Wavle Reeepmele Mgt CORD Conduit, CordNbn P.e.. LL Live Lad Poe.. Tutee System Sand FIR I , [ COIF Conference Feat Per Mete LL89 Long Leg Bad to Bad PTS P onelmaUcrblalA. tatlon lemafl scale) COb b Connection) PM LLV Long Leg Verticel PVC Polyvinyl ' FPS F Fat Per tend' PV L&P Lam and Plater MT Pavement CONST C enawctlon FRAM GI Frtadng PWR ;thr ONT Conti, ontinuous P Low PoinC�� OUR Contrcto FRED raY T Llglrt Q �[' Mal Sd COAV Convctartl° rateO TG Lighting AspAsphaltic ORD oornaConcrete he, wr Sink TWT VR L Ligiatwelght omiF aWw OTR OT DO C � Sheet Metal ul! m�W�� GPM Cdticel Poth Method Fe.g PTA R CR Coid Roiled, Chemical CRT Future: Work ta be MACH I.. NB$Cdlaneous CWT Cathode Ray Tube Performed Laler MAINT Mate.. Radbtor,�Rodlatlok FWC Polaris WoA C arering HAS Masonry Elevation View Satia View Elevation Wew CSK Counter., Counters. F. Fbl Wall Pobt MAT Material • Rubber Base CS Cup S. Radiative Concrete CSP Combined. Sand Pipe FXD Fixetl • Map gat RCP Reflected Ceti. Plan Acoustic The CSV Conductlw Sheet Vinyl G RCWY Raceway CT Cara. Tie, Computer Tended M!M 1000 British Thermal RD Roof Drab, Rad Typical Garbs A.m.. UNroMour CTG Coating GL Glass Mm.r REC Read Ng Rod & Sealant CUR Cater PG Pole Glare MC Mdldw Cabinet RECEP Receptacle, Reception CU Cubic WG Wire Glare Mecdbneouc RECNC Rakcuidibn CW Cold Water TG Tempered Gloss MCW mineral Core Wood RECT Rectangular CWS Courltereunk Woo"_ Screw IG Insulating Glare kECH MebMnkal RECD Renewed Brick CY C. Yard LG Laminated Ghee MD Medico[ Madam REF Reference / / D Glass D G REFR Re G Gae Outlet `MME Membrane Membrane gdotor, Regret Ceramic: The Deep GA GauT /Gaga __T Howl Rc_G R Quarry Tide d Peary INo /el GAL Gallon WEE Mezzo. B A GALtl Galvanized kF8 Ward Fider Bald RElff R tl11inp11nSnU Graphic Scale sib Decbel GB Grab Bar IN Manufac.hg R&S Rod and Shelf Stone OC Dtrat Cunent REG Req.., Requirement 0 2 4 8 18 24 OBI Double GC General Contreras MFR k , gRb rem RESIL Resilient OE Ddsdzed Water 6E9 General /Generator MGR Manager RET Realm 1 /8' =Y -O' GI GalvanizedIra MGT Mato Glazed The DEG Degedd REV Reveres, Reread, Rewdan GKT Gaeke DEM Demolish Demo. MFP Meal FWeh Pull RF Robb Fr GFRC Giese FBer Reinforced MH Hanhale Frequency DEPT Department GL Roofing OET DA GA ./G MN Mkaophaw RG Ruaticatlon Graro DF Drinkbg Fountain, GL Gbtm /Glazidp /Glazed MN Mi.. Aaule RH Robe Had, Rlgtd Nord OouWaa Fir GLAY Glue Laminated MR Mtrror MME Round Head .chine Screw NA Dlameier GLP Greum Lath and Piaster MSC Nlacellaeeone pBR Right Hand Raver. NAG Diagonal GLAD Grant M Meter Keyledl pH8 Round Need Screw INCA Drilled -In Concrete GOVT Goverrmont M Meal Lath RIMS Round Hood Wood Screw GPH Gallo. Per Hots M _DG .INIng RN Room -- Starting Pahlt of Getting Gad ��1A1 • PROPOSED FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS & REMODEL OF: SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS A 4 (4 li v 4 3 ( nfmbe Doe Bt Dzvgim of Revue RND Round RO Rough OpenAg ROW Riyii of Way RPM Revolt!. Per Mete RRL Rub Rol RS Spedmen Shelf RTN Rearm RWL RMwater Leader S STRUCTURAL STEEL DESIGNATIONS W W Shape 9 3 Shape Y M Shape C Amer Stardnrd Choonel MC Meceaneoua Charnel HP 119 Shape Anglo VAT S... Tee cut from W shape ST Swctaral Tee cet Nan MT Stskpml T. CA from M Shape PL Plate IS Sauce. T.g S Scrum, Support Light Switch SAB Sound At... Bbnketa SAN Sanitary aB S - Iiiei Black, °Snw: -- or SCD Seat Cover Dispenser SCH Schad SC. ScMdue SCR Screen SCW sand Care Wad SD Soap Depenaer, San Dlsh SOB Said Dadenbg Beard SOPR Smoke Damper SE Sell Edge SECT Settler SFr SemnSF Square Feet SFC Spec. Floor Coo. SFP Sprayed -en F.proo.9 SGEN Ser.lom Emend S -H Sealer, Hardener Siff Shelf, Shelving SHT Sheet SHTG Sheathing SHR Shower SHY Sheet Ybyl SBA Similar SDPR Smoke .taper SE Sell Edge SECT Section SET Setting SF Square Feet SFC Sp.lal Floor Coating SR Sprayed+m Fkeproaflg SGEN Sem,Glass Enamel S-H Soler, Hardener Siff Shelf, S.W. SHT Sheet SHTG Sheathing SHR Shower SHV Sheet Vinyl SBA Shear SJ Steel Joist SK SIM SKI Skylight SLIM Short Lens Bad- to-8ack SLR Sealer SM Sheer Metal SOTS Sheet Mehl Screws SIM SLAT r Sea.t SLAW Sanitary NopkA Waste SOG Slob on Grade SP Shear Plate, Smoke Partition SPEC Spedf.d n, Specified SDK Speaker SPC Spsdd SPR Spr.ler sG Square SS Service Sisk ST Street Steam SST Staefeec Steel STC Sound Tmswmedon Class STD Standard STF StHlerer STL Steel 5. slam STOR Storage STR Straight STRUC Structural 57S Self Tapping Screw suarL Suhgoarlkg) SUP Supply SUPP Support SURF Surface SUSP Sti pe d. S &V Stain and Varnish SV Shat Vbyl SPX Special Wan Coatibg S a Symmetrka SIN SM.. SYS System S1S Surfaced One Side S2S Surfaced Two Shea SAS Surfaced Four Sides T T Top, Tread, Toilet :333 Tap and Bottom TB Towel Bar, Took Bard TC Tap of Cub, Top of Concrete TD Towel Dkpamer TOW Towel Dispenser and Waste TEM Tempera., Tempered, Temporary IG ' Terrazzo .- .pared Goes T&G Tongue & Groove TIE Tempered Hardboard PERHO Themactatlk) THK TMckmdsel TIRES Threshold THRU Through TL Task Light TOC Top of Concrete TOIL Toilet TOL Tolerance TOP Topping TOS Top of Steil TP TMmbtarm or Turnplsce TPD Toilet Paper Dielwneer TP.S Toilet Paper Dispense and Shelf TN Toler Pops Heider TPTN Toilet Partition TRD Trod TRK Tmd �i Ida ABBREVIATIONS GRAPHICS lade .>FPOred By Devged SM Ike NJH THK Trddlnessl THHRES ThresMla THRU Throu. TL Took Light TOC Top of Concrete Dn T.t TOL Tdemnce TOP Topping TOS Tan at Steal TP T.ditwn or Turn,. TPD Toilet Po, Dispenser TPM&S Toilet Papa Dispenser and Shea TPH Toilet Paper Nader TPTN Toilet Partition TRD Treed TRK Track TS Top Of Sbo / Tube Steel Tv de Ion TW Tempered Water, Top of Wail YP Typical IARC UNPorm BuiJng Code UC Unit coder, Ibder Causer UG Urdergra nrt UI Udt Heater IA UnderwMes Laboratories, Inc. IAIF UiflneMd UT M .S. Teat UTIL Utility W Unit Ve.tor V Vdte VAP Vapor VAR Varb. Ver., Varies VAT Ymyl Asbebtna Tee VB .yl Rase, Yc::zm Brooker, Vapor Barter YCT Vk.y1 Composition Tae VD Volume Damper PER VeNds VENT Venation, Ventate, Yenta. VERT VerMal VEST V.. VG Vertlwi Gr) WB Vibration VJ V- Jointed VOL Volume VP Veneer Plaster VT Vbyl Tie VWC Vinyl WM Covering VWS Vbyl Wog Sara w Watts W Wde, West Waste, Water With W/O WNhout WAIN Wa.ot WB White Bard, Wood Gorse WC Water Closet WD Wood WOW Widow WF Wide Fkmge IStedl WG Wke Glass, Wei Grill WL Water Line WP Wort Petit WPF Waterprat Weatherproof WPJ Weakened Plane Joint WR Waste Receptacle, Water WRB Wardrobe WRL Wood Rub. WS Wood Screws, Weteretop WSP Weatherstrip, Wet Stand File WSV Welded Sheet Vinyl WT Weight, Watertight WAF Wdeed Wee Fabric WWY Welded Wire Mein YD Yob Drab Symbols L Angle ® Al 0 5 Centerine C.nnel Per PerpendA °r Plate Round or chase (Electrical) Diameter Square Square Fat And Delta Pius or Minus Supplemental Abbreviations AC -t Exposed Tee GM, 2 x 4, Lay-N ACT CORR Corrage. CFP Concealed Fastener Panels MR Moisture Resistant MTL Meal Pill Pabt number FS Flexible Sheet TLT Toilet TFMR Tmnafamer Yob Noma 24646.00 Lbt Dole 3 31 97 W_cevEn A-1.1 EN n` PAV1. A -5 REMOVE EASING - EXIST. WRB CURE TO BE -/_ ICONC. 1I REMOVED 1/16 = 1' -0' NBBJ NEW WRB WT & WET_LCu "..R OMIT RAMP RY LAYOUT /PAVING BLDG.12 I 111 South Jackson Street Seattle. Washington 98104 (256) 223 -5555 Fox 12061 621 -2300 4 REMOVE EXIST. CONC PAY AS R OC ( SHOWN DASHED) . �N iNGS TRENCH DRAIN AST. CONC CONE G SEA KON�'�' - EXIST TRASH ENCI. TO REMAIN -PAM 10 UY6 ��EV7 ENCL. 18 18 01 SITE PLAN - - 12 1 21 p II ( ENTRY PAVILION I - SEE S'NT =A -S NEW P .E MWNTED DISABLED PKG. SIGN PLANTIN GS PT. SYMBd ACCESS OR NEW STALL - -� PT. 5' -0 W. ACCESS PATH - n \ NEW WRB CU & WHEELCH AIR RANP 1:12 $LOPE RI tH- II - EXIST CONC ENTRY LAYOUT /PAVING BLDG.10 or = r -o• 24i 8 ;) n 6 C`. 100' 200' ss __ - 11 10 u_ a � 1 1 10f. REMOVE EAST. CONC. PAVING AS (SHOWN D. (9JOWN DASHED) TRENCH DRAIN CONG SEAT CON REMOVE EAST. tlCHT MIRE CUNC. 11 - IcoNc.21- TIP. STRIP 2 4 WIDE EXIST. CURB ,C2 • 0641 VIII I I!( 1 1 ENTRY PAVILION - SEE SHT. A -5 RAOVE 11251. M31.1ai - ' TYP. STRIP 2' -4' WIDE NEW POLE MOUNDED NEW CURB NEW CURB CUT & WHEELCHAIR RAMP 1:12 SLOPE PT. 5 -0' W. ACCESSIBLE PATH RY LAYOUT /PAVING BLDG.4 1/16° = 0° NEW TRASH ENCLOSURE 0 I T DEMO & REMOVE EXIST. TRASH ENCLOSURE IT ,00'/ /S' M „64,/h °10S ANDOVER PARK WEST ::<::<: PAVIAS RECD(SHOWN DASHED) S WN (SHOWN ASHED 2 E PROPOSED FACILITES IMPROVEMENTS & REMODEL OF: SSOU T UCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON ICONC. 21 G 12 1 'Sr -� � A "- N MOUN D ~ �t DISABLED r - \- PKG. SIGN '.•: • OST. PT 1 I AGGES F S742. - PT. 5' -0° W7. -- 1 I ACCESS. PART 1'f. 41111 I RY LAYOUT /PAVING BLDG.3 1/16' NEW TRASH ENCLOSURE DEMO & REMO M 1 - EXIST. TRASH ENCLOSURE 1 - III1127 PARKING ANALYSIS SUMMARY EXISTING PROPOSED TOTAL PARKING STALLS 1261 1257 TOTAL HANDICAPPED STALLS 22 22 NOTE: STALL DIMENSIONS SHALL FOLLOW CITY OF TUKWILA ZONING CODE 18.56. ISSUED FOR PERMIT BLDG. 10 ONLY 1coxc 11 ICONC. 21 TYP O 2' -4 WOE ::=1/r RAMP 1:72 SLOPE I� I I 1 EXISTING BUILDING 10 2 STORY F.F. =24.00 19,421 GSF ENTRY PAMIJON -SEE SHT.A 5 TRENCH DRAT KONG 21 TYR STRIP 2 -4 WDE NEW P. MID. DISABLED PARKING SICK Pi. SYMBOL AREA OF WORK A-. ACCESS. PATH NEW PLANTINGS 1/16 1 L L � I qq 0C • I SP REMOVE EA CONC P G 911= AS REGD. (SHOWN DASHED ICONC. 11 V , CONC. SEA CONC. REMOVE EAST. 11.1 FIXTURE CONG NEW CURB CU: & WHEELCHAIR RAMP 1:12 SLOPE NEW CURB TO MATCH EXIST. T RY LAYOUT /PAVING BLDG.2 16 EXISTING BUILDING 11 2 STORY F.F. =24.50 30,208 GSF OMIT 19 14 P I1 4 jl 4E L 86- '11YfF � 4 1 I I 5 J L2 L_ _.- X1...1 . 18 3 EXISTING BUILDING 7 2 STORY F.F. = 24.00 19,421 GSF -r- EXISTING BUILDING 9 2 STORY F.F. =24.00 20,421 GSF MIT Ark PREP. & PAINT EXIST. MTL ROOFING 1 TO MATCH EIFS -1 (ME). 7 OMIT �� 1 1 1, -' EXISTING P E i )COVERED ATRIUM E 4,040 GSF OMIT EXISTING BUILDING 6 2 STORY F.F. =24.00 20,421 GSF ( ®1 LJ N J I via 4/, EXISTING BUILDING 8 2 STORY F.F. -24.00 20,421 GSF IS Ek MIT 12 b I J EXISTING BUILDING 5 2 STORY OM IT T 19a42 0 9 3L J II 55 20 11 55 x DST - e- E4 E CL N O N 7 18 0z2 I ^11141 I 11 6 11 ! 11 1 ' \ 4 1�11 s! Ii! jI! I I e t I'll' 1 , II J 131 I I EXISTING BUILDING 3 2 STORY SIMMISTAMMT F.F. =23.50 20,421 GSF - - 1 ire KO ISSN 11 \ / 5 iI MIT I i _ -- EXISTING g 19,421 GSF BUILDING 4 -- 1 -1 - 2 STORY F' �lRA1 F.F. =23.50 �p EXISTING BUILDING 2 2 STORY F.F, =2'.50 19,421 GSF !- I I 1I _J I, aro Ad : � 1 1 113r,- EXISTING BUILDING 1 2 STORY F.F. =22.50 20,421 GSF rn EXISTING BUILDING 12 2 STORY F.F. =24.00 19,421 GSF OMIT III. X11!1 2 A-2 I, I1411 53 37 ] SB 6 L. 4 =: NEW TRASH ENCLOSURE I T DEMO Sc REMOVE EXI TRASH ENCLOSURE M „64, b, LOS Approved By Desgled SM 171 1 7 Nips. 2622 By 0.551#1. 0.551#1. of Reveals Sheet 1 - * SITE PLAN PAINT TO MATCH EIFS -2_ -, ,RI SI 13f � a Dram JC ENTRY PAVJON i REMO, X15T- PA - SEC SHT. A -5 . "NG AS RECO. SHOWN DASHED, R2ENCH ORN I KONG. 2 TYP. S R P REMOVE .5T. LIGHT '1XNRE NEW POLL MWNTED - l DISABLD PKG- NaT J - C,; NEw uRe - NEW CURB PT. SYMBOL ACCEGR'NEW � SS u ® 4( PT. 5-0' Wt. /`.. r� EI `. _'' NEW PLANPNGS ACCESS. PART RY LAYOUT /PAVING BLDG.1 1'_0 1I! 66128. 24646.00 C6eded Dole 6 /16/97 _^N GENERAL SITE PLAN NOTES. CON RACTGI'. FIELD VEK:r ALL EXIS _ SITE U-LI TIES, !JGH i1N6, LANDSCAPE IRREGATION & /'- A',+IAGE III M �RIOR I O S AR. OF WORK COOR7NA E w /OWN R RCP_ 2. PRO4DL 5 051 TIVE SLOPES AWAY FROM BLOCS. @ AL AREAS OF NEW 'NOR✓. 3. SLOPE CONC_ SIDEWALKS @ 15 AWAY FROM B1DGS., Y' 4. PAINT ALL ELECT BOXES & TRANSFORMERS TO MATCH E.01-2 COLOR (V.LE1 ( !VM DEMOLISH AND REMOVE EXISTING COVERED WALKWAY STRUCTURE & LIGHT FIX T., CLOSE EXIST. ELECT. LINES AS READ. - PATCH AND REPAIR PAVING TO MATCH EXISTING NEW TRASH ENCLOSURE - EXTEND EXIST CURB & PLANTING MIT DEMO EXIST TRASH ENCLOSURE: (5 TAP) REMOVE EXIST STRUCT. -PATCH & REPAIR EXIST PARKING PAVING. EXTEND OR EXIST LANDSCAPE ISLAND AS SHOWN TO MATCH EXISTING. LEGEND EXISTING JUNCTION BOX FOUND MONUMENT -SEE SURVEY EXISTING EVERGREEN TREE EXISTING DECIDUOUS TREE EXISTING CONCRETE WALK RECEIVED cmaFruKVAA� 2 REMOVE CLG HUNG 9ANNERI ABOVE REPLACE DOORS REPLACE CARPET 2ND FLR. BALCONY ABOVE ;SHOWN DASHED) BLDG. 6 SEE LOBBY ,3 NOT BLUGS. ES S ,12 I /ATRIUM 16" = 1' -0" NBBJ A 6 TRENCH DRAIN 111 South Jackson Street Seattle. Washington 98104 1206) 223 -5555 Fax 1206) 621 - 2300 / I 2'-6" BLDG 7 BLDG. 6 ST. CO, 1 =, cuktu uNE a DOORS v( 1 i I WIN:, ART 'MVO. 2. PAVILION: Building 7 k 7 /8" = r -0" F 3 BLDG. 5 SEE LOBBY B1DG5. 2,4,10 NOTES 9M. 2 STORY ATRIUM ATRIUM REACE CA REPLACE DOORS REMOVE EXIST. TIE INSTALL NEW D BORDER 7 -4" M WIDE W/4 XS DIAGONAL ii AREA 0 CORNERS, USE FULL TILES, TYP. 1 W/ FIN. EDGEPLE 0 MI CARPET TRANSITION. I gig IE , I B Ar ' ' `'IV"= 0 E: REPLACE CARPET AT ATRIUM GROUND FLOOR, BRIDGE ABOVE AND LOBBIES. NOTE. RELOCATE EXISTING FURNITURE & PLANTERS AS REOD. FOR NEW WORK. - REPLAGE Dos (SAME COCA N) ENTRY PAVILI - SEE SHT. Fr 5. V BLDG. 6 BLDG. EWJ �!.!m_ •,4 g ` ATRIUM '1�E�� _1 PAVILION: Building 5 1/8" = 1 -0" 1/8" = 1' -0" PAVILION: Building 6 TRENCH DRAIN CONC. SEAT 'CONC. 21 2 WIDE !CONC. 11 EAST. ,MG L CENTERLINE 0 DOORS EXIST. VAULT g,TN °C.' EXIST. GONG PANNG FSEEOR TYPICAL NOTES NEW CARPET 0 2ND FIR. 1ST M SHADED KONG 21 REMOVE DOOR & WALL O 1ST FLOOR EXIST. CALE TO REMAIN REMOVE SIGNAGE EAST. SOFFIT ABOVE TRENCH DRAIN GONG SEAT NEW POLE MOUNTED DISABLED PKG. - 9GN REMOVE ED ASPH PT. 5-0 WI. ACCESS. PATH PT. SYMBOL FOR NEW ACCESS. STALL - -► NEW PLANTINGS NEW CURB C UT & WHEELCHAIR RA 1:12 SLOPE NEW CUR 0 MATCH 1ST. LOBBY/ENTRY: Building 9 = 1 END NEW CPT 0 2ND FIR REMOVE CLG BANNERS AB REMOVE WALL COVERING 0 2ND REMOVE SIGNAGE EXIST. TILE REPLACE DOOR IN EXIST. ALUM. STOREFRONT A GN DGE OF NEW COL TO EXIST. FIN. FACE NEW PLANTINGS SAWCUT EXISTING CONC. SLAB TO ALLOW FOR NEW CONC. STRIPS G LOBBY /ENTRY: Building 11 1/8" = 1' -0" (2ND FLOOR SIM.) PROPOSED FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS & REMODEL OF: SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE - ISSUED FOR PERMIT TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 1 LOG. 10 ONLY (2ND FLOOR SIM.) ENTRY DOORS FOR TYPICAL NOTES Vgir SEE 2ND FLR: STAIN EXIST. WD.DR. FRAME WINDOWS TO REMAIN !CONY. 11 REMOVE EXIST. CONC. PAVING ENTRY PAVILION -SEE SHT. A -5 EXIST. POLE LIGHT TO REMAIN IcoNC. 21 TYP. STRIP 2' -4" WIDE FOR TYPICAL NOTES FO EXIST. CONC STAIR LOBBY REPAIR AND PAINT DENTED W AIN TRENCH DRAIN NEW PLANTINGS CONC. SEAT 'CONC. 21 !CONC. 11 ENTRY PAVILION - SEE SHT. A -5. K ONG. 21 EXIST. CONC. TYP STRIP z -a' vnoE NLmher Dole REPLACE VINYL STRIP EXTG. WATER FOUNT. EXTG- TILE EAST. TLE TO REMAIN - ADD NEW VINYL STRIP. EXIST. WATER FOUNTAIN - CONCEAL WIRING WHERE O'D. W /SURFAC MNT. PLUG MOULD & RECEPT. COVER, PP. REMOVE EXIST. WALL COVERING - PREP.& PAINT BLDG 2,4,10. REMOVE SIGNAGE, TIP. STAIRWELL CPT' PAINT EXIST. HANDRAILS AND WOOD CAP. GOO REPLACE EAST. LIGHT FIXTURE W /NEW - BLDG_ 2, 4, 10. NOTE: REMOVE ALL WALL MIRRORS IN LOBBIES AND ANCNG BANNERS IN STHAIRWELLS, TIP. PAINT SCHEDULE: LOCATION ISLE FLR /2ND FLR LOBBIES STAIRWELL 1sT FLR /2ND FLR VESTBL'LE MEN WOMEN CEILING GB cm GIB WALLS sm cm GUI GB 1/8" = 1' -0" (2ND FLOOR SIM.) Desorption of Rensars ❑ EO. EQ. � `~ Ct ENTRY DOORS SEE SHEET -2 FOR NEW PAVILION & PAVING LOCATIONS 0 SLOGS. 2.4,10. Sheet Dille LOBBY PLANS REPLACE DOOR - NEW DOOR FROM ER. REP E CARPET TO R E MAIN i E TL %I E REMAIN R ® 1ST FLOOR LOG. 1 FOR TYPICAL NOTES SEE© EXTENT OF NEW CARPET ON 2ND FLR. BLDG 2,4,10 AND 1ST FLR. BLDG. 4 TRANSITION OF NEW CARPET TO EXIST. FLOORING TO OCCUR AT CENTER LINE OF EXIST DOORS, BLDG./ VERIFY EXACT LOCATION OF EXISRNG DOORS IN FTETD. PREP. & STAIN FIN. EXIST. DOOR AND FRAME PAINT EXTG. FRAME REPLACE RUBBER BASE, TIP. PREP & SN DOOR AND FRAME TAI TO REMAIN BLDG. 4 WALK OFF MAT LOCATION - rAT TO ODOR JAM WAIN CFF MAT i0 BE BS. INTEGRATED WITH CARPET, SEE SPEC. - COORIDINATE W/ OWNER'S REP. PAINT ELEVATOR DOORS & FRAME CPT2 1 REPLACE STOREFRONT WINDODOORS. MATCH WS / EXIST. ORK. N BRONZE COLOR -SEE SHT. A -4 \I - EXIST. PLYWD. RN. WALL (REPLACE SIGNAGE) REPLACE EXIST. EXPOSED AGGRAGATE CONC. W/ 1/2 WD. NOTE: PROVIDE NEW CARPET C 11 AT SECOND FLOOR LOBBY AS PER FIRST F L AYOUT SHOWN HERE. NOTE: BLDC10- NO CARPET FOR FIRST FLR. STAIN DOOR AND FRAME ADJACENT TO ELEVATORS NOI E: PRONOE 10 WIDE CARPET BORDER AROUND PERIMETER OF 71T & 2N0 FLR LOBBIES AREA E O ^F WORK K WHER OCCURS A .� ^ W' S 1 y� EXCE STAIRWAY. scale ' '6" AF roved By .lob INurber 24646.00 Detnod SM 10 .1 armed S4 Done 6/16/97 SEE SHEET A -2 FOR NEW IJ &PANNG PAN LOCATI ONS 0 emus. 1,3.12. EQ. EQ. R S ,�\� \ � NOTE BLDG. 12 HAS y ELEVATOR Ni DOOR & FRAME REMOVE \?\ J : ' MIRRORS REPLACE 2ND FL CARPET - SCOPF SIM. TO BLDG. 1, 3. U LOBBY/ENTRY: Buildings 1, 3, 6, 8, 12 IM. 1/8" = 1' -0" (2ND FLOOR SIM.) LOBBY /ENTRY: Buildings 2, 4, 5, 7, 10 SIM. .;r:ERAL PLAN NOTES :. CONTRACTOR FIELD VERIFY ALL DiMENS.S AND CENTERLINE CONDITIONS PRIOR, TO STAR OF P,ONSTRUCTON. NOT, OWNER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES OR CON,ICTS PRIOR TO START OF WORK. 2 GENERAL SCVTE OF WORK FOR 1ST & 2ND POOR F OBBY REMODEL 5 SAME FOR BLDGS 1 PPR'J '2 SEE PLAN 2 FOR DOOR 0 (22 FLOOR 'YPICAL NOS. BLDG. 3 (EXTENT OF NEW CARPET). 3 COORDINATE le AL LEG . /MECY. i ?LJMBING & -'-IRE PRCFEC i0N SYS�JAS AS REOD. Wj OWNER. REMOVE SIGNAGE 4. COCROINA [ NE'N 'COORS & 1,3 HARDWARE VOWNER'S SECLRITY SYS EM REP P.E , 0OM DULE: CO ,RING R AOVE XI VSH P SCHE WALL VER NC A0 R FOR I- GLOSS ADD MISJNG TRIM NON 'ICE WALLS FOR SEMI - TO Ex15i. RECESSED PAIN'. L'GH. '.xNRE j WHERE REO'D. GWB WALL. P11 OILS PRI WALL: FM GWB CEILING 122 COUNTERTOPS: REPI ACE EXIS PLANK _AMINATE NEVAMAR, ARP SURFACE, ENGLISH LACE TEXTURED, S -2 -85T. 6. NEW CONC. INSTALLED WITH ALL TOOLED JOINTS &':EO. BROOM FINISH -SSE OT- It /A -5. 7. REMOVE EXIST. CONC. AREAS AS SHOWN. PREVUIT SPAWNG BY DOUBLE SAW CUTS OR REMOVING WHOLE SECTIONS EXIST. WO. JOINTS - SEE SPECS. Sheet Number RECENED er ofT mA_3 PERMRCENTER NBBJ 111 South Jackson Street Seattle. Washington 98104 (2061 223 -5555 Fax (206) 621 -2300 EXIST GWB GWB TO MATCH MULLION GLAZING 4 1/2"_ *JAMB AT STOREFRONT 3 = EXIST PLYWD SIDING TO REMAIN. BLDG. PAPER E.LES. ON 1" FOAM 1/2" SEALANT & BACKER ROD 1/4" SEALANT & BACKER ROD BOTH SIDES 4 1/2" STOREFRONT MULLION 3" = 1' -0" 3" = 1' -0" GLAZING AS SCHED. PREFIN. ALUM MULLION GLAZING AS SCHED. PREFIN. ALUM MULLION PREFIN. DOOR FRAME '15 ) DOOR JAMB AT STOREFRONT PROPOSED FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS & REMODEL OF: SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON ALIGN MULLION w /EXIST GWB INT. FIN. O ag HEAD AT STOREFRONT 12 3 — 13 SILL AT STOREFRONT 3" = ISSUE 1 4 /2" 4 1/2" GLAZING AS SCHED. LDG. 10 ONLY EXIST BLKG. TO REMAIN. EXIST PLYWD SIDING TO REMAIN. 1/4" SEALANT & BACKER ROD BOTH SIDES PREFIN. ALUM MULLION — OUTSIDE GLAZED GLAZING AS SCHED. PREFIN. ALUM MULION — OUTSIDE GLAZED PREFIN. ALUM PAN, WATER— TIGHT ON ALL SIDES, SET IN SEALANT 1/4" SEALANT & BACKER ROD BOTH SIDES w /WEEPS ® 24" 0.C. EXIST FDN JNT. EIS PERMIT 41/2" a 11 DOOR SILL 3 = 1' -0" Des ! of ke - teas TRANSOM GLAZING AS SCHED. PREFIN. ALUM MULLION PREFIN. DOOR FRAME MULION BEYOND O DOOR HEAD AT STOREFRONT 10 3" — 1' -0" MULLION BEYOND PREFIN. 000R FRAME ALUM THRESH w/ BEV EDGE ACCESSIBLE PER MFR —SET IN SEALANT EXIST FDN JNT. Sheet Idle STOREFRONT DETAILS 10' -4 1/4" (BLOCS. 1 3 9 12) ''~ 9' -6 1/4" (BLDGS. 2, 4, 10) E0. EQ. lacy NOTE: FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS & CONDITIONS ALL CLEAR GLASS, TYP. —SEE SPECS. TYP. STOREFRONT ELEV. 3/13' = Sara n_ ni)Tt^ Approved By lob Nth 24646.00 Desged SM Ravn NJH Checked Date 6/16/97 Sheer NRber t SYMBOL OF ACCESS MNT. TO EXTERIOR OF GL w/ ADHESIVE. RECENE0 A-4 — 4 am of rutcwi�4 GL AM 15 \ \ A. \ \ \ GL GL \ G: GL NBBJ 111 South Jackson Street Seattle. Washington 98104 (2061 223 -5555 Fax (206) 621 -2300 EXIST GWB GWB TO MATCH MULLION GLAZING 4 1/2"_ *JAMB AT STOREFRONT 3 = EXIST PLYWD SIDING TO REMAIN. BLDG. PAPER E.LES. ON 1" FOAM 1/2" SEALANT & BACKER ROD 1/4" SEALANT & BACKER ROD BOTH SIDES 4 1/2" STOREFRONT MULLION 3" = 1' -0" 3" = 1' -0" GLAZING AS SCHED. PREFIN. ALUM MULLION GLAZING AS SCHED. PREFIN. ALUM MULLION PREFIN. DOOR FRAME '15 ) DOOR JAMB AT STOREFRONT PROPOSED FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS & REMODEL OF: SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON ALIGN MULLION w /EXIST GWB INT. FIN. O ag HEAD AT STOREFRONT 12 3 — 13 SILL AT STOREFRONT 3" = ISSUE 1 4 /2" 4 1/2" GLAZING AS SCHED. LDG. 10 ONLY EXIST BLKG. TO REMAIN. EXIST PLYWD SIDING TO REMAIN. 1/4" SEALANT & BACKER ROD BOTH SIDES PREFIN. ALUM MULLION — OUTSIDE GLAZED GLAZING AS SCHED. PREFIN. ALUM MULION — OUTSIDE GLAZED PREFIN. ALUM PAN, WATER— TIGHT ON ALL SIDES, SET IN SEALANT 1/4" SEALANT & BACKER ROD BOTH SIDES w /WEEPS ® 24" 0.C. EXIST FDN JNT. EIS PERMIT 41/2" a 11 DOOR SILL 3 = 1' -0" Des ! of ke - teas TRANSOM GLAZING AS SCHED. PREFIN. ALUM MULLION PREFIN. DOOR FRAME MULION BEYOND O DOOR HEAD AT STOREFRONT 10 3" — 1' -0" MULLION BEYOND PREFIN. 000R FRAME ALUM THRESH w/ BEV EDGE ACCESSIBLE PER MFR —SET IN SEALANT EXIST FDN JNT. Sheet Idle STOREFRONT DETAILS 10' -4 1/4" (BLOCS. 1 3 9 12) ''~ 9' -6 1/4" (BLDGS. 2, 4, 10) E0. EQ. lacy NOTE: FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS & CONDITIONS ALL CLEAR GLASS, TYP. —SEE SPECS. TYP. STOREFRONT ELEV. 3/13' = Sara n_ ni)Tt^ Approved By lob Nth 24646.00 Desged SM Ravn NJH Checked Date 6/16/97 Sheer NRber t SYMBOL OF ACCESS MNT. TO EXTERIOR OF GL w/ ADHESIVE. RECENE0 A-4 — 4 am of rutcwi�4 NBBJ 111 South Jackson Street Seattle. Washington 98104 1206) 223 -5555 Fax 1206) 621 -2300 1' -11 t/2 PRECAST CONC. tA -SEE DTL. 17 CAST -IN P1 N LIGHIXT. (SHOWN 5eTTED) LIGHT COLUMN PL/ 1/2- = 1' -0' T EXT. E DTL. 15 PRECAST CONC. CAP -SEE on. 17 RECESSED ELECT. BOX & CONDUIT THRU CMU -SEE ELECT. SPECS. REINF. CMU COLUMNS w/8 )(8)(16 NOM. CORNER UNITS REINF. CONC. FOUNDATION -SEE STRUCT. 1/2° = i' -0" LIGHT COLUMN ELEVATION EMBED PL PER STRUCT. -GALV. FIN. PRECAST CONC. -PT FIN. 1/8" PER FT. 512 DIM. VARIES 1 SEE PLANS 2. - 3" SLOPE TO DRAIN I' -3" TYP. SCUPPER SECTION DTL. 1 1/2" = 1' -0" 1 TRENCH DRAIN J BEYOND -SEE DTL 1' -6" 1' -6" 4. SCUPPER SCUPPER: 12 GA. BENT MET XIST. WALL (V.I.F.) LV TRANSLUCENT PANEL SKYLIGHT OTYP. ENTRY PAVILION: SIDE ELEV. 1/2" = 1' -0" SKYLIGH PNL & FLASHING GALV. & PAINT FIN. PRECAST CONC. CAP 1 1/2" = 1' -0" SURFACE RFACE MNT. LIGHT FIXT -SEE ELECT. SPECS. 8 1/8" 8 1/8 SEALANT PREFIN ALUM FLASH SS SCREW w /NEOPRENE SEALANT TRANSLUCENT PANEL 1/4' BENT PL 13 CANOPY DETAIL @ BRIDGE 3 - 1' -0" /i4 : " +16' - 4" i T /STEEL TS 3 1/2" SQ. - SEE STRUCT. BLDG. ADDRESS NUMBERS: (VARIES) 'GARAMOND BOLD ITALIC FONT 3/8" CUT STEEL PL, GRIND SMOOTH WELD CONNECT. -SEE STRUCT. - PREFIN. 'SILVER METALLIC' GALV MD_ SCUPPER, PT -5 -SEE OTT. 16 I /MASONRY +8' -6" PRECAST CONC. CAP -SEE DTL. 17 SURFACE MNT. UPTIGHT FGT. (DASHED) -SEE ELECT. REINF. CMU COLUMNS w/8x8x16 NOM. CORNER UNITS T /FIN FLR TRENCH DRAIN BEYOND (DASHED) REINF. CONC. FOUNDATION -SEE STRUCT. NOTE: ALL EXPOSED STEEL CONNECT. TO BE CONTIN. WELD & GRIND SMOOTH -PAINT FIN. ( PT -5 ) TS FRAME BEYOND WELDED CONNECT. BLDG. ADDRESS NUMBER PL L WELD TO C CHAN FOR NUMBER PL -SEE STRUCT. T _ ELECT. BOX BEYOND 1� I THRU BOLT CONNECT. PER LIGHT FIXT. MFR. SURFACE MNT. UPLIGHT FIXT. -SEE ELECT. SPECS. CANOPY DETAIL @ LIGHT FIXT. NOTE: ALL PREFIN 16 FIXTURE HOUSING w/ ED & REINF. CORNER REFIN. ' FASTENERS TO M SOLID MET WAY ARCH TOP N. ROUND HEAD HEAD S PER SIDE. PERFORATED : O H0 CT ESAN7 / 6 0 /A ! STAGGERED RS. " 7x7)(3/4" BASE PL L 1)(1)(1/8" PREFIN. BASE CONNECT. EMBED PL IN CONC. CAP ELECT. CONDUIT THRU COL. TS FRAME BEYOND SST LINER SET IN SEALANT HIGH POINT OF GUTTER BEYOND T5 3 1/2" SQ. E0. EQ. OPEN TUKWILA, WASHINGTON BLDG. 10 ONLY —.— OPEN TO SKYLIGHT BEYOND —� EQ. C12 CHAN. -SEE STRUCT. t— OPEN ELECT. CONDUIT THRU CMU (DASHED) -SEE ELECT. T TEWAL0 Et "VARIES 17 PRECAST COLUMN CAP AXOMETR!C LC L. LIGHT FIXT. SECTION GUTTER DETAIL @ BRIDGE 1 1/2" = 1 -0 I. 1 1/2 = 12 = 1' -0' EQ. 1 OPEN PROPOSED FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS & REMODEL OF: SOUTHCEN T ER CORPORATE SQUARE - ISSUED FAR PERMIT TRANSLUCENT PANEL PREFN. ALUM FLASHING BY SKYLIGHT MFR. 1/4' BENT PL GUTTER 6 SKYLIGHT SUPPORT TS FRAME BEYOND SLEEVE CONNECT. FROM GUTTER TO DOWNSPOUT DOWNSPOUT BEYOND 11 GUTTER DETAIL @ BRIDGE E.I.F.S. ON BLDG. PAPER EXIST PLYWD SIDING FLASH & COUNTER FLASHING TRANSLUCENT PANEL PREFIN. ALUM FLASHING BY SKYLIGHT MFR. 1/4' BENT PL GUTTER 6 SKYLIGHT SUPPORT SST LINER SET IN SEALANT -SLOPE TO DRAIN. SLEEVE N 0ONECT. r8OM GUTTER TO DOWNSPOUT TS FRAME BEYOND 3 "0 DOWNSPOUT BEYOND CONNECT TO E ST DRAIN SYSTEM V.I.F.) E.I.F.S. ON BLDG. PAPER TYP. ENTRY PAVILION: FRONT ELEV. 1/2" = 1' -0" 6. 1 } le FACE OF EXIST BLDG. - VARIES (oF) TS 3 1/2" SO. FRAME BELOW (SHOWN DASHED) MET GUTTER & SCUPPER -SEE BLDG. PLANS FOR LOCATIONS. TAPERED STL BRACKETS BELOW (SHOWN DASHED) TRANSLUCENT PANEL SKYLIGHT w/8 "x20" GRID, TYP. TS 3 1/2" S0. FRAME BELOW (SHOWN DASHED) C12 CHAN. (4 SIDES) - SEE STRUCT. SURFACE MNT. UPLIGHT FIXT. BELOW (2 TYP.) PRECAST CONC. CAP (4 TY0.) -SEE 005 17 BLDG. ADDRESS NUMBERS BELOW E.LF.S. ON BLDG PAPER ON EXIST. PLYWD SIDING FLASH & COUNTER FLASH - SEE DTL. 12 SS SCREW w /NEOPRENE SEALANT TRANSLUCENT PANEL BENT PL w /BLOCKING - SEE DTL 16/S2 3/4' ROD 6 SEALANT E.LF.S. ON BLDG. PAPER ON 501ST. PLYWD SIDING -_, TS FRAME BEYOND CANOPY DETAIL @ BLDG WALL CDNTIN. 1/4' BENT PL CANOPY SUPPORT TS 3 1/2' SQ BEYOND 12 GA. GALV. STL GUTTER ATTACH TO STL CHAN TAPERED STL. T BRACKETS BEYOND TRANSLUCENT PANEL PREFIN. L AUM FLASHING 2" 6 1/2" 1 3 1/2" 1 ® SCUPPER DETAIL @ PAVILION Dee By Description 5 Re+ivas C12 11 1/2" CONTIN. 1/4' BET PL CANOPY SUPPORt TS 3 1/2' SQ. BEYOND sm, oB EXTERIOR DETAILS EQ. 5-9" 59 . Approved e bb wt8« 24646.00 3 = i' -0 0. , EQ. DeusedSM Drawn NJ' i ch Dote 6/16/97 8' -11" 1' -3" 7' -6" 1' -11 1/2" OTYP. ENTRY PAVILION ROOF PLAN 1/2" = 1' -0" 6 CANOPY TOP DETAIL SEALANT CANOPY EDGE DETAIL Sheet NwDw DERMR CENTER TRANSLUCENT 0 ANE!c (WHERE OCCURS) - SEE BLDG- PLANS TS 3 1/2' SQ. -SEE STRUCT. FlECEIVED CT' OF IUHWILA A ®5 TRANSLUCENT PANEL ALUM. FLASHING 1/8' CONTIN. BENT PL WELDED TO TS FRAME TS FRAME BEYOND TRANSLUCENT PANEL ALUM. FLASHING TS 3 1/2' SQ. - SEE STRUCT. TS FRAME BEYOND TRANSLUCENT PANEL TS FRAME MEMBER, TYP, 3 1/2' SQ, @ PAVILION TS FRAME BEYOND S TYP. CANOPY PANEL JNT. DETAIL 5' -0" CLR. TO BLDG. & EQUIP. 4 "0 EXTRA STRONG GALV STEEL PIPE w /GONG FILL. PT. FIN. (YELLOW) T /PAVING OR LANDSCAPING —\ N NBBJ 15 "0, 2500 PSI CONC. FOOTING. 13 TYP. BOLLARD DETAIL I 3/4' = 1' -0" 1 -6" 1' -6" i4 TYP. TRENCH DRAIN SEC. 3/4' = 1' -0' 111 South Jack son Street Seattle. Washington 98104 (206) 223 -5555 Fax (206) 621 -2300 2x8 TREATED WD EXIST PLYWD. SOFFIT —PT. TO MATCH EIFS —1 PAVILION COL BEYOND RIVER RUN STONES 1" 0 MAX. T /PAVING OR LANDSCAPING CRUSHED STONE 6 "0 PERFORATED PVC PIPE — CONNECT. TO EXIST SITE DRAINAGE SYS. (V.I.F.) EXIST BLDG LINE —. GU "TER EIFS -1 EXIST TS 1 1/2" x 3 1/2" — PREP. & PT TO MATCH NEW EXIST PLYWD. —PT. TO MATCH EIFS -2 EXIST PLYWD. SOFFIT — PT. TO MATCH EIFS -2 O4 I P. BRIDGE CROSS SECTION 1/2° = 1' -0' PAVING OPEN -- PROVIDE 2' -0" SLIP DOWELS CO JOINTS, TYP, 1x8 TREATED WD ® JNTS. I 6" 6" Y 4" MIN. FREE DRAIN GRAVEL NOTE: N STRIP BARS TION SIDEWALK SECTION SEE PLANS 3/4 = 1' -0' CURB CUT PLAN DETAIL 3/4' = 1' -0' 6' -9 1/4' EXIST 'WIDTH (VIE) ti in - _ -- -3' -0" MIN. - - - - °' T /2ND FLR t3' 3 3" REMOVE EXIST ROOF STRUCT. (SHOWN DOTTED) TRANSLUCENT PANELS CONTIN. TS 3 1/2" SQ. —WELD TO EXIST. FRAME FIELD CUT EXIST TS FRAME @ THIS HT. —DEMO & REMOVE ABOVE. — ALIGN NEW VERT. TS w /EXIST TO REMAIN TS 1 1/2" x 3 1/2" — WELD TO EXIST. FRAME REPLACE EXIST MECH & SPR. PIPES AS RED. w/ GLAM. & PT -5. — RELOCATE TIGHT TO UPPER CORNER AS SHOWN w /SIDE SPRAY HEADS. REMOVE EXIST DOWNSPOUTS —ADD 3 ° 0 24 GA. DOWNSPOUTS TIED TO EXIST. PIPING FROM BRIDGE FLR DRAINS. (PT -5) — EXIST WD RAILING TO REMAIN. —PREP. & PT -5 EIFS -2 OVER EXIST PLYWD, TYP —SEE SHEET A.7 NOTE: ALL EXPOSED STEEL CONNECT. TO BE CONTIN. WELD & GRIND SMOOTH — PAINT FIN. ( PT -5 ) T /1ST FLR 1 RAD. MAX. TOOLED CONTROL JNT. —SEE PLANS BROOM FIN. CONC. PER PLAN 83 BARS 9 24" O.C. EA WAY —SET IN 2 FROM EDGE, TYP. EXIST SIDEWALK AS OCCURS FLUSH TRANSITIONS TO ADJ. PAVING PROPOSED FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS & REMODEL OF: — EXIST TS 1 1/2" x 3 1/2" —PREP. & PT TO MATCH NEW OPEN 7' -6' EXIST WIDTH (VIF) EXIST PLYWD. —PT TO MATCH EIFS -2 EXIST PLYND. SOFFIT —.PT. TO MATCH EIFS -2 TYP. BRIDGE CROSS SECTION 1/2' = W3 CH W BARS AY ® 24" O.C. EA T /SIDEWALK OR GRADE FI FVA11ON SECTION TYP. BENCH ELEVATION /SECTION REMOVE EXIST ELECT. FIXT. & CONDUIT WHERE OCCURS. (MO EIFS -2 SLOPE TOP TO DRAIN SMOOTH ARCH. FIN. CONC. ALL SIDES 1" RAD. MAX. FREE DRAIN GRAVEL 3/4' = 1' -0' G SLOPE TOP TO DRAIN ®14 ° PER FT. EA WAY SMOOTH ARCH. FIN. CONC. ALL SIDES r T /GRADE INTERGRA CONC CURB & AD w/ REINF. STL —SEE OTL. 11 TUKWILA, WASHINGTON BLDG. 10 ONLY /2N FLR + 3 ' -3" 1 -1/2' = 1' -0' SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE - ISSUED F(� PERMIT EX OPEN —T= ADD TS FRAMING EXIST TS OPEN - i/ _L EXIST WD. RAIL li r EIFS OVER EXIST PLYWD EXP. JNT. TYPICAL BRIDGE ELEVATION (3 LOC.) 1/4' = 1' -0' NOTE: FIELD VERIFY ALL EXIST. DIMS. & CONDITIONS PRIOR TO BID. EXIST BLDG. WALL LINE ®TYPICAL BRIDGE PLAN (3 LOCATIONS) 1/4' = 1' -0' ®TYP. CURB SECTION 1 -1/2' = 1' -0' 5" NOM. EXTRUDED CURB —MATCH —EXIST PROFILE (V.I.F.) EXIST AC PAVING TO REMAIN — PATCH AS REQ. REMOVE EXIST AC PAVING AS REO. NImber Dote 22 GA GALV MTL FLASHING FASTEN w/ 1 1/2" GALV NAILS ®12" O.C. 2x4 TREATED WD FRAME w /2x4 STUDS M 16" O.C. 5/8" T -111 POND EA —PT TO MATCC1 EIFS "0 STD G V STL PIPE COL IN C. —BOLT WD FRAME E. TYP. CONTIN. 22 GA GALV FLASHING EA SIDE ONO. PAD —SEE DTL. 11 PLANTING AREA —SEE PLAN EXTRUDED CURB —SEE DTL. 7 EXIST ASPHALT — PATCH AS REQ. 15 "0 2500 PSI CONC. FOOTING. I ZTR ENCLOSURE SECTION TYP BA — EXIST BLDG. i I BEYOND EQ. EQ. , EQ. By Desvprion of Remora 3" LEADER CONNECT. TO EXIST DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSIDE BLDG. WALL. (VIF) GUTTER & FLASHING -- DOWNSPOUT CONNECT TO EXIST DRAINAGE SYSTEM. TRANSLUCENT PANEL © EXIST FLOOR SKYLIGHT �:/ DRAINS (VIF) TS MET FRAME & FLASHING ROOF PLAN — OPEN TO BEYOND -- 5eer sRe EXTERIOR DETAILS SITE DETAILS FLOOR PLAN De9pnedSM Dmwn N.T agaed Date 6/16/97 EXP. 565, EXIST BISIG. WALL LINE EXIST SOFFIT ABOVE 4 ST1 FRAME ABOVE Shear NA., Approved By b6 Natter 24646.00 ' EFMIT CENTER 1 1 EXIST BLDG_ — RECEIVED A-6 _ 6 CITY OF TUKWILp NBBJ Ill South Jackson Street Seattle. Washington 98104 12061 223 - 5555 Fax (206) 621 - 2300 1 -1/2" SQ. WD TRIM SET IN SEALANT -PT ALL SIDES TO MATCH ADJ. EIFS COLOR BACKER & SEALANT LINE OF EXIST WINDOW SILL BELOW WRAP EIFS ON 1 -1/2" FOAM TYP. HEAD AT METAL BOX 3' = If EXIST MTL BOX t - = EXIST MTL BOX 1/2" SNT & BACKER ALLOW 1" OPEN SPACE AT EA. r END FOR DRAINAGE 22 GA. MET l —1 FLASHING (SHOWN @ RIGHT) FLASHING DTL. CONTIN. 1 -1/2" SQ. WD TRIM -PT ALL SIDES TO MATCH ADJ. EIFS COLOR 22 GA. MET FLASHING BLDG. PAPER EIFS ON 1 1/2" FOAM, TYP. 1/2" SNT & BACKER 10" BLDG. PAPER OVERLAP T EXIST. SIDING OTYP. JAMB AT METAL BOX (SILL SIM.) 16 EIFS @ WINDOW JAMB = EXIST. SIDING L_ EXIST. HM DOOR FRAME *METAL DOOR JAMB (HEAD SIM.) = COLOR PRIME & SEALANT EIFS ON 1 1/2" FOAM w/45' TAPER TO JNT @ FRAME & ALLOW FOR DOOR SWING, TYP. EXIST. WINDOW EXIST. SIDING MULLION TO REMAIN. 30 LB. BLDG. PAPER EIFS ON 1 1/2" FOAM BLDG. PAPER OVER FLASHING EXIST SIDING 1/2" SEALANT & BACKER ROD, TYP. PARAPET FLASHING -SEE DTL 1 SADDLE FLASHING -WRAPS BEYOND ®SADDLE FLASH SECTION 3 = EIFS ON 1 1/2" 1 '.AM BLDG. PAPER TYP. EXIST PIPE PENETRATION EXIST. SIDING EIFS ON 1 1/2" FOAM, TYP. EIFS ON 1" FOAM 30 LB. BLDG. PAPER EXIST. SIDING TO REMAIN EIFS ON 1" FOAM BLDG. PAPER EXIST. SIDING COLOR PRIME BACKER ROD & SEALANT EXIST. WINDOW FRAME 12 WINDOW JAMB 3 = 1' -0' PROPOSED FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS & REMODEL OF: SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 1/2° SEALANT JNT ALL AROUND PIPE w/ BACKER ROD, TYP. COND. AT TYP. PIPE PENETRATION 3' = 11 CORNER RETURN - PLAN VIEW PARAPET FLASHING -SEE DTL 1 SHOP FABRICAIED SADDLE FLASHING (SHOWN DASHED) PARAPET FLASHING -SEE DTL 1 SADDLE FLASH AXOMETRIC 3' = 1' -0' NOTE: CENTER REVEAL ON MID. WINDOW MULLIONS, OR ALIGN EDGE OF REVEAL WITH OUTSIDE EDGE OF END MULLION AT END OF WINDOW BAY. -SEE BLDG. ELEVATIONS. O TYPICAL VERTICAL REVEAL 3' =1' -0' EXIST. WINDOWS TO REMAIN —► 3' = 1' -0' ' QW ()WINDOW SILL @ 2nd floor 3 = U ISSUED FOR PERMIT BLDG. 10 ONLY EXIST. WINDOW'S TO REMAIN EXISTING FLASHING - CUT TO MAINTAIN 1" TAB AS SHOWN. -WIRE BRUSH CLEAN, PREP & PT TO MATCH ADJ. EIFS COLOR. 22 GA MTL. FLASHING SET IN SEALANT -SEE DTL BELOW EIFS SYSTEM ON 1 -1/2" FOAM BUILDING PAPER EXIST. SIDING EXISTING FLASHING TO REMAIN AS SHOWN -WIRE BRUSH CLEAN, PREP & PT TO MATCH ADJ. EIFS COLOR. 22 GA MTL. FLASHING SET IN SEALANT -SEE DTL BELOW EIFS SYSTEM ON 1 -1/2" FOAM BUILDING PAPER WINDOW SILL @ 1ST FLOOR 'L?� EIFS SYSTEM ON 1 -t/2" FOAM .Y3 Dore C FLASHING DTL. NOTE COORDINATE PARAPET FLASHING w/ REROOFING WORK BY OTHERS. REMOVE EXIST. CAP FLASHING SYSTEM. (SHOWN DASHED) CONT. 20 GA. GALV. CLEAT OVER EXIST ROOFING. EXIST WALL & ROOF TO REMAIN. Dewprm A ReAecm 'v V ®TYP. PARAPET SECTION 3 = EXIST WALL CONST. TO REMAIN. LINE OF SOFFIT BEYOND I/2" ®TYP. HORIZONTAL REVEAL SEC. = r -0" EXIST WALL CONST. TO REMAIN. ! / / // / /./ / /// EXIST PLYWD SOFFIT (NOT LEVEL) -PT. TO MATCH ADJ. E.I.F.S. FIN. COLOR ®TYP. SOFFIT SECTION = TYP. SILL SECTION 3' = Sheer r� E.1.F.S. DETAILS TREATED SOLID BLOCKING 24 GA GALV. MTL SNAP -ON CAP FLASHING w /SLIP JNTS. @ 12' -0" O.C. -PT TO MATCH ADJ. EIFS. CONTIN. 20 GA GALV. CLEAT PLYWD FILLER AS REQ. E.I.F.S. ON 1 1/2" FOAM 30 L3. BUILDING PAPER EXISTING PPM. SIDING (5/8" THK) EIFS MECH. FASTENERS ATTACH TO EXIST SIDING (TYPICAL) EIFS SYSTEM ON 1 - 1/2" EDAM 30 LB. BUILDING PAPER "XIST!NG SIDING (5/8" THK) PLYWD FILLER AS REQ. REMOVE EXISTING CLEAT (SHOWN DASHED) T SLOPE TO DRAIN @ 6:12 EIFS SYSTEM ON 1 -1/2" FOAM 30 LB. BUILDING PAPER EXISTING PLYWD SIDING (5,/8" THK) PLYWD FILLER AS REQ. PROVIDE STRAIGHT, LEVEL FIN. EDGE -ALIGN TO LOWEST POINT OF SOFFIT. COLOR PRIME, ROD & SEALANT - —JI EIFS SYSTEM V I ON 1 -1/2" FOAM EXIST WALL CONST. 30 LB. BUILDING PAPER G LAP OVER TRACK TO REMAIN. -- /ILI EXISTING PLYWD ■ SIDING (5/8" THK) 1. FINISH SURFACE OF EXTERIOR INSUL & FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) SHALL HAVE LESS THAN 1/8 IN. 20 GA. GALV MTL UNDULATION PER 10 FT. FLAT BAR. w /WEEPS @ 24" O.C. - _ L�� SET !N SEALANT 2. CONTRACTOR TO PREP EXIST T1 -11 "— REMOVE EXIST EARTH SIDING AS REQ. FOR E.I.F.S. SUBSTRATE EXIST. FLASHING, —, w �„_ -- AS RED (VIF) SPECS. REMOVE ANY DEFECTS & ADD SCREW ANCHORS TO PROVIDE TO REMAIN ° r ' WIRE BRUSS CLEAN FLAT SURFACE w/ 1 /8" MAX. La_ EXPOSED CONC. UNDULATION PER 10 FT. FLAT BAR. NEW GRADE LINE REPLACE DETERIORATED SIDING PANEL ° SECTIONS AS REO. Scale PERMIT CENTER Approved By Job Nebeh 24646.00 DevgedTD Row. JC Checked Date 6/16/97 GENERAL E.I.F.S. NOTES : 3. CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY EXIST WINDOW CONDITIONS PRIOR TO STARI OF E.I.F.S. APPLICATION & CONFIRM INTEGRITY OF BLDG WATERTIGHTNESS. - NOTIFY OWNER OF ANY CONFLICTS. 4. DEMO + REMOVE EXIST TRIM & FLASHING AS SHOWN. Sheet Ad,d« RECEIVED CITY oe TUK'NRA A-7 OF SOFFIT (SHOWN AS BBL LINES) TO EDGE OF SOFFIT (SHOWN DASHED) ..._,0 O 0 �� - -� _ J _ I 0 0 0 _ 3 � � ( (3� 3) � (3) ( (3) H J 2 3 © 3 0 1 - II © 1 (3T ( 3 n \ 0 �� - -� _ J NBBJ 3 1/8" = 1' -0" 111 South Jackson Street Seattle. Washington 98104 (2061 223 -5555 Fax (206) 621 -2300 ®EAST ELEVATION i /8° = 1' -0° ®WEST ELEVATION BEAST ELEVATION 1/8" = 1/8" = 1. -0" ®WEST ELEVATION = (3) O (3T (3 O (3 -) °NORTH ELEVATION 1/8" = 1' -0" 0 ®SOUTH ELEVATIONI■ 1 /8" = Y� I (3) ADD EIFS TO EXIST. BRIDGE STRUCT. (SHOWN DASHED) TYP. tl G (3) 0 TUKWILA, WASHINGTON BLDG. 10 ONLY 2" REVEAL JOINT ALIGNED TO ST MUWONS OR TO EDGE ALIGN EDGE OF R VEALS AT CORNER OF MUWON JOINT (TIP.) L J L_ PROPOSED FACILITIES IMPROVEMENTS & REMODEL OF: SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE - ISSUED FOR PERMIT 3 ()NORTH ELEVATION 1/8" = 1' -0" ©SOUTH ELEVATION 1/8" = J i .IA TIP. ELEVATION AT REVEALS (3) O II 3 O O 3 Desvphn of Reidvu 3/8- iViTNI ON INT ALIGNED TO CENTERLINE OF EXIJOST MUWONS Cbi I (3) ALIGN CENTER OF REVEAL TO CENTERLNE OF EXIST MULLIONS CFR') BUIL2TNG5.43, 3 II 3 Approved By O (3) BUILDINGS 2,4,10 geeL Tee EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS Skin application, color key D m i M m d SM Dra m JC ceded Dote 6/16/97 ee Nvrba 24646.00 PERMR CENTER GENERAL ELEV. NOTES: 1. INSTALL EXTERIOR INSUL & FINISH SYSTEM (E.I.F.S.) OVER EXIST PLYWD SIDING THROUGHOUT. -BLDG. ELEVATIONS ILLUSTRATED HERE FOR GEN. SCOPE ONLY. CONTRACTOR SHALL FEILD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS PRIOR TO BID. 2. SEE ELEV. T /A -8 FOR TIP. NOTES SHALL APPLY THROUGHOUT. - SEE SHEET A -7 FOR TYP. E.I.F.S. DETAILS. CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE W /FIELD CONDITIONS. 3. EXISTING DOORS & WINDOWS TO REMAIN (U.N.O.) 4. REMOVE & REPLACE EXIST LANDSCAPING AS REO. - COORDINATE WITH OWNER REP. 5. PAINT SOFFIT @ 2ND FLOOR WINDOWS TO MATCH EIFS -t. PAINT SOFFIT CO 1ST FLOOR WNDOWS TO MATCH EIFS -2. 6. ON BLDG. 9 ONLY, PAINT EXIST PLYWD SUN SHADES TO MATCH ADJ. EIFS. 7. SUBMIT COLOR SAMPLES TO OWNER FOR APPROVAL. OWNER RETAINS RIGHT TO CHOOSE FINAL COLORS FROM MFR. FULL RANGE OF STANDARD & PREMIUM COLORS. 8. SUBMIT ALTERNATE BID TO ADD HEAVY DUTY MESH ON WALL AREAS ADJACENT TO 1ST FLOOR BLDG ENTRANCES (2 PER BLDG.) -AREAS TO COVER FULL PANEL SECTIONS BTWN BLDG CORNERS FROM TOP OF SIDEWALKS UP TO SOFFIT OR REVEAL LINE FOR FULL WIDTH WHERE SIDEWALK TOUCHES BLDG FACES. (V.I.F.) - COORDINATE WITH OWNER REP. COLOR KEY: O LIGHT: EIFS-1 O MEDIUM: EIFS -2 O DARK: EIFS -3 RECEIVED CIT NEZ,WILB A-8 ‘•) c\> NBBJ 111 South Jackson Street Seattle, Washington 98104 1206) 223 -5555 Fax (206) 621 -2300 General Structural Notes - APPLY JALESS , --,DAN C74ERN SE ON THE DRNAINGS, CRITERIA: mATERSALS W'R\mAN_ : :P s:G\ AND GONSTReCT:ON SH4__ woe 7 0 THE DRAWINGS ":CA AND THE J \:=T'm B, LL NG CODE .'9 EDITION DES:5\ LOADING CR ITER IA. R00' _:Y _QAD - LOCI LIME LOAD STAR AND CORRIDOR _:VE 'LOAD W: ND EARTHQUAKE _= PLANS FOR AD7I -:0 \A_ LOADING CRITER:A FOUNDATIONS: 25 PSF 50 P5F 100 PSF 80 MPH, EXPOSURE `5" ZONE 3 RuON RAL DRAWINGS SHALL SEE JSD IN CON- UNCTION WITH ARC- :TEGTURAL DRAWINGS FOR BIDDING AND G 3 STRUC - t3\ CONTRACTOR SHA JER ".' DIMENSIONS AND GOAD:TIONS FOR COMPATIBILITY AND SHALL \C -' ARCH: -C 0' AN' DISLEFeNC:E5 PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. CO\TRALTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL EXISTING DIMENSIONS MEMBER SIZES AND 3ONDIT10N5 PRIOR TO CMMENCIN6 AN" x3 . Au_ :: EMEI3N5 0= EX157;N6 CONSTRUCTION SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS ARE INTENDED AS 3,, :35 :333 Ole" ANT, MET 5E VERIFIED CONTRACTOR S -A'__ FF0'J :3E TEMPORARY 5R431N6 FOR THE STRUCTURE AND STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS UNTIL ALL =: \4'- CONNEC:0 \S -AVE 3 COMPLETE IN ACCORDANCE e:TL T E PLANS. 6 COI\TiAL SHALL BE RE5RONSIBLE FOR ALL SAFETY PRELAUTION'S AM: THE METHOD5, TECHNIQUES, SEOUENGES OR 3300EDJR? REO'U:RE' TO PEFo33 THE WORK. - CO\T R- INITIATED 31 -AN6ti 5H3L- BE SUBMITTED IN WRI3:36 TO THE ARCHITECT AND STRUCTURAL EU :e =CRS A3ROVAL PR10R TO FABRICATION OR CONSTRJLL ON. CHANGES SHOWN ON SHOP DRAWINGS ONLY WI_ NOT SATISFY THIS RESU REMINT ;RAWIN65 INDICATE GENERAL AND TYPICAL DETAILS OF GONSTRJG - ION. WERE CNDITIOMS ARE NOT • :RICA;" INLLL4r D BUT' ARE 03 SIMILAR CHARACTER TO DETAILS SHOWN, SIMILAR DETAILS OF OCMETR.!`I0\ SHALL BE USED SU3ECT 70 REVi33 AND APPRO'VA'L BY THE ARCHITECT AND THE STRUCTURAL ENS: Nc<. A_ STRUCTURAL 5'5E 45 KNECH ARE TO BE COMPOSED OF COMPONENTS 70 BE `MELD ERECTED SHALL BE SUP- Ni'V:S=_. '-„" THE S PP_:ER DLTRIN6 MANUFACTURING, DELIVER" HANDL:NS 330RA3E AND 030031ON :N 4G:OR'3ANCE A:7, 13TRUOTION5 PREPARED BY THE SUPPLIER. S DRAWINGS FOR R 134=03GIN6 FEL FE! FOR BOTH CONCRETE AND MASONRY CONSTRUGTIOMU', AND STRUCTURAL STEEL SHALL BE 34J33M := TO THE ARCHITECT AND STTRICTURAL EN61NER FOR REVIEW PRIOR TO FA3RILA'1033 OF THEE :TENS STOP JR3IN5 REVIEW- DIME431O5 AND QUANTITIES ARE NOT RVIEMED BY THE EN344333 R OF RECORD, THEC'ORE MUST BE VERIFIED EY THE CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR SHALL REVIEW AND 5TAMP DRA191N65 PRIOR TO RR -VIEW BY EN &IN ER OF RECORD. SUBMITTALS SHALL INCLUDE A REPRODUCIBLE MD ONE 0033; R_E WILL 5E 33333 D AND RETURNED. SHOP DRAAIN6 SUBMITTALS: PROCESSED BY THE ENG:MEER ARE NOT CRANE ORDERS. THE PURPOSE OF SHOP DRAAINS SU5M;TiAIS 3, THE OO4TRACTOR 15 TO DEMONSTRATE i0 THE ENGINEER THAT THE CAN UNDERSTANDS THE 333 3N ;ONGEPT BY INDIGAT1N6 WHICH MATERIAL 15 INTENDED TO BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED AND BY 3333141333 THE INTBJD3i FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION METHOD. IF DEVIATIONS, DISGREPANG1ES, OR CONFLICTS BETY0' 0307 DRAA :N6 SUBMITTALS AND THE CONTRACT DOOJMENTS ARE DISCOVERED EITHER PRIOR TO OR A -CTRL JH✓ DRONING SUBMITTALS ARE PR0GE55ED BY THE ENGINEER, THE DESIGN DRAWIN65 AND _3:F :03 SiAL2 CONTROL AND SHALL BE FOLLOWED. 330' DR3WIN63 OF D:t1614 BUILD CMPONINTS INGLUDIN6 ELEVATORS SHALL INCLUDE THE DESI3NIN6 PROFESSIONAL EN6 NEER'3 STAMP. STATE OF 345HIN6TON AND SHALL BE APPROVED BY THE C330303T DFSI63ER PRIOR TO OJRSOR_ REVIEW BY THE ENS NEER OF RECORD FOR LOAD IMPOSED ON THE BASIC 5TRUCTURE. THE COMPONENT COMPONENT 9F516NER 15 RESPONSIBLE FOR CODE CONFORMANCE AND ALL NECESSARY 0o3300TIO33 NOT SPECIFICALLY CALLED OU ON ARGHITECTORAL OR STRUCTURAL DR3WING5. SWOP DRAWIN35 SHALL INDICATE MAGNITUDE AND DIRECTION OF ALL LOADS IMPOSED ON BA5I0 STRUCTURE. DESIGN CALCULATIONS SHALL BE MAD= 3VA,EA3LE UPON REQUEST. 2. INSPECTION: LONCETE CONSTRUCTION, PRECAST CONG33TE ERECTION, MASONRY CONSTRUCTION, STRUCTURAL 3703' FABRICATION AND ERECTION (INCLUD1N6 FIELD WEL.DI346 AND HIGH- STRENGTH FIELD BOLTINS), EXPANSION 3005 AND THREADED EXPANSION INSERTS, EPDXY 6ROUTED INSTALLATIONS, PLYWOOD SHEARWALL NAILING, AND DIAPHRAGM NAILING SHALL BE SUPERVISED IN ACCORDANCE WITH 3EGTION 1101 OF THE UNIFORM 30100 N6 LODE AND K 41v HE PROJECT C F' Ai Y A 5°E�I 1L ]O�- B QUALIFIED TESTING A6EN Y _ A T4 G DESIGNATED BY THE R&H['TEGT. E ARGL — dT AND 3TR,GTUR30 ENGINEER SHALL BE FURNISHED WIT, COPIES OF ALL INSPECTION REPORTS AND _EST RESULTS. '5. FOUNDATION NOTES: ALLOWABLE SOIL PRESSURE AND LATERAL EARTH PRESSURE ARE ASSUMED AND THEREFORE MUST BE VERIFIED BY A QUALIFIED 50IL5 ENGINEER. IF SOILS ARE FOUND TO BE OTHER THAN ASSUMED, NOTIFY THE STRUCTURAL ENbiNER FOR POSSIBLE FOUNDATION REDE516N. FOOTIN65 SHALL BEAR ON FIRM, UNDISTURBED EARTH AT LEAST 18" BELOW ADJACENT FINISHED 6RADE. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, FOOT43465 SHALT_ BE CENTERED BELOW COLUMNS OR WALLS ABOVE. 5ACCFIL_ 0 3,IND AL RETAINING WALLS WITH FREE DRAININ6, 6RANULAR FILL AND PROVIDE FOR SUBSURFACE DRAT NAG ALLOWABLE SOIL PRESSURE 2.000 P5F LATERAL EARTH PRESSURE 35 PGF ;4 DEMOLITION, CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS BEFORE COMMENCING ANY DEMOLITION. SHORING SHALL BE INSTALLED TO SUPPORT EXISTING CONSTRUCTION A5 REQUIRED AND IN A MANNER SUITABLE TO THE WORK 5EQ'JENGES. EXI5TIN6 REINFORCING SHALL BE SAVED WHERE AND AS NOTED ON THE PLANS. 5AW "135, IF AND WHERE USED SHALL NOT GUT EXISTING REINFORCING THAT 15 TO BE SAVED. DEMOLITION DEBRIS SHALL NOT BE ALLOWED TO DAMAGE OR OVERLOAD THE EXISTING STRUCTURE. LIMIT CONSTRUCTION 0ADIN6 ( INCLUDING DEMOLITION DEBRIS ON EXISTING FLOOR 5"STEM5 TO 40 P5F. A. ALL NEW OPENIN65 THR0U6H EX157IN6 HALLS, SLABS AND BEAMS SHALL BE 63403 Li5HERi BY SAW LUTT4N6 W'HZVER POSSIBLE. LONZL ACTOR SHALL ✓0K1FY ALL EXI5TIN6 CONDITIONS AND LOCATION OF MEMBERS PRIOR TO (JUTTING ANY OPEN1465 • SMALL ROUND OPEN1N55 SHALL BE AGGOMPL iSHED BY CORE DRILLING, IF 30SSIBLE. COUGHLIN PORTER LUNDEEN A CONSULTING STRUCTURAL AND CIVIL ENGINEERING CORPORATION 217 PINE STREET - SUITE 520 3: 206/343 -0460 SEATTLE, WA 98101 F: 206/343 -5691 CONCRETE 15. CONCRETE SHALL BE MIXED, PROPORTIONED, CONVEYED AND PLACED IN ACCORDANCE WITH UBL SECTION 1905 AND ALI 301. CONCRETE SMALL ATTAIN A 28 -DAY STRENGTH OF f'c = 2,500 P51 AND MIX SHALL CONTAIN NOT LESS THAN 58 530,5 OF GEMINI PER CUBIC YARD AND SHALL BE PROPORTIONED TO PRODUCE A SLUMP OF 5 OR LESS. THE MINIMUM AMOUNTS OF CEMENT AND MAXIMUM AMOUNTS OF WATER MAY BE CHANGED IF A CONCRETE PERFORMANCE MIX 15 SUBMITTED TO THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER AND THE BJILDI346 DEPARTMENT FOR APPROVAL TWO MEEK5 PRIOR TO 7L3GIN16 ANY CONCRETE. THE CONCRETE PERFORMANCE MIX SHALL INCLUDE THE AMOUNTS OF GE ENT, FINE AND COARSE AGGREGATE, WATER AND ADMIXTURES A5 NELL A5 THE WATER CEMENT RATIO, SLUMP, CONCRETE YIELD AND SU85TANTIATIN6 STRENGTH DATA IN ACCORDANCE WITH AGI 318 -69, CHAPTER 5. REVIBV OF MIX SUBMITTALS BY THE EN6INIEER OF RECORD INDICATES ONLY THAT INFORMATION PRESENTED 30330345 6EN RALLY WITH CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. CONTRACTOR OR SUPPLIER MAINTAINS FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR SPECIFIED PERFORMANCE. ALL CONCRETE WITH 5URFAGES EXPOSED TO STANDING WATER SHALL BE AIR - ENTRAINED WITH AN AIR- OONTENT CONFORMING TO 1994 U.B.G. TABLE 19 -A -I. GONGMETE MAY BE PLACED BY THE "5H070E7E" METHOD, PROVIDED THE 633306AL5, TESTS, AND INSPEGTION5 REQUIRED BY THE BUILDI346 DEPARTMENT ARE OBTAINED. SHOTGRETE MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, 33000 J3E5, PROPORTIONS, HATCHING AND MIXIN6 AND PLACEMENT SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH AGI 506R -60 AND 1994 UDC SECTION 1922. THE "SHOTCR'TE METHOD SHALL NOT BE USED WITHOUT MAKING SPECIAL ARRANGEMENTS THROUGH OWNER AND ENSINEBR UNLESS 5TRU&1U330 DRAWIN55 ARE SPECIFICALLY DETAILED TO ACCOMMODATE SHOTCRETIN6. IN 301343 RCIN6 STEEL SHALL BE DETAILED (IN00331 K HOOKS AND BENDS) IN ACCORDANCE WITH A&I 315 -92 AND 318 -89. LAP ALL REINFORCEMENTS IN ACORDANCE WITH 'THE RE!NFOR&1N6 SPLICE AND DEVELOPMENT LENGTH SCHEDULE " PROVIDE CORNER BARS AT ALL WALL AND FOOTING INTERSECTIONS. LAP ADJACENT MAT5 OF 3ELDED WIRE FABRIC A MINIMUM OF 8° AT SIDES AND ENDS. NO BARS PARTIALLY EMBEDDED IN HARDENED CONCRETE SHALL BE FIELD BENT UNLESS SPECIFICALLY 50 DETAILED OR APPROVED BY THE STRUCTURAL EN5INEER. 17 . 003QETE PROTECTION (COVER) FOR REINFORCIN5 STEEL SHALL BE A5 FOLLOWS: FOOT :355 AND OTHER UNFORMED SURFACES CAST AGAINST AND PERMANENTLY EXPOSED TO EARTH 3" FORMED SURFACES EXPOSED TO EARTH (i.e. HALLS BELOW 6ROJND) OR WEATHER ( BAR OR LARGER). 2" ( BAR OR SMALLER). CC-JMN TIES OR SPIRALS AND BEAM STIRRUPS I9" SLABS AND HALLS (INTERIOR FACE) 6REATER OF (BAR DIAMETER PLUS 8") or q" 18. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE: SEE ARCHITECTURAL 333344355 FOR EXALT LOGATIONS AND DIMENSIONS OF DOOR AND WINDOW OPENINGS IN ALL CONCRETE WALL5. SEE MEGNANIGAL DRAWIN55 FOR SIZE AND LOCATION OF M156ELLANE0U5 MECHANICAL OPENINGS THIROU53 CONCRETE HALLS. SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR ALL 6ROOV - t5. NOT03E5, CHAMFERS, FEATURE STRIPS, COLOR, TEXTURE, AND 013432 FINISH DETAILS AT ALL EXPOSED CONCRETE SURFACES, BOTH GAST -IN -PLACE AND PRECAST. MASONRY: 19. CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT HALLS SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED OF GRADE N, TYPE I UNIT5, CONFORMING TO ASTM 090, LAID IN A RUNNIN6 BOND. MORTAR SHALL BE TYPE "5" PER TABLE 2I -A OF THE U5C. GROUT SHALL CONFORM TO L'BC REQUI310315 AND ATTAIN A MINIMUM COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF 2,000 RI AT 28 DAY5, DE516N F'm = 1500 P5I. STRENGTH SHALL BE VERIFIED BY PRISM TE5TIN6 IN ACCORDANCE WITH UBG SECTION 2105.3, OR MASONRY UNITS SHALL BE C3OEN IN AOGORDANGE WITH UBG TABLE 21 -D. FULL STRESSES ARE REQUIRED. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, PROVIDE THE 300003IN6 REINFORCEMENT: STEEL: 4" WALE 6" HALE 8" WALLS 10 WALLS 12° WALLS 44 9 48 "oc. VERT 44 9 48 "oc. VERT. 45 9 48 "oc. VERT. 4 5 9 "oc. VERT. 45 9 32 "oc. VERT. t' dia. WIRE JOINT R 434303CIN6 AT 8 HORIZ. (2) 44 9 48'oc. HORIZ. (2) 45 9 48°oc. HORIZ. (2) 45 9 48 ° oc. HORIZ. (2) 45 9 40 "oc. HORIZ. IN ADDITION PROVIDE (1) 45 44 9 6" AND 4° WALLS) VERT. AT EACH SIDE OF OPENINGS AT WALL CORNERS AND INTERSECTIONS AND AT FREE ENDS OF WALLS AND (2) 4 5 ((2)44 9 6' WALLS AND 44 9 4" WALLS HORIZ. AT ELEVATED FLOOR AND ROOF LEVELS, AT TOPS OF WALLS AND ABOVE AND BELOW ALL OPENIN65. ALL HORIZONTAL REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE PLACED IN BOND BEAMS. EXTEND REINFORCEMENT AROUND OPENIN65 2' -0" BEYOND FACE OF OPENING. IF 2' -0" 15 UNAVAILABLE EXTEND AS FAR AS POSSIBLE AND HOOK. PROVIDE CORNER BAR TO LAP HORIZONTAL REINFORCING AT CORNERS AND INTERSECTIONS. FILL ALL CELLS GONTAININ6 REINFORCEMENT OR EMBEDDED ITEMS AND ALL CELLS BELOW GRADE WIT 6R0UT. PROVIDE GLEANOUT HOB AT BOTTOM OF ALL &ELLS CNTAININ6 REINFORCEMENT. ANCHORAGE: 20. EPDXY - GROUTED ITEMS (THREADED ROD OR REINFORCING BAR) SPECIFIED ON THE DRAWIN65 SHALL BE INSTALLED U51N6 HEA RESIN AS MANUFACTURED BY HILTI CORP. INSTALL IN 5TRICT ACLORDANGE WITH I.G.B.0. REPORT N0. 4016. SPECIAL INSPECTION OF INSTALLATION IS REQUIRED. ROD SHALL BE ASTM A -301 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 21. DRIVE PINS AND OTHER POWDER - ACTUATED FASTENERS SHALL BE LOW VELOCITY TYPE (SERIES 1500, 0.14" DIAMETER UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) 05 MANUFACTURED BY RAM5ET /RED HEAD OR AN APPROVED EQUIVALENT IN STRENGTH AND EMBEDMENT. INSTALL IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH 1.0.0.0. REPORT N0. 1639. MINIMUM EMBEDMENT IN 003406ETE SHALL BE 1" UNLESS OTHERWISE `TOTED. MAINTAIN AT 00331 3' TO NEAREST CONCRETE EDGE. 22. EXPANSION BOLTS INTO CONCRETE SHALL BE KWIK BOLT II AND THREADED EXPANSION INSERTS INTO CONCRETE SHALL BE SLEEVE ANCHOR A5 MANUFACTURED BY HILTI CORE. INSTALLED IN 5TRIGT ACCORDANCE WITH I.C.5.0. REPORT N0. 4621 INGLUDIN6 MINIMUM EMBEDMENT REQUIREMENTS. SUBSTITUTES PROPOSED BY CONTRACTOR SHALL BE SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW WITH 1.0.0.0. REPORTS INDICATING EQUIVALENT OR 6REATER LOAD CAPACITIES. THESE PRODUCTS ARE NOT RATED FOR 350 IN MASONRY UNIT5. 5PECIAL INSPECTION 15 REQUIRED FOR ALL EXPANSION BOLT AND INSERT INSTALLATION. 23. STRUGTJRAL 57E<L INGLUDIN6 PLATES AND ROLLED SHAPES, SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A36, Fy = 36 KSI. STEEL PIPE SHALL CONFORM TO A57M A -53, TYPE E OR 5, 6RADE 0, Fy = 35 K51. STRUCTURAL TUBIN6 SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A500, GRADE A, Fy = 46 K51. ANCHOR BOLTS AND CONNECTION BOLE SHALL CONFORM TO 65166 A307. 24. ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL SHALL CONFORM TO 5EGTION 10 OF THE AI50 GODS OF STANDARD PRACTIGE FOR STEEL BUILDIN65 AND 56106E5, ADOPTED SEPTEMBER I, 1986. SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON G 25. ALL WELDING SHALL BE IN CONFORMANCE WITH A. 1.5. C. AND A. W.5. STANDARDS AND SHALL BE PERF03 0T BY 3,3,0 O. CERTIFIED WELDES USING: E70 XX ELECTRODES. ONLY 36300 LIFTED WELDS (A5 DEFINED BY A.W.5.) SHALL BE USED. 0E02136 OF 6RADE 60 REINFORCING BARS (IF REQJIRE0) SHALL BE PERFORMED U51N6 LOW HYDR06034 ELEGTRODES. WELDING OF GRADE 40 REINFORCING BARS (IF SQUIRED) SHALL BE PERFORMED U5IN6 ETOXX ELECTRODES. WELDINS WITHIN 4" OF COLD BENDS IN 601333 RCIN6 STEEL 15 NOT PERMITTED. SEE REINFORCING NOTE FOR MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS OF WELDED BARS. WOOD: 26. FRAMING LUMBER SHALL BE KILN DRIED OR MG -19, AND &RATTED AND MARKED IN CONFORMANCE WITH W. G. L.B. STANDARD 6RADIN6 RULES FOR WEST COA5T LUMBER N0. IT FURNISH TO THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM STANDARDS: JOIST5, (2x MEMBERS) 136 AND 4x MEMBER) BEAMS AND STRINAER5. (INGLUDIN6 6x AND LARGER MEMBERS POST5, (4x MEMBERS) (6x 6 LARGER MEMBER) STUDS, PLATES, LEDGERS 6 MISCELLANEOUS L16HT FRAMING 5' = NEW REQUIRED 5PACIN6 5 = DESIGN 5730135 563033 ON THE DRAWIN65 DI = DIAMETER OF SUBSTITUTED NAIL 02 = DIAMETER OF COMMON NAIL SHOWN IN TABLE AT RI633 . HEM -FIR No. 2 MINIMUM BASIC DE515N STRESS, FB = 850 PS'., Fv = 75 P51 HEM -FIR N0. 1 MINIMUM BASIC DESIGN 5TRE55, Eo = 950 PSI, Fv = 75 PSI DOUGLAS FIR N0. 1 MINIMUM BASIC DE516N STRESS, Fb = '350 Psi 3, = 85 P5: HEM -FIR N0. 1 MINIMUM BASK DESi6N STRESS, Fc = 1300 P51 E _ 'SO0 K5: DOUOLA5 FIR N0. 1 MINIMUM BASK DEDI6N 57RE55, Fc = 1000 R: E _ '600 KS: HEM -FIR N0. 3 OR 570 GRADE MINIMUM BASK DESIGN 51RE55, Fb = 500 P51, E _ '200 K51 Fc = 125 P51 NOTE FINKED. JOINTED STUDS MAY BE SUBSTITUTED ONLY IF THEY MEET PRESCRIBED STRESS CRITERIA. NOTE: WHERE NOTED ON THE PLANS, PLATES 5EAL BE DOUFLA5 FIR N0. 3 OR STUD GRADE. 27 . ALL WOOD PLATES IN DIRECT CONTACT WITH CONCRETE OR MASONRY SHALL BE PRE55URE-TREATE0 WITH Al, APPROVED PRESERVATIVE. PROVIDE 2 LAYERS OF ASPHALT IMPREGNATED BUILDING PAPER BET71EN UNTREATED LESSER, BLOGKIN6, ETC., AND CONCRETE OR MASONRY. 28. TIMBER CONNECTOR GALLED OUT BY LETTER AND NUMBER SHALL BE "STRONG -TIE" BY 511133 N COMPANY, A5 5300131ED IN THEIR GATAL06 N0. 6-66. EQUIVALENT DEVICES BY OTHER MANUFACTURES MAY BE SUBSTITUTED, PROVIDED THEY HAVE ICAO APPROVAL FOR EQUAL OR GREATER LOAD CAPACITIES AND ARE SUBMITTED TO THE ENGINEER FOR APPROVAL. PROVIDE NUMBER AND SIZE OF FASTENER AS SPECIFIED BY MANUFACTURER. CONNECTORS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER'S RCOMM134DATIONS. WHERE CONNECTOR 5TP4P5 CONNECT TWO M E MBER, PLA.GE ONE -HALF OF THE NAILS OR BOLTS IN EACH 1.1EM5ER. ALL BOLTS IN WOOD MIEMBE 5 SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A301. PROVIDE HASHER=S UNDER THE HEADS AND NUT5 OF ALL BOLTS AND LA6 SCREWS BEARING ON WOOD. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, ALL NAILS SHALL BE COMMON. ALL SHIMS SHALL BE 5EASONED AND DRIED AND THE SAME GRADE (MINIMUM) AS MEMBERS CONNECTED. ALL JOISTS AND MULTIPLE J0157 BEAMS SHALL BE cONNECTED TO FLUSH BEAMS WITH "U' SERIES 0151 HAN5ER5. 29. WOOD FRAMING NOTES: THE FOLLOWING APPLY UNLESS OTHERWISE SHOWN ON THE FLANS ,A. ALL WOOD FRAMING DETAILS NOT SHOWN OTHERWISE SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED TO THE MINIMUM STANDARDS OF THE UNIFORM BUILDING CODE. MINIMUM NAILING, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, SHALL CONFORM TO TABLE 23 -I -0 OF THE UNIFOR1 BUILDING LODE A5 SHOWN IN DETAIL - /5_ COORDINATE THE 5LZE AND LOCATION OF ALL 0306/665 WITH MEGHANIGAL AND ARCHITECTURAL DRA6IN65. PROVIDE WASHERS UNDER THE HEADS AND NUT5 OF ALL BOLTS AND LAG BOLTS BEARING ON WOOD. INSTALLATION OF LA6 BOLTS SHALL 00NF0RM TO UBC SECTION 2331.1.2 6 INSTALLATION OF BOLTS SHALL CONFORM TO LEG SECTION 2336.1.2. B. WALL FRAMING ALL 570 WALLS SHOWN AND NOT OTHERWISE NOTED SHALL BE 2x4 STUDS 9 16 "ac. AT INTERIOR WALLS AND 2x6 6 24 °oc AT EXTERIOR HALL5. TWO STUDS MINIMUM SHALL BE PROVIDED AT THE T A H DE N A AT A. END OF ALL WALLS EACH 51 OF ALL OPENIN65, AND 134E ENDS OF ALL BEAMS AND HEADERS. H N NOT DER WO 2x8 FADERS SHALL BE PROVIDED OVER ALL OPINI 65 0 OTHERWISE NOTED. SOLD BLOCKING FOR WOOD 0OLUMN5 SHALL BE PROVIDED THROU63 FLOOR TO SUPPORTS BELOW. ALL 5ND WALLS SHALL HAVE THEIR LOWER WOOD PLATES ATTACHED 70 WOOD FRAMIN6 BELOW WITH 16d NAILS AT Inc STAG632E9 OR BOLTED TO CONCRETE WITH %" DIAMETER ANCHOR BOLTS (EMBED T ") 5 6' -0 "oc UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE. INDIVIDUAL MEMBERS OF BUILT -UP STUD POSE SEAL BE NAILED TO EACH OTHER WITH 16d 9 12 °30 STA66C6FD. REFER TO THE PLANS AND SHEAR WALL SCHEDULE FOR REQUIRED SHEATHING AND NAILING. L. FLOOR AND ROOF FRAMING: PROVIDE DOUBLE J01535 UNDER ALL PARALLEL PARTITIONS THAT EXTEND OVER MORE THAN HALF THE JOIST LENGTH AND AROUND ALL OPENIN65 IN FLOORS OR ROOFS UNLESS OTHERISE NOTED. PROVIDE BRIDSIN6 6 8' -0 "oc AND SOLID 700011136 AT A'..L, P JOISTS TO SUPPORTS WITH TWO 16d NAILS. ATTACH TIMBER JOISTS TO FLUSH HEADER POINTS. OR BEANS WITH �5IMPSON METAL JOIST HANGERS IN ACCORDANCE WITH NOTES ABOVE. NAIL ALL MULTI -JOIST BEAMS TO6E7,ER WITH 46d 9 Inc 5T,A66ERED. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON THE PLAN5, PLYWOOD ROOF AND FLOOR SHEATHING SHALL BE LAID UP WITH 6RAIN PERPENDICULAR TO SUPPORTS AND NAILED WITH 8d NAILS 9 6°oc TO FRAMED PANEL ED6E5 AND OVER STUD WALLS A5 SHOWN ON PLANS AND 9 12 "oc (10'oc AT FLOORS) TO INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS. PROVIDE APPROVED PLYWOOD ED6E CLIPS CENIER33 BEINEN JOISTS /TRUSSES AT UNBLOCKED ROOF 5HEATHIN6 ED6E5. ALL FLOOR SHEATHING ED6E5 SHALL HAVE APPROVED TON6UE- AND- 6ROOVE JOINTS OR SHALL BE SUPPORTED WITH SOLID BLOCKING. ALLOW 0" SPACING AT ALL PANEL ED6E5 AND END5 OF FLOOR AND ROOF SHEATHING. TOENAIL BLOCKING TO SUPPORTS WITH 164 9 Inc UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. AT BLOCKED FLOOR AND ROOF DIAPHRAGMS PROVIDE FLAT 2x BLOCKING AT ALL UNFRAMED PANEL 06E5 AND NAIL WITH EDGE NAILING SPECIFIED. D. NAILING: ALL NAILS SPECIFIED ON DRAWIN65 WERE DE516NED TO BE COMMON. PNEUMATICALLY DRIVEN NAILS OF THE SAME LENGTH MAY BE SUBSTITUTED FOR COMMON NAILS PROVIDED THEIR NUMBER 15 INGRE450 (5PACIN6 15 DEGREASED) IN PROPORTION TO THEIR DIAMETER ACCORDING TO THE FOLLOWING FORMULA: 5' = 5 x (171 /172) NAILS COMMON DIAMETER Bd I0d 124 466 Number Data 0.13'" 0.148" 0.148" 0.162" Dewphoi of Re.= Sheet Title Sheer RECEIVED CITV OF TUKWILA S 1 S-de N3proveo 9y TRL— 65 5335, H — '_5 —,n, PERMIT CENTER Fab Draw, SMO oeckec ate 3,21 9 ISSUED FOR BIDS - FOR CONSTRUCTION 12 18 24 30 ttc 2 24.5E typ T5 to SASE tic. 75 to 612 =4, NBBJ In South Jackson Street Seattle. Washington 98104 12061 223-5555 Fax 1206) 621-2300 6 (CONTRACTOR VERIFY) 1 3 7 EMBED 0 5 6. 1 x12xr-0 ) - - IN/ (2) 1 60 x 5" WELDED STJ2S @ 4 ( TYP EA AAVIL.,:ON PER, COUGHLIN PORTER LUNDEEN A CONSULTING STRUCTURAL AND CIVIL ENGINEERING CORPORATION 217 PINE STREET - SUITE 520 IA: 206/343-0460 SEATTLE, WA 98101 F: 206/343-5691 typ - tYP typ - - t9P NEIN T5 35x11/2x0 (6 COL. LNES 0162() NEIN T5 3x162xV5 (9 COL. ',NES ONLY) T-2 (CONTRACTOR VERIFY) alliMM11102, 13 14 0 Re <56 xO-54 , 75 COLS. SPLICE. LOCATIONS PER PLAN BY CONTRACTOR -- 0 CONT. BENT 5EE ARCH. 26 -- NEW TS 3 ABOVE 6 BELOW 25 3 !CAL -- NEC TS 36x3 ABOVE 6 BELOW — NEC TS 36,1 TYP., SEE ARCHL ELEVATIONS P EXIST 75 COLS. PER PLAN t9p> 199> • ‘= '•F T5 56x55x1.4 TYPAL SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 26/52 9 15 4 4x3I5x4I, x 0 LLV MIDWAY BTINN TS 3 IN/ (2) 1 6 T0402--BOL75 6 IN 162" SLOTTED HOLES 4x BLOCKING CONK PER 5/52 EXIST. 51110 FRAMING 6 16"oc _ — SLOPED T5 BEYOND — t — — TS INHERE OLGURS CONDITION 62(64. 25 5(5" 4 45,5 BEYOND --- T5 5'6 PER PLAN 4 CONDITION 6 25 5 16 2 ° 01 4x4 BLOCKING WI (2) 554 6 (4; 164 FACE NAIL EA. END DOWELS TO - , 04225 0205' REIN/ EX15`. 5710 NALL -- FRAMING 5 24"oc 4 4x3 x WI (2) 1 THR.0 BOLTS 4 6"oc TS 3 TYR UOTA - Se 00 00/' MERE OCCURS (5" CON' BENT 0 - SEE ARGIL. 14) 4 4 001 FOR GALL01.)T5 GOMMON SEE 21/52 2'-0'' sci_ 7 E. 75 C..OL5TN5 TYP. , (41 02 - - VERT 4 3 TES o Voc. GROUT - CORE --- 75 312x FER PLAN - C5 PRE-CAST CONC. - CAP RER 402/. '33 K - 28/52 2) EA 'NAY TS 30 5,5/664 ,1 — — (3) 4 EA NAY z4, 3,0•' 000/ TPIS CONNECTION OCCURS AT SKENED NALL 5 NALL 60002-05 .6050006000 TO VERIFY EXIST. WALL FRAMING CONDITIONS EXIST 026000 SHEA REMOVE AND REPLACE AS REQUIRED FOR CONN 1152 - 550 4x25 (CIF NEE) 000 ARCH.) TYP. OF (5). 500 ARCH. FOR LOCATION. -0020200240 02/5 /12-5 5 17 • C,12x20:7 (4) SIDES .4 520,,,05 5 52 05150" 2x 50/= -- 50AMIN5 5 2 24"04 NW (2, A 'c 7 000/5 5 6 , 51v2" 520/0/2 /OLES TY. E356 0= 50 05000 05157. BLDG. R6 0 i/2 4 2x2x x 0-3' 26/56 20.55 3, ENTRY PAVILION - FRAMING PLAN 24 16,52;0 4-52' TS 065 BEYONQ E.V3 AK= AS REQ., RE: OR CONN - 5 B0 52YON2 TYPICAL BRIDGE PLAN 12 5-00525000/ ARCA LAANNE_ 050 5000 18 - 5 3125:6 - 1,CAL (4, CORNERS 2,52 II) LOCATIONS - SEE ARC, 5' TYP. ENTRY PAVILLION COLUMN 29 ENTRY PAVILION - FOUNDATION PLA 30 By Descriptor, of Remom sheet No BRIDGE FRAMING PLAN & DETAILS PAVILLION PLANS & DETAILS sctie 304" = 1 '-e" L NO 4PrOved By TRL Job N.Ser 9 .1131 Nurber c4N PERMIT CENTER S2 Desged EAD orw., Decked ode 3, 2 9 ISSUED FOR BIDS - FOR CONSTRUCTION ti , , _ _ Nr 4 T TYF — 1I ttc 2 24.5E typ T5 to SASE tic. 75 to 612 =4, NBBJ In South Jackson Street Seattle. Washington 98104 12061 223-5555 Fax 1206) 621-2300 6 (CONTRACTOR VERIFY) 1 3 7 EMBED 0 5 6. 1 x12xr-0 ) - - IN/ (2) 1 60 x 5" WELDED STJ2S @ 4 ( TYP EA AAVIL.,:ON PER, COUGHLIN PORTER LUNDEEN A CONSULTING STRUCTURAL AND CIVIL ENGINEERING CORPORATION 217 PINE STREET - SUITE 520 IA: 206/343-0460 SEATTLE, WA 98101 F: 206/343-5691 typ - tYP typ - - t9P NEIN T5 35x11/2x0 (6 COL. LNES 0162() NEIN T5 3x162xV5 (9 COL. ',NES ONLY) T-2 (CONTRACTOR VERIFY) alliMM11102, 13 14 0 Re <56 xO-54 , 75 COLS. SPLICE. LOCATIONS PER PLAN BY CONTRACTOR -- 0 CONT. BENT 5EE ARCH. 26 -- NEW TS 3 ABOVE 6 BELOW 25 3 !CAL -- NEC TS 36x3 ABOVE 6 BELOW — NEC TS 36,1 TYP., SEE ARCHL ELEVATIONS P EXIST 75 COLS. PER PLAN t9p> 199> • ‘= '•F T5 56x55x1.4 TYPAL SOUTHCENTER CORPORATE SQUARE TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 26/52 9 15 4 4x3I5x4I, x 0 LLV MIDWAY BTINN TS 3 IN/ (2) 1 6 T0402--BOL75 6 IN 162" SLOTTED HOLES 4x BLOCKING CONK PER 5/52 EXIST. 51110 FRAMING 6 16"oc _ — SLOPED T5 BEYOND — t — — TS INHERE OLGURS CONDITION 62(64. 25 5(5" 4 45,5 BEYOND --- T5 5'6 PER PLAN 4 CONDITION 6 25 5 16 2 ° 01 4x4 BLOCKING WI (2) 554 6 (4; 164 FACE NAIL EA. END DOWELS TO - , 04225 0205' REIN/ EX15`. 5710 NALL -- FRAMING 5 24"oc 4 4x3 x WI (2) 1 THR.0 BOLTS 4 6"oc TS 3 TYR UOTA - Se 00 00/' MERE OCCURS (5" CON' BENT 0 - SEE ARGIL. 14) 4 4 001 FOR GALL01.)T5 GOMMON SEE 21/52 2'-0'' sci_ 7 E. 75 C..OL5TN5 TYP. , (41 02 - - VERT 4 3 TES o Voc. GROUT - CORE --- 75 312x FER PLAN - C5 PRE-CAST CONC. - CAP RER 402/. '33 K - 28/52 2) EA 'NAY TS 30 5,5/664 ,1 — — (3) 4 EA NAY z4, 3,0•' 000/ TPIS CONNECTION OCCURS AT SKENED NALL 5 NALL 60002-05 .6050006000 TO VERIFY EXIST. WALL FRAMING CONDITIONS EXIST 026000 SHEA REMOVE AND REPLACE AS REQUIRED FOR CONN 1152 - 550 4x25 (CIF NEE) 000 ARCH.) TYP. OF (5). 500 ARCH. FOR LOCATION. -0020200240 02/5 /12-5 5 17 • C,12x20:7 (4) SIDES .4 520,,,05 5 52 05150" 2x 50/= -- 50AMIN5 5 2 24"04 NW (2, A 'c 7 000/5 5 6 , 51v2" 520/0/2 /OLES TY. E356 0= 50 05000 05157. BLDG. R6 0 i/2 4 2x2x x 0-3' 26/56 20.55 3, ENTRY PAVILION - FRAMING PLAN 24 16,52;0 4-52' TS 065 BEYONQ E.V3 AK= AS REQ., RE: OR CONN - 5 B0 52YON2 TYPICAL BRIDGE PLAN 12 5-00525000/ ARCA LAANNE_ 050 5000 18 - 5 3125:6 - 1,CAL (4, CORNERS 2,52 II) LOCATIONS - SEE ARC, 5' TYP. ENTRY PAVILLION COLUMN 29 ENTRY PAVILION - FOUNDATION PLA 30 By Descriptor, of Remom sheet No BRIDGE FRAMING PLAN & DETAILS PAVILLION PLANS & DETAILS sctie 304" = 1 '-e" L NO 4PrOved By TRL Job N.Ser 9 .1131 Nurber c4N PERMIT CENTER S2 Desged EAD orw., Decked ode 3, 2 9 ISSUED FOR BIDS - FOR CONSTRUCTION NBBJ SOUTL MK IL III C RP R IN T TON c OPERATION: ,reber Dere 1. LIGHTS ARE OFF WRING DAYLIGHT HOURS AS SENSED BY PHOTOCELL_ LIGHTS ARE ON WRING DARKNESS HOURS AS SENSED BY PHOTOCELL 3. LIGHTS ARE MANUAL CONTP.OLLED BY H —O—A SWITCH. EXTERIOR LIGHTING CONTROL DIAGRAM - TYPICAL NO SCALE Desuiphal ,d ReVmwu Sheet hele ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN sc. AS NOTED AB-loved By De FLAG NOTES • PROVIDE CANOPY FRAME UGHT FIXTURES TYPE OA ELUPTIPAR, 175W MH. PROVIDE 1/2. 2/10 & f12G TO 277 PANEL LA. PROVIDE 20A CB IN LA AND WIRE VIA UGHTING CONTROL PROVIDE POWER TO ADDRESS COLUMN UGHIT FIXTURE, TYPE B. © PROVIDE 1/2" 2p O & #12:3 TO 120V PANEL P. PROVIDE 20A CB IN PA AND WIRE MA UGHTING CONTROL SEE ARCHITECTURAL DETAIL © REPLACE EXISTING RECESSED DOYNUGHTING IN WALKWAY /SOFFIT WITH NEW LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE E. MATCH EXISTING VC„_IAGE REMOVE EXISTING SITE UGHTING POLE AND CONCRETE BASE. PROVIDE PULLBOX AND SAUCE CONDUCTORS TO MAINTAIN CIRCUIT CONTINUITY. © REMOVE EXISITING UGHTNG IN WALKWAY. I>. REWIRE ONE 3 "S Z CIRCUIT TO MDP FROM PANEL LA. PROVIDE NEW CB IN PANEL MDP. GFNERAI NOTES 1. PROVIDE ALL ELECTRICAL WORK AND ELECTRICAL DESIGN FOR 4 COMPLETE ANC FULLY OPERATIONAL INSTALLATION. 2. CONCEAL ALL RACEWAY IN CONSTRUCTION. 3. CONFORM TO ELECTRICAL CODE, STATE OF WASHINGTON AND CITY OF TUKWILA. 4. OBTAIN ELECTRICAL PERMIT(S) AND INSPECTION(S). 5. PROVIDE AS —BUILT ONE UNE DIAGRAM, AND AS —BUILT ELECTRICAL LOAD CALCULATIONS AND ENERGY CODE CALCULATIONS FOR EACH BUILDING AS REQUIRED BY PERMIT AND INSPECTOR. 6. PROVIDE OUTDOOR UGHTING CONTROL IN EACH BUILDING CONSISTING OF ONE PHOTOCELL, ONE TIME CLOCK, CONTROL RELAY AND CONTACTOR PROVIDE WIRING OF FIXTURES SO UGHTS ARE OFF DURING DAYLIGHT HOURS AND ON /OFF AS SET BY TIME CLOCK. 7. OBTAIN FIRE ALARM PERMIT FOR ELEVATOR WORK. PROVIDE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS AS REQUIRED BY FIRE MARSHAL SYMBOLS I IST 1 o LIGHTING FIXTURES t SWITCH 0 +48" AFF I DUPLEX RECEPTACLE 0 18" AFF O EQUIPMENT CONNECTION D FUSED SWITCH, HEAVY DUTY O TELEPHONE OUTLET O SMOKE DETECTOR O HEAT DETECTOR RACEWAY CONCEALED IN CONSTRUCTION RACEWAY CONCEALED UNDERGROUND JGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDUIF TYPE OA MANUFACTURER: EWTIPAR LARGE HID, M- 454 - 0175— S -06 —•— VISOR —OV LAMP: 175W MH SIZE 18 -1/4" LONG X 14 -7/8" WIDE X 7" HIGH COLOR: DARK BRONZE FEATURES: SURFACE MOUNTED, INTEGRAL BALLAST, CUTOFF VISOR MOUNTED CUSTOM ON BOTTOM OF FIXTURE HEAD, WET LABEL TAMPER RESISTANT FASTENERS. • — CONFIRM TYPE B MANUFACTURER: ABOUTE PET— P- 32 —PL- 120— WHT —WL LAMP: 32W PL FLUORESCENT SIZE: 11 -3/8" HIGH X 5 -3/8" WIDE FEATURES: WET LABEL CAST GUARD, FURNISH WITH REMOTE BALLAST AND WET LABEL RECESSED BOX FOR THE REMOTE BALLAST TYPE E MANUFACTURER: INDY 706R —B1 —SA LAMP: TWO (2)18W QUAD TUBE FLUORESCENT SIZE: 6" DIAMETER X 5 -3/8" DEEP FEATURES: CLEAR ALZAK REFLECTOR, DAMP LABEL Drewe SPD eked DGC .e 3 - 31 - 97 RECEIVED CITV OF TUKW ILA PERMIT CENTER